Veeam Explorers

Version 12
User Guide
August, 2024
© 2024 Veeam Software.

All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form by any means, without written permission from Veeam Software
(Veeam). The information contained in this document represents the current view of Veeam on the issue
discussed as of the date of publication and is subject to change without notice. Veeam shall not be liable for
technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Veeam makes no warranties, express or implied, in
this document. Veeam may have patents, patent applications, trademark, copyright, or other intellectual
property rights covering the subject matter of this document. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the
property of their respective owners. Except as expressly provided in any written license agreement from Veeam,
the furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other
intellectual property.

NOTE
Read the End User Software License Agreement before using the accompanying software programs. Using
any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement.

2 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Contents
CONTACTING VEEAM SOF TWARE ................................ ................................ ........................... 11
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT ................................ ................................ ................................ .... 12
VEE AM EXPLORERS OVERVIEW ................................ ................................ ............................ 13
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR MICROSOFT ACTIVE DIRECTORY ................................ ............................... 14
Planning and Preparation ..................................................................................................................... 15
System Requirements ................................................................................................................16
Ports ......................................................................................................................................... 17
Permissions ...............................................................................................................................18
Required Job Settings ................................................................................................................19
Considerations a nd Limitations .................................................................................................. 20
Launching Application and Exploring Backups ...................................................................................... 22
Getting to Know User Interface ................................................................................................. 23
Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items ..................................................................................... 25
Enabling Extended Logging................................................................................................................. 28
Standalone Databases Management .................................................................................................... 29
Adding Standalone Databases.................................................................................................... 30
Removing Sta ndalone Databases ................................................................................................ 31
Data Restore ...................................................................................................................................... 32
How Restore Works ................................................................................................................... 33
Restoring Objects ..................................................................................................................... 34
Restoring Containers ................................................................................................................. 43
Using 1-Click Restore ................................................................................................................ 52
Data Export ........................................................................................................................................ 55
How Export Works .................................................................................................................... 56
Exporting Objects ..................................................................................................................... 57
Exporting Containers................................................................................................................. 58
Using 1-Click Export ..................................................................................................................60
Data Compare......................................................................................................................................61
How Compare W orks ................................................................................................................. 62
Comparing Active Directory Containers ...................................................................................... 63
Comparing Object Attributes ..................................................................................................... 65
Getting Support.................................................................................................................................. 67
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR MICROSOFT SQL SERVER ................................ ................................ ...... 68
Planning and Preparation .................................................................................................................... 69
System Requirements ............................................................................................................... 70
Ports ........................................................................................................................................ 72
Permissions .............................................................................................................................. 75

3 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Required Job Settings ............................................................................................................... 76
Considerations a nd Limitations .................................................................................................. 78
Launching Application and Exploring Backups .......................................................................................81
Getting to Know User Interface ................................................................................................. 82
How Mounting Works ................................................................................................................ 84
How Data Recovery Works ......................................................................................................... 85
Viewing Database Information ................................................................................................... 86
General Application Settings ............................................................................................................... 87
Configuring Staging SQL Server ................................................................................................. 88
Enabling Extended Logging ........................................................................................................91
Standalone Databases Management .................................................................................................... 92
Adding Standalone Databases.................................................................................................... 93
Removing Sta ndalone Databases ............................................................................................... 95
Data Restore ...................................................................................................................................... 96
How Restore Works ................................................................................................................... 97
Restoring Single Database ......................................................................................................... 98
Restoring Multiple Databases ....................................................................................................112
Restoring Database Schema and Data ....................................................................................... 123
Data Publishing ................................................................................................................................. 133
How Publishing W orks.............................................................................................................. 134
Publishing to Specified Server .................................................................................................. 135
Publishing Latest or Point -in-Time State ................................................................................... 142
Exporting as BAK ..................................................................................................................... 147
Unpublishing Databases ...........................................................................................................149
Refreshing Database Status ......................................................................................................150
Instant Recovery .................................................................................................................................151
How Instant Recovery W orks .................................................................................................... 152
Instant Recovery of Single Database ......................................................................................... 154
Instant Recovery of Multiple Databases .................................................................................... 172
Switchover ..............................................................................................................................189
Managing Insta nt Recovery Session .......................................................................................... 191
Data Export .......................................................................................................................................196
How Export Works ................................................................................................................... 197
Exporting as MDF.....................................................................................................................198
Exporting as BAK ..................................................................................................................... 216
Exporting Database Schema and Data ...................................................................................... 234
SQL Server Database Operations ........................................................................................................ 242
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 245
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR ORACLE................................ ................................ .......................... 246
Planning and Preparation .................................................................................................................. 247

4 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 248
Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 249
Permissions .............................................................................................................................253
Required Job Settings ..............................................................................................................255
Considerations a nd Limitations ................................................................................................ 256
Launching Application and Exploring Backups ..................................................................................... 261
Getting to Know User Interface ............................................................................................... 263
How Mounting Works .............................................................................................................. 265
Viewing Database Information ................................................................................................. 266
General Application Settings ............................................................................................................. 268
Configuring Staging Oracle Server ........................................................................................... 269
Enabling Extended Logging ......................................................................................................272
Exploring Oracle Backups ...................................................................................................................273
Exploring Application-Enabled Backups ................................................................................... 274
Exploring Non-Application Enabled Backups .............................................................................275
Exploring RMAN Backups ........................................................................................................ 280
Data Restore ..................................................................................................................................... 281
How Restore Works ................................................................................................................. 282
Restoring Single Database ....................................................................................................... 283
Restoring Multiple Databases .................................................................................................. 297
Restoring RMAN Backups ........................................................................................................ 306
Data Publishing ................................................................................................................................. 317
How Publishing W orks.............................................................................................................. 318
Publishing to Specified Server .................................................................................................. 319
Publishing Latest or Point -in-Time State ...................................................................................327
Exporting as RMAN Backup ......................................................................................................332
Unpublishing Databases ...........................................................................................................333
Refreshing Database Status ..................................................................................................... 334
Instant Recovery ................................................................................................................................335
How Instant Recovery W orks ................................................................................................... 336
Instant Recovery of Single Database ........................................................................................ 338
Instant Recovery of Multiple Databases ....................................................................................357
Switchover ..............................................................................................................................372
Managing Insta nt Recovery Session ......................................................................................... 374
Data Export ...................................................................................................................................... 379
How Export Works .................................................................................................................. 380
Export as RMAN Backup .......................................................................................................... 384
Export Database Files.............................................................................................................. 393
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 402
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR POSTGRESQL ................................ ................................ ................... 403

5 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Planning and Preparation ..................................................................................................................404
System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 405
Ports ......................................................................................................................................406
Permissions ............................................................................................................................408
Required Job Settings .............................................................................................................409
Considerations a nd Limitations ................................................................................................ 410
Launching Application and Exploring Backups ..................................................................................... 413
Getting to Know User Interface ................................................................................................414
How Mounting Works ...............................................................................................................416
Viewing Insta nce Information ................................................................................................... 417
General Application Settings ..............................................................................................................418
Configuring Staging PostgreSQL Server .....................................................................................419
Enabling Extended Logging ...................................................................................................... 421
Data Restore .................................................................................................................................... 422
How Restore Works ................................................................................................................. 423
Restoring Single Insta nce ........................................................................................................ 424
Restoring Multiple Instances ................................................................................................... 436
Managing Restore Session ....................................................................................................... 444
Data Publishing ................................................................................................................................ 446
How Publishing W orks............................................................................................................. 447
Publishing to Specified Server ................................................................................................. 448
Publishing Latest or Point -in-Time State .................................................................................. 454
Managing Publishing Session ................................................................................................... 458
Instant Recovery ................................................................................................................................461
How Instant Recovery W orks ................................................................................................... 462
Instant Recovery of Single Instance ......................................................................................... 463
Instant Recovery of Multiple Instances .....................................................................................480
Switchover ............................................................................................................................. 494
Managing Insta nt Recovery Session ......................................................................................... 496
Data Export .......................................................................................................................................501
How Export Works .................................................................................................................. 502
Exporting Databases ............................................................................................................... 504
Managing Export Session.......................................................................................................... 512
Restoring Exported Database ................................................................................................... 514
Getting Support................................................................................................................................. 515
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR S AP HANA ................................ ................................ ....................... 516
Planning and Preparation ................................................................................................................... 517
System Requirements .............................................................................................................. 518
Ports ....................................................................................................................................... 519
Permissions ............................................................................................................................. 521

6 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Required Job Settings ..............................................................................................................522
Considerations a nd Limitations .................................................................................................523
Launching Application....................................................................................................................... 526
Getting to Know User Interface ................................................................................................527
Enabling Extended Logging............................................................................................................... 529
Data Restore .................................................................................................................................... 530
How Restore Works .................................................................................................................. 531
Restoring Single Database ........................................................................................................532
Restoring Multiple Databases .................................................................................................. 558
Managing Restore Session ....................................................................................................... 582
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 584
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR MICROSOFT EXCHANGE................................ ................................ ....... 585
Planning and Preparation .................................................................................................................. 586
System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 587
Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 588
Permissions ............................................................................................................................ 590
Required Job Settings ............................................................................................................. 592
Considerations a nd Limitations ................................................................................................ 593
Launching Application and Exploring Backups .................................................................................... 595
Getting to Know User Interface ............................................................................................... 596
Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items ................................................................................... 598
General Application Settings ............................................................................................................. 602
Extensible Storage Engine ....................................................................................................... 603
Mail Settings ..........................................................................................................................604
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................................. 610
Standalone Databases and External Servers ........................................................................................ 611
Adding Microsoft Excha nge Databases ...................................................................................... 612
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server ........................................................................ 613
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service Provider ..........................................................614
Removing Stores ......................................................................................................................616
Restore from Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Backups ....................................................................... 617
1-Click Restore .........................................................................................................................618
Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations ................................................................................... 627
Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers ................................................................................ 646
Restore from Veeam Backup & Replication Backups ............................................................................ 652
1-Click Restore ........................................................................................................................ 653
Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers ................................................................................ 655
Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations ................................................................................... 666
Data Export ...................................................................................................................................... 677
Using 1-Click Export ................................................................................................................ 678

7 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Exporting to Custom Location ..................................................................................................681
Receiving Export Rep orts ........................................................................................................ 683
Data Compare................................................................................................................................... 685
Compare to Microsoft 365 Organizations .................................................................................. 686
Compare to On-Premises Microsoft Servers .............................................................................. 692
Saving Microsoft Excha nge Items ...................................................................................................... 695
Sending Microsoft Exchange Items .................................................................................................... 697
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 699
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR MICROSOFT SHAREPOINT ................................ ................................ ... 700
Planning and Preparation ...................................................................................................................701
System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 702
Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 704
Permissions ............................................................................................................................ 706
Required Job Settings ............................................................................................................. 708
Staging SQL Server ................................................................................................................. 709
Considerations a nd Limitations ..................................................................................................711
Launching Application and Exploring Backups .................................................................................... 720
Getting to Know User Interface ................................................................................................ 721
Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items ....................................................................................723
General Application Settings ..............................................................................................................727
Staging SQL Server Settings .................................................................................................... 728
Custom List Settings ............................................................................................................... 730
Mail Settings ...........................................................................................................................733
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................................. 739
Standalone Databases ....................................................................................................................... 740
Adding Microsoft SharePoint Databases .................................................................................... 741
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Databases .................................................................. 742
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server ....................................................................... 743
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service Provider ......................................................... 744
Removing Databases ............................................................................................................... 746
Restore from Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Backups ...................................................................... 747
Restoring Sites ........................................................................................................................ 748
Restoring Document Libraries and Lists .................................................................................... 768
Restoring Documents and List Items ........................................................................................ 789
Restore from Veeam Backup & Replication Backups ............................................................................ 810
Restoring Sites ......................................................................................................................... 811
Restoring Document Libraries and Lists ..................................................................................... 815
Restoring Documents and List Items .........................................................................................819
Data Export ...................................................................................................................................... 824
Exporting Microsoft SharePoint Data ....................................................................................... 825

8 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Importing Microsoft SharePoint Data ....................................................................................... 826
Saving Microsoft SharePoint Documents and Libraries ........................................................................ 827
Sending Microsoft SharePoint Documents and Libraries ...................................................................... 828
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 830
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR MICROSOFT ONEDRIVE FOR BUSINESS ................................ ..................... 831
Planning and Preparation .................................................................................................................. 832
Considerations a nd Limitations .......................................................................................................... 833
Launching Application and Exploring Backups .................................................................................... 834
Getting to Know User Interface ............................................................................................... 835
Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items ................................................................................... 837
General Application Settings ..............................................................................................................841
Mail Settings .......................................................................................................................... 842
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................................. 848
Standalone Databases ....................................................................................................................... 849
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Databases .................................................................. 850
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server ........................................................................ 851
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service Provider ......................................................... 852
Removing Organizations .......................................................................................................... 854
Data Restore .................................................................................................................................... 855
Restoring Single OneDrive ....................................................................................................... 856
Restoring Multiple OneDrives .................................................................................................. 862
Data Copy ........................................................................................................................................ 868
Step 1. La unch Restore Wizard ................................................................................................. 869
Step 2. Select Authentication Method ...................................................................................... 870
Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365 ................................................................................................ 872
Step 4. Specify Target User ..................................................................................................... 873
Step 5. Specify Target Folder ................................................................................................... 874
Step 6. Specify Restore Options ............................................................................................... 875
Saving Microsoft OneDrives ............................................................................................................... 876
Saving Microsoft OneDrive Documents and Folders ............................................................................ 879
Sending Microsoft OneDrive Data ......................................................................................................880
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 882
VEE AM EXPLORER FOR MICROSOFT TEAMS ................................ ................................ ............ 883
Planning and Preparation .................................................................................................................. 884
Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 885
Permissions ............................................................................................................................ 886
Considerations a nd Limitations ................................................................................................ 887
Launching Application and Exploring Backups .................................................................................... 888
Getting to Know User Interface ............................................................................................... 889
Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items ....................................................................................891

9 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 General Application Settings ............................................................................................................. 896
Mail Settings .......................................................................................................................... 897
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................................. 903
Standalone Databases .......................................................................................................................904
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Databases .................................................................. 905
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server .......................................................................906
Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service Provider ......................................................... 907
Removing Organizations ..........................................................................................................909
Data Restore .................................................................................................................................... 910
Restoring Teams ...................................................................................................................... 911
Restoring Channels a nd Tabs ................................................................................................... 920
Restoring Posts ....................................................................................................................... 927
Restoring Files ........................................................................................................................ 933
Data Export ......................................................................................................................................940
Exporting Multiple P osts ..........................................................................................................941
Exporting Individ ual Posts ....................................................................................................... 943
Saving Posts ..................................................................................................................................... 945
Saving Files ...................................................................................................................................... 947
Sending P osts and Files ..................................................................................................................... 949
Getting Support................................................................................................................................ 952

10 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Contacting Veeam Software
At Veeam Software we value feedback from our customers. It is important not only to help you quickly with your
technical issues, but it is our mission to listen to your input and build products tha t incorporate your
suggestions.

Customer Support
Should you have a technical concern, suggestion or question, visit the Veeam Customer Support Portal to open a
case, search our knowledge base, reference documentation, manage your license or obtain the latest product
release.

Company Contacts
For the most up-to-date information about company contacts and office locations, visit the Veeam Contacts
Webpage.

Online Support
If you have any questions about Veeam products, you can use the following resources:

• Full documentation set: veeam.com/documentation-guides-datasheets.html

• Veeam R&D Forums: forums.veeam.com

11 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

About This Document
This guide provides information on how to use Veeam Explorers that come as part of
Veeam Backup & Replication 12 or Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 7a until it is replaced with a newer version of
the product.

Intended Audience
This user guide is intended for IT administrators, consultants, analysts and other IT professionals using the
product.

12 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorers Overview
Veeam Explorers Suite extends the functionality of Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 and
Veeam Backup & Replication and allows you to restore or export your data from backup or replica files.

Veeam Explorers are distributed as part of Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 and Veeam Backup & Replication,
and you do not need to install them separately. You also do not need to purchase any additional license to use
Veeam Explorers: the available feature set for each Veeam Explorer depends entire ly on the installed edition of
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 and Veeam Backup & Replication. For information about how to deploy Veeam
products, see the following sections:

• Deployment section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide

• Deployment section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide

The following table lists all Veeam Explorers that come as part of Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam
Backup for Microsoft 365.

Veeam Explorer Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange ✔ ✔

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint ✔ ✔

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive

✔ ✔
for Business

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams ✔ ✔

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active

✔ ✖
Directory

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server ✔ ✖

Veeam Explorer for Oracle ✔ ✖

Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL ✔ ✖

Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA ✔1 ✖

1
Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA is available starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1.

This document provides information on how to use Veeam Explorers that come as part of
Veeam Backup & Replication. For information on Veeam Explorers available with Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 only, see the Veeam Explorers User Guide for Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

13 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active
Directory
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to restore and export Active Direct ory objects and
containers from backups, snapshot replicas, CDP replicas, VeeamZIP backups or storage snapshots created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

NOTE
Data recovery from CDP replicas is available starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1.

14 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
Before you start using Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory to restore your data, consider the
following requirements and limitations.

15 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory.

Comp onent Requirement

Microsoft Active Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory supports restore of domain controllers
Directory Domain for the following operating systems:
Services
• Microsoft Windows Server 2022
• Microsoft Windows Server 2019
• Microsoft Windows Server 2016
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008

Minimum supported domain and forest functional level is Windows 2008.

Consider the following:

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not support Active Directory
Lightweight Directory Services (AD LDS).

• Database files created by the domain controller can be opened for object
recovery with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory only if Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is installed on a Windows machine with
the same OS version or later than the version of the domain controller OS.

• To open database files, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses a
service dynamic link library (esent.dll) which is installed with Microsoft Active
Directory Domain Services and can be found in the %SystemRoot% directory.
The Esent.dll file on a machine with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active
Directory must be of the same version as that of Microsoft Active Directory
Domain Services that was used to create database files.

16 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following table lists network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server, Microsoft TCP 135, 445 Manages communication between the
Veeam Backup & Replication Active domain controller and the backup
console Directory server.
machine

TCP, UDP 389 Used for LDAP connections.

TCP 636,
3268,
3269

TCP 49152 to The dynamic RPC range that is used by

65535 the runtime coordination process
(for which is deployed on the Microsoft
Microsoft Active Directory machine for
Windows application-aware image processing
2008 or (when working over the network, not
later) over VIX API).

For more information, see this

Microsoft article.

17 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active
Directory and restore Microsoft Active Directory data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory must meet the
Microsoft Active following requirements:
Directory launch
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore
Operator role on the backup server.

Restore The account used to restore Microsoft Active Directory data must be a member of the
following groups:
• Domain Admins
• Exchange Organization Management

Membership in this group is required only for restore of Exchange attributes.

Assigning Role with PowerShell

To assign the Org anization Management role using PowerShell, run the following cmdlet.

Add-RoleGroupMember “Organization Management” –Member “<user_name>”

18 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
This requirement applies to backup jobs, replication jobs, and CDP policies created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

When you create a job or CDP policy, make sure to enable application-aware processing in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console:

• When you configure a backup job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Backup Job wizard.

• When you configure a replication job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Replication Job wizard.

• When you configure a CDP policy, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the New
CDP Policy wizard.

Note that when you create storage snapshots, application-aware processing is automatically enabled. For more
information, see the Application Item Restore from Storage Snapshots section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

19 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and known limitations of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Activ e Directory.

General
• When Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is installed on a server on which both
Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings
will be inherited from the Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory supports
data recovery from CDP replicas. Consider the following limitations:

o When you recover your data from CDP replicas, you can only use long-term (both application-
consistent and crash-consistent) restore points. Short-term restore points are not supported.

o You can recover your data from a CDP replica if its CDP policy is currently running. During recovery,
the CDP policy does not create new long-term restore points and does not delete existing ones.
Short-term restore points are still created.

o You cannot restore application items from a CDP replica in parallel with guest OS file restore,
SureReplica, and failover.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not support data recovery using a group Managed
Service Account (gMSA) to connect to the target server.

Restore
• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not support restore using PowerShell Direct, VIX API
or vSphere Automation API.

• Data can only be restored back to the original domain. Cross-domain restore is not supported.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not support recovery of the contents of the Domain
Controllers container and most of the contents of the System container (in particular, the Password
Settings container), as this may cause system stability issues on the target machine. Moreover, some of
the contents of the System container, as well as the entire Configuration Partition container, the Microsoft
Exchange System Options container, the Integrated DNS container and so on, can be recovered with
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory, but they are only visible in the Ad vanced Features view to
prevent accidental errors during the recovery process. For more information, see the Browsing, Searching
and Viewing Items section.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory supports restore of both mailbox -enabled objects
(including hard-deleted items and Online Archives ), and mail-enabled objects for the following Microsoft
Exchange versions: Microsoft Exchange Server 2019, Microsoft Exchange Server 2016, Microsoft Exchange
Server 2013 and Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1. For other Microsoft Exchange versions, restore of
mailbox-enabled objects is not supported (only mail-enabled objects can be restored).

• To restore passwords, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses the registry database. To
restore passwords, make sure the System registry hive is available. The default location of the hive is
%systemroot%\System32\Config . When restoring an Active Directory database from the Active Directory
backup using Veeam file-level restore, the registry hive will be located automatically. When restoring
from an imported backup or from VeeamZIP backups, make sure that the system registry hive and the .dit
file are located in the same directory.

20 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • If you plan to restore database items from an Active Directory Domain Services server running Microsoft
Windows ReFS, make sure that the backup server or Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed on a
machine that runs Microsoft Windows Server 2012 or later.

To restore from a server running Microsoft Windows ReFS 3.x, the Veea m Backup & Replication console
must be installed on a machine that runs Microsoft Windows Server 2016 or later, and the ReFS version
must be supported on this machine.

• Restore of Group Policy objects , AD-integrated DNS records and objects from the Configuration Partition
is supported in the Enterprise and Enterprise Plus editions only.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not restore object attributes such as objectSID and
objectGUID from the backup. To restore deleted Active Directory objects, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Active Directory uses existing tombstone objects on the target Active Directory server or objects in the AD
Recycle Bin. In this case, the restored object will have its original objectSID and objectGUID. If an object
you want to restore does not exist in the tombstone container or recycle bin in the target domain, Active
Directory will assign new objectSID and objectGUID attributes to the restored object.

• To restore business-critical objects for which the tombstone object is missing, you can perform
authoritative restore of the entire domain from the old DC backups. For more information on tombstone
objects, see this Microsoft article.

• Always use backups that are newer than the tombstone lifetime interval for the Active Directory forest. To
determine a tombstone lifetime interval, you can use ADSIEdit or Dsquery . For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

• When you move an object from one domain to another within a forest (for example, using the
Movetree.exe utility or any other 3rd party tool), no tombstone for this object will remain in the source
Active Directory; such an object cannot be fully recovered to the original domain.

Export
• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses Lightweight Data Interchange Format to save Active
Directory objects and containers to . ldf files. You can make an . ldf file available to the Active Directory
Domain Services server by importing it with the ldifde utility. For more information, see this Microsoft
article.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not support exporting passwords.

21 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory and load Active directory data, you can use either of the
following methods:

• Use the Restore application item option to load Active Directory data from a restore point created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

For more information, see the Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

• Go to Sta rt, click Veea m Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory and manually open Active Directory
databases, as described in the Adding Standalone Databases section.

When starting the application from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of the backup server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform recovery operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory must be run with
elevated permissions. The user account must be a member of the local Administrators group on
the machine where Veeam Explorers Suite is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is running, select Use
W ind ows session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

22 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory provides you with a convenient user interface that allows you to
perform required operations in a user-friendly manner.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory wizard or window. You
will then be redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains general program commands organized into logical groups.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of your backup files.

23 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which shows you the details about objects you have selected in the navigation pane.

24 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items
This topic explains how to use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory to:

• Browse backup content

• Search for objects in a backup file

Browsing
To view the contents of a backup file, use the navigation pane which shows you the database structure
containing your active directory objects. After you select a container in the navigation pane, you can see its
contents in the preview pane.

Right-click an object and select View attributes to view object attributes. To copy necessary attributes to the
clipboard, select an attribute and press [Ctrl+C] on the keyboard. Multiple selection is also supported.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory does not display some objects and containers in the default view,
such as the entire Microsoft Exchange System Options , System, Integrated DNS, Configuration Partition
containers, as well as the objects stored in the Domain Controllers container. This behavior is intended to
prevent accidental errors during the recovery process that may affect the system stability of the target machine.

You can view and recover some of this data if you open the Home tab and enable Ad vanced Features, but you
must manually verify all recovery operations to ensure stable operation of the system.

Searching
The search mechanism allows you to find items matching specified search criteria.

To search for the required items, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an object in which you want to find your data.

25 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Enter a search query in the search field at the top of the preview pane. Then press [Enter] or click the
Sea rch button to the right of the search field.

NOTE

To find the exact phrase, use double quotes. For example, " group policy ".

Using LDAP Queries

To use the LDAP search query, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a container.

2. On the ribbon menu, click Use LDAP Filter.

26 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the search field, enter an LDAP query. Then press [Enter] or click the Sea rch button to the right of the
search field.

27 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Enabling Extended Logging
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to enable an extended logging mode to collect more
detailed logs on specific operations. After you enable extended logging, you can go back to the application and
perform the actions for which you want to collect additional information. Then you can collect the logs. For
more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

To configure extended logging mode, do the following:

1. Go to the main menu and click General Options.

2. On the Ad vanced tab, select the E na ble extended logging check box and click OK.

3. Go back to the application, perform necessary actions and then review the logs to see the details.

28 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Standalone Databases Management
This section explains how to use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory to add and remove standalone
Microsoft Active Directory databases.

IMP ORTANT

Make sure the database you are adding to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory scope was not
locked by another process.

29 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Standalone Databases
To add a standalone Active Directory database manually, do the following:

1. Select the root Active Directory node in the navigation pane and click Ad d Database on the ribbon or right-
click the Active Directory node and select Ad d database.

2. Specify the location of the Active Directory database file and folder that contains associated transaction
log files (Edb.log and Edb.chk).

By default, the Active Directory database file (NTDS.DIT) is located in the %SystemRoot%\NTDS
directory. Make sure that the system registry hive is located in the same place.

30 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Removing Standalone Databases
To remove a database from the application scope, right-click a database in the navigation pane and select
Remove database.

31 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
This section contains information about the available restore operations in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active
Directory.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

32 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Restore Works
Restoring your data with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory works in the following manner:

1. After you select a restore point, Veeam Backup & Replication launches Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Active Directory. Meanwhile, Veeam Backup & Replication sends a mount command to the Veeam Mount
Service running on the mount server associated with the backup repository. The Veeam Mount Service
mounts the file system from the backup repository to the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Active Directory is opened.

2. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory locates the ntds.dit file and the associated transaction
logs (usually in the %SystemRoot%\NTDS folder) on the mounted file system. To read these files, Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses the native Windows Extensible Storage Engine dynamic link
library (esent.dll) located in the %SystemRoot%\System32 folder of the machine where Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is opened.

3. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses native Active Directory functionality to restore the
selected items from the ntds.dit file on the mounted file system to the target machine. Data transfer is
established through an LDAP connection.

33 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Objects
To restore Active Directory objects, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify connection parameters.

3. Specify the restore location.

4. Specify password restore options.

5. Specify the account state.

6. Specify restore options.

7. Specify attributes to restore.

34 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select an object.

2. On the Ob jects tab, select Restore Objects > Restore objects to or right-click an object and select Restore
ob jects to.

35 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Connection Parameters
At this step of the wizard, specify the following:

• A target production server to which you want to restore your data.

Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection.

• User credentials to connect to the LDAP server.

Global Catalog Server

To specify a Global Catalog server, click the Settings button on the right side of the Server field and choose
either of the following options:

• Detect automatically — to automatically detect a server.

• Use the following server — to choose a server from the list.

36 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Location
At this step of the wizard, select a container to which you want to restore the objects.

You can select the following:

• Restore to the original container — to restore data to the original container in your production
environment.

• Restore to the following container — to select a different container, as described in Browsing Container.

NOTE

If a container that is being restored was not found in the production environment, it will be restored anew.

37 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing Container
To select a different container, click Browse and choose a container you want to use.

38 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Password Restore Options
At this step, select one of the following options:

• Restore password. To restore the password from the backup file.

• Set password to. To set a new password.

• Do not restore password. To skip restoring the password.

This option will not make any changes to the currently configured passwords in your environment.

Consider the following:

• When providing a new password, check that it complies with the password policy in your production
environment.

• If you select Restore password or Set password to options, you may also request a user to change the
password at next log on.

Keep in mind that this setting will not take effect if a user is not allowed to change the password due to
security limitations.

• When restoring multiple accounts, a new password will be set for all the accounts altogether.

• To restore account passwords, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses registry database. Make
sure that the System registry hive is available.

The default location is %systemroot%\System32\Config.

• When restoring Active Directory database from an Active Directory backup file using file -level restore, the
registry hive will be located automatically. Otherwise, make sure the system registry hive is located in the
same folder as .DIT file.

39 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Account State
At this step of the wizard, select one of the following options:

• Keep account state from backup — to keep the account state as it is in the backup file.

• E na ble account — to change the account state to enabled.

• Disable account — to change the account state to disabled.

40 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, specify restore options.

You can select the following:

• Ob jects to process:

o Cha nged objects — to restore changed objects.

o Deleted objects — to restore deleted objects.

• Restore:

o E ntire objects — to restore entire objects collection.

o Selected attributes only — to select particular attributes.

When selecting Selected attributes only, you will be offered to choose the attributes you want to
restore in the next step.

This option is not applicable to restore of Group Policy Objects.

• Multi-valued attributes:

o Rep lace — to replace production data with that of a backup file.

o Merge — to merge existing data with that of a backup file.

By default, multi-valued attributes will be replaced, not merged.

NOTE
• When working with Active Directory 2016, this dialog will also include the Restore expiration time
option, which allows you to restore expiration time for linked attributes.
• Users cannot change recovery settings for disabled attributes. Such attributes will be either restored
or skipped according to the default configuration.

41 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Attributes to Restore
At this step of the wizard, select attributes you want to restore.

This step is available only if you have chosen the Selected attributes only option at the previous step.

After the restore process is complete, review the results shown in the Restore summary window. You can filter
notifications by their status: Error, Warning or Success.

42 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Containers
To restore Active Directory containers, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify connection parameters.

3. Specify the restore location.

4. Specify password restore options.

5. Specify the account state.

6. Specify restore options.

7. Specify attributes to restore.

43 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select an object.

2. On the Container tab, select Restore Container > Restore container to or right-click a container and select
Restore container to.

44 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Connection Parameters
At this step of the wizard, specify the following:

• A target production server to which you want to restore your data.

Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection.

• User credentials to connect to the LDAP server.

Global Catalog Server

To specify a Global Catalog server, click the Settings button on the right side of the Server field and choose
either of the following options:

• Detect automatically — to automatically detect a server.

• Use the following server — to choose a server from the list.

45 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Location
At this step of the wizard, select a container to which you want to restore the objects.

You can select the following:

• Restore to the original container — to restore data to the original container in your production
environment.

• Restore to the following container — to select a different container, as described in Browsing Container.

NOTE

If a container that is being restored was not found in the production environment, it will be restored anew.

46 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing Container
To select a different container, click Browse and choose a container you want to use.

47 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Password Restore Options
At this step, select one of the following options:

• Restore password. To restore the password from the backup file.

• Set password to. To set a new password.

• Do not restore password. To skip restoring the password.

This option will not make any changes to the currently configured passwords in your environment.

Consider the following:

• When providing a new password, check that it complies with the password policy in your production
environment.

• If you select Restore password or Set password to options, you may also request a user to change the
password at next log on.

Keep in mind that this setting will not take effect if a user is not allowed to change the password due to
security limitations.

• When restoring multiple accounts, a new password will be set for all the accounts altogether.

• To restore account passwords, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses registry database. Make
sure that the System registry hive is available.

The default location is %systemroot%\System32\Config.

• When restoring Active Directory database from an Active Directory backup file using file -level restore, the
registry hive will be located automatically. Otherwise, make sure the system registry hive is located in the
same folder as .DIT file.

48 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Account State
At this step of the wizard, select one of the following options:

• Keep account state from backup — to keep the account state as it is in the backup file.

• E na ble account — to change the account state to enabled.

• Disable account — to change the account state to disabled.

49 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, specify restore options.

You can select the following:

• Ob jects to process:

o Cha nged objects — to restore changed objects.

o Deleted objects — to restore deleted objects.

• Restore:

o E ntire objects — to restore entire objects collection.

o Selected attributes only — to select particular attributes.

When selecting Selected attributes only, you will be offered to choose the attributes you want to
restore in the next step.

• Multi-valued attributes:

o Rep lace — to replace production data with that of a backup file.

o Merge — to merge existing data with that of a backup file.

By default, multi-valued attributes will be replaced, not merged.

NOTE
• When working with Active Directory 2016, this dialog will also include the Restore expiration time
option which allows you to restore expiration time for linked attributes. If an attribute being
restored expires during the restore session, the attribute will not be restored.
• Users cannot change recovery settings for disabled attributes. Such attributes will be either restored
or skipped according to the default configuration.

50 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Attributes to Restore
At this step of the wizard, select attributes you want to restore.

This step is available only if you have chosen the Selected attributes only option at the previous step.

After the restore process is complete, review the results shown in the Restore summary window. You can filter
notifications by their status: Error, Warning or Success.

51 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Using 1-Click Restore
The 1-Click Restore feature allows you to quickly recover Active Directory objects and containers back to the
original domain in your production environment.

Consider the following:

• Both changed and deleted objects will be restored.

• All the attributes will be restored.

• Attribute values and security descriptors will be replaced with that of a backup file.

Restoring Containers
To restore a container, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a container.

2. On the Container tab, select Restore Container > Restore container to <original_location> or right-click a
container and select Restore container to <original_location> .

52 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After the restore process is complete, review the results shown in the Restore Summary window. You can filter
notifications by their status: Error, Warning or Success.

Restoring Objects
To restore an object, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select objects.

2. On the Ob jects tab, select Restore Objects > Restore objects to <original_location> or right-click an object
and select Restore objects to <original_location> .

53 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After the restore process is complete, review the results shown in the Restore Summary window. You can filter
notifications by their status: Error, Warning or Success.

54 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
This section contains information about the available export options for Active Directory objects and containers.

Before exporting data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

55 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Export Works
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to export your data to the machine where Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is opened.

Exporting Microsoft Active Directory data works in the following manner:

1. After you select a restore point, Veeam Backup & Replication launches Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Active Directory. Meanwhile, Veeam Backup & Replication sends a mount command to the Veeam Mount
Service running on the mount server associated with the backup repository. The Veeam Mount Service
mounts the file system from the backup repository to the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Active Directory is opened.

2. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory locates the ntds.dit file and the associated transaction
logs (usually in the %SystemRoot%\NTDS folder) on the mounted file system. To read these files, Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses the native Windows Extensible Storage Engine dynamic link
library (esent.dll) located in the %SystemRoot%\System32 folder of the machine where Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is opened.

3. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory converts the necessary data to the LDF format and saves it
to the specified folder. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses the Lightweight Data
Interchange Format to save Active Directory objects and containers as LDF files.

You can make an exported LDF file available to an Active Directory Domain Services server by importing it with
the ldifde utility. For more information, see this Microsoft article.

56 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Objects
To export Active Directory objects, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select an object.

2. On the Ob jects tab, select E x port Objects > E x port objects to or right-click an object and select E x port
ob jects to.

3. Specify the destination folder and click Sa ve.

57 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Containers
To export containers and their contents, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select a container.

2. On the Container tab, select E x port Container > E xport container to or right-click a container and select
E x port container to.

3. In the E x port Container window, in the E x port to field, specify the destination location.

To save only objects included in the selected container and meet specific filtering criteria, click Show
settings to set the filter.

4. [Optional] Select the Sa ve only objects that suit the following filter check box and enter filtering criteria.

If necessary, select the Use LDAP filter check box to switch to the LDAP filtering mode.

58 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 5. Click E x port.

All the nested containers (if any) will be preserved during the export.

59 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Using 1-Click Export
To export a container or object to the default location, do the following:

1. Select a container or object.

2. On the Container tab, select E x port Container > E xport Container to < target_folder> or E x port Objects >
E x port Object to <target_folder>. Alternatively, you can use the associated context menu command.

NOTE

The < target_folder> destination depends on the location you used during the last export operation.

60 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Compare
This section explains how to use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory to compare data in the backup
file with that of the production state.

61 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Compare Works
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory allows you to compare your data on the backup file with its
present state on the original machine used to create the backup.

Comparing Microsoft Active Directory data works in the following manner:

1. After you select a restore point, Veeam Backup & Replication launches Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Active Directory. Meanwhile, Veeam Backup & Replication sends a mount command to the Veeam Mount
Service running on the mount server associated with the backup repository. The Veeam Mount Service
mounts the file system to the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is opened.

2. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory locates the ntds.dit file and the associated transaction
logs (usually in the %SystemRoot%\NTDS folder) on the mounted file system. To read these files, Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory uses the native Windows Extensible Storage Engine dynamic link
library (esent.dll) located in the %SystemRoot%\System32 folder of the machine where Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is opened.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory also connects to Microsoft Active Directory on the original
machine.

3. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory compares Microsoft Active Directory containers or object
attributes on the backup with their present state on the original machine. Veeam Explorer for Mic rosoft
Active Directory displays which objects or attribute values have changed since the last time the Microsoft
Active Directory machine was backed up. If you are comparing containers, the information is displayed in
the preview pane and if you are comparing object attributes — in a separate window.

You can use the displayed information to choose which objects or attribute values to recover. You can either
restore objects or attribute values to the original machine, or export objects to the machine where Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory is opened.

62 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Comparing Active Directory Containers
To compare Active Directory containers, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a container.

2. On the Home tab, select Compare with Production to detect changed, moved or deleted objects since the
last Active Directory backup.

63 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Click Show Changed Objects Only on the ribbon to view only those items that have been changed since
the last backup.

The following figure shows user accounts the attributes of which have been changed since the last time
they were backed up. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory can also combine item states to
represent the most accurate state of an object. For example, if object attributes have been changed and
the object was moved to a different location, the object status in this case will be shown as Moved ,
Changed .

64 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Comparing Object Attributes
To compare Active Directory objects attributes, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a container.

2. In the preview pane, select an object.

3. On the Ob jects tab, select Compare object attributes or right-click an object and select Compare object
a ttributes.

4. Review changed attributes.

To show unchanged attributes, select Show unchanged attributes at the top-right corner. To show system
properties, select Show system attributes.

65 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 To restore an attribute, select it and click Restore. Multiple selection is also supported.

66 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Active Directory, you can visit Veeam R&D
Forums or submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Enabling Extended Logging.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

67 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server allows you to restore, publish, instantly recover and export Microsoft
SQL Server databases and schema objects from restore points created by Veeam Backup & Replication. Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server supports data recovery from backups, snapshot replicas, CDP replicas,
VeeamZIP backups and storage snapshots.

NOTE
Data recovery from CDP replicas is available starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1.

68 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
Before you start using Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server to restore your data, consider the following
requirements and limitations.

69 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

Comp onent Requirement

Microsoft SQL Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server supports restore of the following Microsoft
Server SQL Server versions:

• Microsoft SQL Server 2022 (only for Windows)

• Microsoft SQL Server 2019 (only for Windows)
• Microsoft SQL Server 2017 (only for Windows)
• Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2
• Microsoft SQL Server 2014 SP3
• Microsoft SQL Server 2012 SP4
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 SP3
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 SP4

All editions of Microsoft SQL Server except LocalDB are supported.

The database whose logs you want to back up must use the Full or Bulk-logged
recovery model. In this case, all changes of the Microsoft SQL Server state will be
written to transaction logs, and you will be able to replay transaction logs to restore
the Microsoft SQL Server. You can use the Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio to
switch to one of these models. For more information, see Microsoft Docs.

Restore of Microsoft SQL Server data may require an available staging Microsoft SQL
Server. To learn how to configure this server, see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

NOTE

AlwaysOn Availability Groups are supported for Microsoft SQL Server 2012 and later.

Consider the following:

• By default, the AUTO_CLOSE option for Microsoft SQL Server databases is set to Fa lse.

If AUTO_CLOSE is enabled, your databases may be skipped from processing.

• To restore database items from a Microsoft SQL Server that is running Microsoft Windows ReFS, the
backup server or Veeam Backup & Replication console must be installed on a machine that runs Microsoft
Windows Server 2012 or later.

• To restore data from a server that is running Microsoft Windows ReFS 3.x, the backup server or
Veeam Backup & Replication console must be installed on a machine that runs Microsoft Windows Server
2016.

• Nodes participating in AlwaysOn Availability Groups are supported, but using Availability Group Listeners
as staging servers is not recommended.

70 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Staging SQL Server Requirements
Consider the following:

• Make sure that the staging server has the same version of Microsoft SQL Server as the source server, or a
later version.

• As a staging server, you can use any edition of Microsoft SQL Server, including the Express Edition. You
can download the necessary edition from the Microsoft Download Center.

Note that databases that exceed 10 GB cannot be attached to the Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition
due to Express Edition limitations. For more information, see the Editions and supported features of SQL
Server 2022 Microsoft article.

• A SQL Server included in Microsoft SQL Server failover cluster cannot be used as a staging system.

• Configure domain trusts when planning to add databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server
scope manually. For more information, see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

71 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following tables list network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

Backup

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup Source TCP, UDP 135, 137 to Ports used to deploy the runtime
server, guest machine with 139, 445 coordination process on the source
interaction Microsoft SQL machine.
proxy Server
(Enterprise
and TCP 49152 to Dynamic RPC range that is used by the
Enterprise 65535 runtime coordination process which is
Plus editions) (for Microsoft deployed on the source machine for
Windows application-aware processing. 1
2008 or
later)

TCP 6167 For Microsoft SQL Server transaction logs

shipping

Port used by the runtime process on the

source machine from which transaction
logs are collected.

Source Backup TCP 49152 to Dynamic RPC range used by the runtime
machine with server, guest 65535 coordination process that is deployed on
Microsoft SQL interaction (for Microsoft the source machine for application-aware
Server proxy Windows processing. 1
(Enterprise 2008 or
and later) For more information, see this Microsoft
Enterprise article.
Plus editions)

Log shipping TCP 2500 to For Microsoft SQL Server transaction logs
server, 3300 shipping
backup
repository Default range of ports used by the Veeam
Data Mover Service for data transfer over
the network.

Log shipping server is used in case the

direct connection to the backup
repository is not possible. For more
information, see the Log Shipping Servers
section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

1
If you use default Microsoft Windows firewall settings, you do not need to configure dynamic RPC ports: during setup,
Veeam Backup & Replication automatically creates a firewall rule for the runtime process. If you use firewall settings other

72 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

than default ones or application-aware processing fails with the RPC function call failed error, you need to configure
dynamic RPC ports. For more information on how to configure RPC dynamic port allocation to work with firewalls, see this
Microsoft KB article.

Restore

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server, Target TCP, UDP 135, 445 Ports used to deploy the runtime
Veeam Backup & Replication machine coordination process on the target
console, mount server with machine.
associated with the backup Microsoft
repository (only for Instant SQL
Recovery or restore from Server, TCP 49152 to Dynamic RPC range used by the
Enterprise Manager) staging 65535 runtime coordination process that is
server (for deployed on the target machine. 1
Microsoft
Windows For more information, see this
2008 or Microsoft article.
later)

TCP 6160 Port used to communicate with the

installer service.

TCP 1433, Ports used to communicate with the

1434 Microsoft SQL Server installed on the
target machine during application-
item restore.

For more information, see this

Microsoft article.

UDP 1434 Port used by the Microsoft SQL Server

Browser service.

For more information, see this

Microsoft article.

TCP 1025 to Default RPC range for the runtime

1034 component installed on a target or
staging Microsoft SQL Server machine
to support restore. Each runtime
component uses the next available
port in the range, and only during
application item restore.

Note: You must manually open this

port range in Microsoft Windows
Firewall.

73 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Target machine with Mount TCP 3260 to Port range opened by

Microsoft SQL Server, server 3270 Veeam Backup & Replication to
staging server associated manage iSCSI traffic during restore to
with the the target machine.
backup
repository This port range is opened only during
application item restore.

For more information, see How

Mounting Works.

1
If you use default Microsoft Windows Firewall settings, you do not need to configure dynamic RPC ports: during se tup,
Veeam Backup & Replication automatically creates a firewall rule for the runtime process. If you use firewall settings other
than default ones or application-aware processing fails with the RPC function call failed error, you need to configure
dynamic RPC ports. For more information on how to configure RPC dynamic port allocation to work with firewalls, see this
Microsoft KB article.

74 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL
Server and recover Microsoft SQL Server data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server must meet the
Microsoft SQL following requirements:
Server launch
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore
Operator role on the backup server.

Restore, Publish, The account must be a member of the local Administrators group and must be granted
Instant Recovery the sysadmin role on the target Microsoft SQL Server. To learn more about Microsoft
SQL Server roles, see this Microsoft article.

The sysadmin role is required for connections with Microsoft SQL Server Virtual Device
Interface (VDI) that Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server uses to perform recovery
operations. For more information, see this Microsoft article.

Sta ging Microsoft The account used to connect to the staging server must be a member of the sysadmin
SQL Server role on the Microsoft SQL Server.
configuration
If you want to use a local Microsoft SQL Server as a staging server and Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft SQL Server runs under an account that does not belong to the local
Administrators group, you must specify the current account for connection to the
staging server, or you will get an impersonation error.

For more information on how to configure and use the staging Microsoft SQL Server,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

75 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
This requirement applies to backup jobs, replication jobs, and CDP policies created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

When you create a job or CDP policy, make sure to enable application-aware processing in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console:

• When you configure a backup job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Backup Job wizard.

• When you configure a replication job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Replication Job wizard.

• When you configure a CDP policy, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the New
CDP Policy wizard.

Note that when you create storage snapshots, application-aware processing is automatically enabled. For more
information, see the Application Item Restore from Storage Snapshots section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

Configuring Transaction Logs

For more information about configuring transaction logs, see the Microsoft SQL Server Transaction Log Settings
section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide. Note that backups of transaction logs are only available
for backup jobs created by Veeam Backup & Replication.

Recovery Model
NOTE

To be able to restore your data as of a point in time or as of a state before undesired transactions, make
sure the recovery model for the database is set to full or b ulk-logged.

The following table lists database logging models and applicable options in Veeam Backup & Replication.

SQL DB Logging Model Veeam Backup & Replication Options

Truncate logs Do not truncate logs Ba ckup logs periodically

Simp le Databases are skipped from Applicable option. Databases are skipped
processing. from processing.

Log files do not grow

(and do not need to be
backed up).

76 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 SQL DB Logging Model Veeam Backup & Replication Options

Full Applicable option. Applicable but not Applicable option. Log

recommended to use backup files (in the BAK
Veeam Backup & Replication without native or 3rd format) are copied from
performs "backup to NUL" for party means of log the temporary folder on
log files on guest. truncation or backup the Microsoft SQL
– otherwise, logs will Server to a backup
increase in size. repository. As soon as
the data is copied to the
target, BAK files are
deleted from the source.

Bulk -logged Applicable option. Applicable but not Applicable option. Log
recommended to use backup files (in the BAK
Veeam Backup & Replication without native or 3rd format) are copied from
performs "backup to NUL" for party means of log the temporary folder on
log files on guest. truncation or backup the Microsoft SQL
– otherwise, logs will Server to a backup
increase in size. repository. As soon as
the data is copied to the
target, BAK files are
deleted from the source.

77 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and known limitations of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

General
• When Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is installed on a server on which both
Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings
will be inherited from the Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

• To restore, publish and instantly recover your Microsoft SQL Server data, make sure the following
requirements are met:

o In Veeam Backup & Replication prior to 12.1, make sure that the administrative share (for example,
\\myserver\ADMIN$) on the target machine is available. The user must have at least Read and
Write permissions; Full Control is recommended.

o In Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1 and later, access to the administrative share is not required. If you
do not want to grant access to the administrative share, make sure that the Veeam Installer Service is
installed on the target server. For more information on installing this service, see the Veeam Installer
Service section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

• Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of Microsoft SQL Server data from replicas
can only recover your data to the latest state of the selected restore point. Replication jobs do not copy
Microsoft SQL Server transaction logs so data recovery to a point-in-time state is not supported.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server supports data
recovery from CDP replicas. Consider the following limitations:

o Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of Microsoft SQL Server data from CDP
replicas can only recover your data to the latest state of the selected long -term restore point. CDP
policies do not copy Microsoft SQL Server transaction logs so data recovery to a point-in-time state is
not supported.

o When you recover your data from CDP replicas, you can only use long-term (both application-
consistent and crash-consistent) restore points. Short-term restore points are not supported.

o You can recover your data from a CDP replica if its CDP policy is currently running. During recovery,
the CDP policy does not create new long-term restore points and does not delete existing ones.
Short-term restore points are still created.

o You cannot restore application items from a CDP replica in parallel with guest OS file restore,
SureReplica, and failover.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server does not support data recovery using a group Managed Service
Account (gMSA) to connect to the target server.

Restore
• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server does not support restore using PowerShell Direct, VIX API or
vSphere Automation API.

• Table-level restore (with the Restore Database Schema and Data option) is not supported for the
following types of tables:

o Tables with external dependencies, such as tables extended to Microsoft Azure using the Stretch
Database functionality.

78 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o System-versioned temporal tables.

To restore these types of tables, use full database restore.

• The Replace logic is not supported when restoring schema objects.

• To restore an encrypted database, consider reading this Veeam Knowledge Base article.

• Before you restore a Microsoft SQL Server database to an AlwaysOn availability group, make sure that
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server can access all nodes in the availability group.

• To restore a database from an AlwaysOn availability group node as of the selected transaction state, the
nodes of such a group must be in the same time zone.

• Databases located on VM disks excluded from backup are displayed in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft S QL
Server with a question mark next to each database. It is not possible to restore data of such databases. For
more information, see this Veeam KB article.

Publishing
• Publishing to a Microsoft SQL Server failover cluster requires a free drive letter on each cluster node to
mount a volume from the backup. If the backed-up machine has multiple volumes, a free drive letter must
be available for each volume in the backup. For more information, see How Publishing Works.

• You can publish the same database more than once.

• Make sure that the mount server volume with the write cache has enough free disk space to store the
changes of the published database. You can configure the mount server in the backup repository settings.
For more information, see the Specify Mount Server Settings section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide.

• After you unpublish a database, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server detaches such a database from
the target Microsoft SQL Server but the restore point will continue to remain on the target machine for
the next 15 minutes.

• If a Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server session has been terminated in any way other than by
clicking E x it in the main menu (or by clicking the X button in the upper-right corner), then all the
published databases will continue to remain attached to the target Microsoft SQL Se rver with the
Recovery pending state.

• If published databases have been renamed manually using SQL tools (for example, Microsoft SQL
Management Studio), Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will not be able to unpublish such
databases properly. In this case, all the renamed databases will continue to remain attached to the target
Microsoft SQL Server and you will have to remove them manually using SQL tools.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server does not back up published databases.

• Upon closing the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server console, all the published databases will be
detached from the target Microsoft SQL Server instance automatically. Mount points will be also
dismounted from under the C:\VeeamFLR directory.

Instant Recovery
• To restore an encrypted database, consider reading this Veeam Knowledge Base article.

• If you perform instant recovery of a database from an AlwaysOn availability group node, Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft SQL Server restores it as a standalone database.

79 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • For desktop versions of Microsoft Windows (7, 8, 8.1, 10), you must perform instant recovery of multiple
databases one by one. The limitation occurs because desktop versions of Microsoft Windows OS do not
allow more than 20 incoming concurrent TCP/IP connections. For details, see Microsoft Windows 10
License Terms.

As a workaround, you can perform instant recovery of multiple databases in parallel using the Restore-
VESQLIRDatabase PowerShell cmdlet.

• If you plan to perform scheduled or manual switchover, make sure that the mount server volume with the
write cache has enough free disk space to store the changes of the published database. You can configure
the mount server in the backup repository settings. For more information, see the Specify Mount Server
Settings section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

• Instant recovery to a Microsoft SQL Server failover cluster requires 2 free drive letters on each cluster
node to mount a volume from the backup. If the backed -up machine has multiple volumes, the number of
free drive letters on each cluster node must be twice the number of volumes in the backup. For more
information, see How Instant Recovery Works.

80 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and load SQL data, you can use either of the following
methods:

• Use the Restore application item option to load SQL data from a restore point created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

For more information, see the Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

• Go to Sta rt, click Veea m Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and manually open Microsoft SQL databases, as
described in the Adding Standalone Databases section.

If you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of the backup server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform recovery operations, the user account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL
Server must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group on the machine where
Veeam Explorers Suite is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is running, select Use
W ind ows session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

81 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server provides you with a convenient user interface that allows you to
perform the required operations in a user-friendly manner.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows additional information, including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server wizard or window. You will
then be redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains general program commands organized into logical groups.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of your SQL databases.

82 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which shows you the details about objects you have selected in the navigation pane.

83 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Mounting Works
To facilitate data transfer, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server uses mounting operations during data
recovery.

Mounting is performed by the Veeam Mount Service component which is deployed on the mount server
associated with the backup repository. For more information, see the Mount Servers section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

During mounting, the Veeam Mount Service retrieves a file system from the backup repository, attaches it to the
hard drive of the target machine and creates a mount point. For restore, publishing and instant recovery,
mounting is performed from the backup repository to the target server, and in the case of export — from the
backup repository to the staging server.

Note that when restoring your data to a specific transaction and when restoring database schema and data,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server requires an additional mount point to be created to display a list of
available transactions or database objects in the recovery wizard. In these cases, the Veeam Mount Service also
mounts the necessary file system from the backup repository to the staging server. The Veeam SQL Restore
Service deployed on the staging server obtains a list of the availa ble transactions or database objects, which
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server displays in the recovery wizard. For more information, see Configuring
Staging SQL Server.

To mount a file system, the Veeam Mount Service uses the iSCSI protocol. The target machine or the staging
Microsoft SQL Server acts as an iSCSI initiator, and the mount server associated with the backup repository acts
as an iSCSI target. The iSCSI mount point is non-persistent and only exists during the recovery process.

84 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Data Recovery Works
When you initiate the recovery of Microsoft SQL Server data, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server checks if
the administrative share (for example, \\myserver\ADMIN$) is available on the target machine (and staging
server if necessary). The user must have at least Read and Write permissions; Full Control is recommended.

If the administrative share is available, the Veeam SQL Restore Service runtime component is deployed and
registered as a service on the target server and, if necessary, on the staging server. The Veeam SQL Restore
Service checks the valid rights assignments required for database recovery, gets information about the
databases, and performs required file operations including database and transaction logs copy.

If the administrative share is not available, the outcome depends on the installed version of
Veeam Backup & Replication.

• In Veeam Backup & Replication prior to 12.1, the administrative share must be available. Otherwise, data
recovery is not possible.

• In Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1 and later, access to the administrative share is not required. If the
administrative share is not available, the Veeam Installer Service must be deployed on the target machine
(and on the staging server if necessary). For more information on installing this service, see the Veeam
Installer Service section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

If the Veeam Installer Service is present, it checks whether the necessary persistent components are
installed, namely the Veeam SQL Agent Service for database recovery, and the Veeam Log Shipping
Service if transaction logs are used. If the persistent components are installed, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server proceeds with the recovery operation. If they are not installed, the Veeam Installer
Service first installs the necessary components and Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server proceeds
with the recovery operation.

After the recovery session completes, the Veeam SQL Restore Service is automatically stopped and removed
from the target server (and if necessary, from the staging server), but the persistent components remain on the
machine until they are manually deleted.

All activities of the Veeam SQL Restore Service are logged to the Veeam.SQL.Service_<timestamp>.log
file stored in the Temp folder, located in the system directory.

Consider the following:

• The Veeam SQL Restore Service component requires the Local System account.

• Inbound and outbound traffic management between Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and the
Veeam SQL Restore Service is performed over the RPC protocol. For more information on the ports used
during data recovery operations, see Ports.

• The Veeam SQL Restore Service component is not deployed when restoring to the server where the
Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

85 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Viewing Database Information
To get information about databases, select a database in the navigation pane and review database info in the
preview pane.

86 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
This section explains how to configure the required application settings and components in Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server.

87 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Configuring Staging SQL Server
To enable advanced recovery functionality, you can use a Microsoft SQL Server machine as a staging server. This
section explains the use cases of the staging server and how to configure it.

A staging server is required in the following cases:

• When you export Microsoft SQL Server databases, as described in Data Export.

• When you restore, publish, and instantly recover your data to a specific transaction. For example, see
Fine-Tune Restore Point.

• When you restore database schema and data, as described in Restoring Database Schema and Data.

• When you add standalone Microsoft SQL Server databases to Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server, as
described in Adding Standalone Databases.

A machine used as a staging server can reside in the same domain as the machine hosting Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server, as well as in a trusted domain or untrusted domain.

For the add standalone database operation, consider the following:

• A machine used as a staging server can reside in the same domain as the machine hosting Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft SQL Server or in a trusted domain. You cannot use a sta ging server that belongs to an
untrusted domain to add a standalone database to Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

• Both Windows authentication and SQL Server authentication methods are supported for the staging
server. If you want to use Windows authentication, complete the following steps to configure delegation
settings:

a. In Active Directory Users and Computers, select the staging server.

b. Open server properties and go to the Delegation tab. Select the Trust this computer for d elegation to
sp ecified services only and Use any authentication protocol options for the cifs service on a computer
with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

c. Restart the staging server.

d. Select a domain user account that you want to use when connecting to the staging server and make
sure the Account is sensitive and cannot be delegated check box is not selected.

To configure a staging server, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server main menu, click General Options.

2. On the Staging Server tab, select the Use this helper SQL Server for advanced recovery functionality check
box and do the following:

a. From the SQL Server name drop-down list, select an instance that you want to use as your staging
server.

You can click Browse to locate an instance using the built-in browser, as described in Browsing for
Servers.

b. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to Windows server section, select one of the following options:

▪ Use current account. To connect to the specified server using the current user account under
which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is running.

88 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 ▪ Use the following account. To connect to the specified server under a custom user account.

When using a custom account, in the Username field, specify a user name and in the P a ssword
field, provide the password.

c. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SQL Server instance section, select one of the following
options:

▪ Use the W indows server account specified above. To connect to the specified instance under the
user account that you have specified in the Sp ecify user account to connect to Windows server
section.

▪ Use the following account. To connect to the specified instance under a custom user account.

When using a custom account, in the Username field, specify a user name and in the P a ssword
field, provide the password.

To use SQL Server authentication, select the Use SQL Server authentication check box.

Browsing for Servers

To browse for an instance, perform one of the following actions:

• On the Local Servers tab, select a local Microsoft SQL Server instance that is located on the machine
where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is opened.

89 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • On the Network Servers tab, select a SQL Server instance over the network.

90 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Enabling Extended Logging
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server allows you to enable an extended logging mode to collect logs that
contain more details on specific operations. After you enable extended logging, you can go back to the
application and perform the actions for which you want to collect additional information. Then you can collect
the logs. For more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

To enable extended logging, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server main menu, click General Options.

2. On the Ad vanced tab, select the E na ble extended logging check box and click OK.

91 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Standalone Databases Management
This section explains how to add and remove standalone Microsoft SQL Server databases.

92 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Standalone Databases
NOTE

Before you add a standalone Microsoft SQL database, you must configure a staging SQL Server. For more
information, see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

To add a standalone Microsoft SQL database manually, do the following:

1. On the Home tab, click Ad d Database.

93 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Specify the location of a primary database file, a secondary database file and associated log files. If
necessary, specify the BLOB store location.

Manually added databases will be displayed in the navigation pane under the Other SQL Server Databases
node.

94 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Removing Standalone Databases
To remove a database from the application scope, right-click a database in the navigation pane and select
Remove database or select a database in the navigation pane and click Remove Database on the Home tab.

NOTE

You can only remove databases that have been added to the application scope manually.

95 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
This section contains information about the available restore operations in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL
Server.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

96 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Restore Works
Restoring databases with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server connects to the target server and performs a series of
validations. For example, it checks if the database exists on the target server and if the target server has
enough free space for the restored database.

To perform these validations and required file operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server
deploys the Veeam SQL Restore Service on the target server and, if you restore your data up to a specific
transaction, on the staging server. This non-persistent runtime component checks the valid rights
assignments required for database recovery, gets information about the databases, and later performs
required file operations including database and transaction logs copy. The Veeam SQL Restore Service is
removed from the target and the staging server once the restore process is completed. For more
information, see How Data Recovery Works.

2. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server sends a restore command to the Veeam Mount Service running
on the mount server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup repository
and prepares the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the C:\VeeamFLR directory on the target
Microsoft SQL Server machine. For more information, see How Mounting Works.

4. The Veeam SQL Restore Service copies the database files and the transaction log backups from the
mounted file system to the native file system of the target machine and starts the restored database.

After the restore operation successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL S erver unmounts the
mounted file system from the target server.

97 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Single Database
You can restore a Microsoft SQL Server database by following one of these scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring To Another Server

Restoring Latest State

You can restore a Microsoft SQL Server database as of the latest state in your backup file.

The data will be restored in the following manner:

• Database files will be copied to the original location and then mounted to the original Microsoft SQL
Server.

• If a database with the same name already exists on a target Microsoft SQL Server, it will be replaced with
the database from a backup file.

To restore the latest available state of a Microsoft SQL Server database, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

You can select the root instance node to restore all the available databases at once.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Restore database > Restore latest state to
< original_location>.

98 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

The name of the restore option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore latest
sta te to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_locat ion>.

Restoring Point-in-Time State

You can restore a Microsoft SQL Server database as of a point-in-time state in your backup file.

The data will be restored in the following manner:

• Database files will be copied to the original location and then mounted to the original Microsoft SQL
Server.

• If a database with the same name already exists on a target Microsoft SQL Server, it will be replaced with
the database from a backup file.

To restore SQL Server databases as of a point-in-time state, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

99 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore point -in-time state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Restore database > Restore point-in-time state to
< original_location>.

100 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, specify a state to which you want to restore your database:

1. In the Sp ecify point in time you want to restore the database to section, select one of the following
options:

o Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup. Select this option to load database
files as of the moment when the current restore point was created.

o Restore to a specific p oint in time. Select this option to load database files as of the selected point in
time. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

This option is available in case the following conditions are met:

▪ [For restore from a backup created by a backup job] The ba ckup is created by a job that is set to
back up transaction logs or process transaction logs in the copy only mode.

▪ [For restore from a backup created by a backup copy job] The backup is created by a job that is
set to process transaction logs.

▪ The recovery model for the database is set to full or bulk-logged .

2. [Optional] Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly
as of the moment before undesired transactions. If you select this option, you will be able to specify an
exact transaction at the next step of the wizard.

This option requires a staging Microsoft SQL Server. For more information, see Configuring Staging SQL
Server.

This option is unavailable when restoring multiple databases.

101 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore your database and click
Restore.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

Restoring to Another Server

To restore a single Microsoft SQL Server database to another server, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target server.

5. Specify AlwaysOn restore options.

6. Specify files location.

7. Specify the recovery state.

102 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Restore database > Restore to another server.

103 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Microsoft SQL Server. For more
information, see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

104 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to recover y our database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

105 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the Microsoft SQL Server machine or instance to which you want to
restore your database.

Use the <IP address\instance> or <hostname\instance> format. You can select a server or instance from
the drop-down list or use the Browse button, as described in Browsing for Servers.

If the SQL Server instance is assigned a custom port, and Microsoft SQL Browser is not running on the
machine, specify the instance port in the following format: <IP address or hostname>,<port> .

2. In the Da tabase name field, specify a name for the restored database.

3. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and mount server are located
on separate machines.

o Use the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

Make sure the account you are using has been granted the sy sadmin role on the target SQL Server
machine.

4. If you selected the Use the following account option and want to use Microsoft SQL Server authentication,
select the Use SQL Server authentication check box. If you do not select the check box, Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft SQL Server will use Windows authentication.

106 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

If you select the Use SQL Server authentication check box and provide a Microsoft SQL Server account, you will
be prompted to provide an account to connect to the target server at the next step of the wizard.

Browsing for Servers

To browse for a server, do either of the following:

• On the Local Servers tab, select a local Microsoft SQL Server that is located on the machine with Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

• On the Network Servers tab, select a SQL Server over the network.

107 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify AlwaysOn Restore Options
If the specified target Microsoft SQL Server supports AlwaysOn Availability Groups, you will be offered to
specify AlwaysOn restore options. To use the AlwaysOn capabilities for the restored database, do the following:

1. Select the Ad d the database to the following Availability Group check box and select an availability group
from the drop-down list.

2. In the The d atabase will be replicated to the following nodes list, review information about the primary
and secondary nodes of the availability group.

During the restore process, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will restore the database to the
primary server and then replicate it to secondary nodes.

If you do not plan to use the AlwaysOn capabilities when restoring a database, clear the Ad d the database to the
following Availability Group check box.

108 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Files Location
At this step of the wizard, specify the following file locations.

• Primary database file

• Secondary database file and log files

• BLOB stores (if necessary)

NOTE

Make sure the account you are using has Rea d and W rite permissions.

To specify a file location, do the following:

1. Click Browse next to the necessary database file type.

109 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Select File dialog, choose a database file or folder for the restored d atabase and click Select. To
create a new folder, click Create Folder.

[For restore to another location] To prevent you from storing BLOBs from different databases in the same
directory, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server supports creating a BLOB stores folder using the
Restore wizard only. If you select an already existing folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will
display an error.

110 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Recovery State
At this step of the wizard, select recovery state:

• Default (RECOVERY)

Rolls back ( undo) any uncommitted changes.

• NORE COVERY
Skips the undo phase so that uncommitted or incomplete transactions are held open.

This allows further restore stages to carry on from the restore point. When applying this option, the
database will be in a norecovery state and inaccessible to users.

• STANDBY
The database will be in standby state and therefore available for read operations. You can also provide a
standby file with uncommitted transactions.

For more information on recovery modes, see this Microsoft article.

NOTE

This step is unavailable if the Ad d the database to the following group check box is selected at the Specify
AlwaysON Restore Options step.

111 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Multiple Databases
You can restore multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases by following one of these scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring To Another Server

Restoring Latest State

You can restore the latest available state of multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases. You can select databases
from a specific server instance or across all instances on the machine.

To restore the latest available state of multiple databases, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select databases you want to restore.

112 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select Restore Databases > Restore latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select Restore databases > Restore latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the restore option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore latest
sta te to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

113 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

Restoring Point-in-Time State

When restoring multiple databases, consider that depending on the database recovery model the following
cases are possible:

• Some databases may be restored as of the different time interval.

• Some databases cannot be restored if there are no transaction logs available for the specified period.

To restore Microsoft SQL Server databases as of the point-in-time state, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select databases you want to restore.

3. Specify a restore point.

114 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select Restore Databases > Restore p oint-in-time state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select Restore databases > Restore point-in-time
sta te to <original_location>.

115 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to restore.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

116 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the specified point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

Restoring to Another Server

To restore multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases to another server, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select databases you want to restore.

3. Specify a restore point.

4. Specify the target server.

117 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select Restore Databases > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select Restore databases > Restore to another
server.

118 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to restore.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

119 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the specified point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

120 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the Microsoft SQL Server machine or instance to which you want to
restore your database.

Use the <IP address\instance> or <hostname\instance> format. You can select a server or instance from
the drop-down list or use the Browse button, as described in Browsing for Servers.

When you restore multiple databases, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server places database files to
their default location specified in the properties of the target SQL Server ins tance.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and mount server are located
on separate machines.

o Use the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

Make sure the account you are using has been granted the sy sadmin role on the target SQL Server
machine.

3. If you selected the Use the following account option and want to use Microsoft SQL Server authentication,
select the Use SQL Server authentication check box. If you do not select the check box, Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft SQL Server will use Windows authentication.

121 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

If you select the Use SQL Server authentication check box and provide a SQL Server account, you will b e
prompted to provide an account to connect to the target server at the next step of the wizard.

Browsing for Servers

To browse for a server, do either of the following:

• On the Local Servers tab, select a local SQL Server that is located on the machine with Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server.

• On the Network Servers tab, select a SQL Server VM over the network.

122 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Database Schema and Data
To restore database schema and data, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify target SQL server settings.

5. Select database objects.

6. Specify names for restored objects.

7. Specify directory names for file tables.

8. Specify additional restore options.

123 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Schema > Restore database schema and data.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database in the navigation pane and select Restore schema > Restore
d a tabase schema and data.

IMP ORTANT

Consider the following:

• A staging SQL Server is required to restore database schema and data. For more information, see
Configuring Staging SQL Server.
• FILESTREAM must be enabled on the staging SQL Server to restore file tables. For more information
on enabling FILESTREAM, see this Microsoft article.

124 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

125 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to recover your database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

126 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target SQL Server Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the target SQL Server connection parameters:

1. In the Server name field, specify the target SQL Server instance to which you want to restore your
database.

You can specify the instance name in the <IP address\instance> or <hostname\instance> format. Also, you
can select an instance from the drop-down list or use the Browse button, as described in Browsing for
Servers.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and mount server are located
on separate machines.

o Use the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

Make sure the account you are using has been granted the sy sadmin role on the target SQL Server
machine.

3. If you selected the Use the following account option and want to use SQL Server authentication, select
the Use SQL Server authentication check box. If you do not select the check box, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server will use Windows authentication.

4. In the Da tabase name field, specify the target database name. Click Browse to select a database to which
you want to restore the schema.

127 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing for Servers
To browse for a server, do either of the following:

• On the Local Servers tab, select a local SQL Server that is located on the machine with Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server.

• On the Network Servers tab, select a SQL Server instance on another server. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SQL Server displays servers from your network where Microsoft SQL Server is installed.

128 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Select Database Objects
At this step of the wizard, specify database objects you want to restore.

Use the Ob ject and Da ta check boxes to specify what database objects and data should be restored.

To display only specific objects, click Filter and select the object type.

129 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Names for Objects
At this step of the wizard, specify a new name for the object.

• To specify a new name, select a database and provide a new name.

• To assign a default name to the object that already exists, click Auto. In this case, the _new suffix will be
added.

130 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Directory Names for File Tables
At this step of the wizard, specify directory names for file tables.

The following options are available:

• P reserve directory names if applicable (use autogenerated otherwise) .

To use the original names.

If such names already exist on a target server, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will add _new
suffix to each name. For example, <existing_name>_new.

• Use the following directory names.

To provide a different name under the Directory Name column.

131 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 8. Specify Additional Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, specify additional restore options and click Restore.

• In the Filegroups section, select how filegroups should be restored for selected schema objects:

o P reserve filegroup if applicable — to preserve the file group state.

o Use the following filegroup — to select a file group on a target SQL Server instance.

For more information on filegroups, see Microsoft Docs.

• In the P a rtitioned tables section, select how partitioned tables should be restored:

o P reserve partition schema if applicable — to restore tables to the original partition schema.

o Use the following partition schema — to select a partition schema on a target SQL Server instance.

o Use the following filegroup — to select a file group on a target SQL Server instance.

132 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Publishing
Publishing a Microsoft SQL Server database allows you to temporarily attach the database to the target
Microsoft SQL Server without launching restore. Publishing typically occurs faster than using standard restore
features and could be convenient when, for example, your time to perform disaster -recovery operations is
limited.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server mounts disks from the backup repository to the target machine (under
the C:\VeeamFLR directory), retrieves required database files and attaches the associated database directly to
your Microsoft SQL Server instance so that you can perform required op erations using SQL Server tools such as
Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio.

After you have launched a publishing operation to a Microsoft SQL Server machine, you can quickly republish
the latest or point-in-time state of the database to the same machine.

Once you are done working with the published database, you can export the modified database as a BAK file. For
more information, see Exporting as BAK.

Before publishing data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

133 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Publishing Works
Publishing databases with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server connects to the Veeam Mount Service and the target server and
performs a series of validations. For example, it check if the database exists on the target server.

To perform these validations and required file operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server
deploys the Veeam SQL Restore Service on the target server and, if you publish your data up to a specific
transaction, on the staging server. This non-persistent runtime component checks the valid rights
assignments required for database recovery, gets information about the databases, and later performs the
required database operations. The Veeam SQL Restore Service is removed from the target and the staging
server once you unpublish the database. For more information, see How Data Recovery Works.

2. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server sends a publishing command to the Veeam Mount Service
running on the mount server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup
repository and prepares the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the C:\VeeamFLR directory on the target
Microsoft SQL Server machine. For more information, see How Mounting Works.

When publishing to a failover cluster, the file system is mounted to the C:\VeeamFLR directory of every
node of the cluster. Note that each volume is also mounted as a separate drive, requiring a free drive
letter.

The Veeam SQL Restore Service opens the database from the mounted file system, so that you can
perform the required operations with Microsoft SQL Server tools.

All changes to the database that occur after publishing are saved in the publishing write cache, stored on
the mount server. You can view and change the write cache location in the mount server settings. For
more information, see the Specify Mount Server Settings section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

Once the publishing operation is completed, you can export the modified database as a BAK file. For more
information, see Exporting as BAK.

After you have finished working with the published database, you can unpublish (detach) the database from the
target Microsoft SQL Server machine. For more information, see Unpublishing Databases.

134 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publishing to Specified Server
Publishing to the specified server allows you to select a target Microsoft SQL Server to which you can publish
your databases.

To publish data, do the following:

1. Launch the Publish Database wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target server.

135 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Publish Database Wizard
To launch the P ub lish Database wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select P ub lish Database > P ublish to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select P ub lish database > P ub lish to a nother server.

136 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After you complete the wizard steps, a new P ub lished databases node appears at the top of the navigation
pane. Under this node, you can find the databases that have been published during the current session of Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

To work with published databases, open a SQL tool you prefer, for example, Microsoft SQL Management Studio
and locate your published databases.

The figure below demonstrates a published database ( db1_published ) available in the Ob ject Explorer window of
your Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio console. This database is also being referenced by Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server under its P ub lished databases node.

137 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to publish your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

138 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to publish your database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

139 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify a target SQL server name/SQL server instance/SQL cluster to which you
want to publish the database.

Use the <IP address\instance> or <hostname\instance> format. You can select a server/instance/cluster
from the drop-down list or use the Browse button on the left, as described in Browsing for Servers.

2. In the Da tabase name field, specify a new name under which you want to publish your database.

Consider that if you leave the original database name, Veeam Exp lorer for Microsoft SQL Server will
overwrite the associated database on the target server.

3. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o User current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and mount server are located
on separate machines.

o User the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

Make sure the account you are using has been granted the sy sadmin role on the target SQL Server
machine.

4. If you selected the Use the following account option and want to use SQL Server authentication, select
the Use SQL Server authentication check box. If you do not select the check box, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server will use Windows authentication.

140 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

If you select the Use SQL Server authentication check box and provide a SQL Server account, you will be
prompted to provide an account to connect to the target server at the next step of the wizard.

Browsing for Servers

To browse for a server to which you want to restore your da tabases, do either of the following:

• On the Local Servers tab, select a local SQL server/instance/cluster that is located on a machine with
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server.

• On the Network Servers tab, select a SQL server/instance/cluster over the network.

141 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publishing Latest or Point-in-Time State
After you have launched a publishing operation to a Microsoft SQL Server (as described in Publishing to
Specified Server), you can quickly republish a state of the database to the same server.

You can republish either of the following states:

• The latest available state — to publish data as of the latest state in the backup file.

• A point-in-time state — to publish data as of the selected point-in-time state. This option is available only
if backups of Microsoft SQL Server transaction logs exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

When you unpublish a database, both options remain available until you close the application so that you can
quickly republish the database if required.

Publishing Latest State

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server allows you to republish an unp ublished database. When republishing a
database, it will be attached to the target SQL server as of the latest state.

To republish a database as of the latest available state, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select P ub lish Database > P ublish latest state to < target_server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select P ub lish database > Publish latest state to
< ta rget_server>.

NOTE

The name of the publish option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as P ub lish latest
sta te to <target_server>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as P ub lish state of
< p oint_in_time> to <target_server>.

142 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Once this process is completed, the database will be published with the same name as it was during the initial
publishing session.

Publishing Point-in-Time State

Publishing a point-in-time state allows you to obtain a required database state and unroll specified transactions
if needed.

To publish databases as of the point-in-time state, do the following:

1. Launch the Publish Database wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

143 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Publish Database Wizard
To launch the P ub lish Database wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select P ub lish Database > P ublish point-in-time state to < target_server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select P ub lish database > P ub lish point-in-time state to
< ta rget_server>.

Once the publishing process is completed, the database will be published with the same name as it was during
the initial publishing session.

144 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to publish your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL Server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

145 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to publish your databa se and click
P ub lish.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

146 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting as BAK
To save changes that have been made while working with your published database to a local computer, you can
use the export feature. This feature will export modified databases as BAK, preserving all the changes that have
been made during the publishing session.

To export a published database, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lished databases node, select a published database.

2. On the P ub lish tab, select E x port backup or you can right-click a database and select E x p ort backup.

3. In the E x port wizard, click Browse next to the Sp ecify export path field to specify the location where to
export your data.

To compress data, select the E na ble compression check box. Compression will be applied according to
configuration of the SQL server to which the database is published.

147 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

Compression is unavailable if the server to which the database is published runs Microsoft SQL Server
2005 or any Express Edition of Microsoft SQL Server.

148 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Unpublishing Databases
Once you have finished working with published SQL databases, you may want to unpublish (detach) these
databases from the target SQL server.

Detachment occurs in the following manner:

• Upon closing the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server console, all published databases will be
detached from the target SQL server automatically. Mount points will be also dismounted from under the
C:\VeeamFLR directory.

• On manual unpublishing, databases will be detached at once but the restore point will remain mounted on
the target machine for the next 15 minutes.

To unpublish a database manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lished databases node, select a published database.

2. On the P ub lish tab, select Unp ublish Database.

Alternatively, in the navigation pane, right-click a published database and select Unp ublish database.

To detach more than one published database simultaneously, right-click the root P ub lished databases node and
select Unp ublish databases or select the root P ub lished databases node and click Unp ublish Databases on the
P ub lish tab.

149 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Refreshing Database Status
While the databases are attached to the target SQL server, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server
synchronizes each published database state to verify its availability. By default, synchronization occurs every 5
seconds.

If something went wrong with any of the published databases, the question mark appears next to each of such
databases indicating the database unavailability. In the Da tabase Info section, you will also see the notification
message describing the problem.

To refresh a published database state manually, in the navigation pane, under the P ub lished databases node,
right-click a published database and select Refresh status.

150 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery
Instant recovery combines capabilities of the data restore and data publishing features. If you w ant databases to
be online as quickly as possible, you can use the Instant Recovery option and restore databases in the
background.

Before performing instant recovery, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

151 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Instant Recovery Works
To perform instant recovery, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server uses the Veeam Explorers Recovery
Service running on the mount server associated with the backup repository. This removes the necessity to keep
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server running during an entire instant recovery session. Once the instant
recovery session is started, you can close Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server and then open it later when
necessary.

Instant recovery of Microsoft SQL Server databases works in the following manner:

1. To start the instant recovery process, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server sends an instant recovery
command to the Veeam Mount Service . The service runs on the mount server associated with the backup
repository.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service connects to the target server and performs a series of validations.
For example, it checks if the target server has enough available memory for the published and the
recovered database.

To perform these validations and required file operations, Veeam Explorers Recovery Service deploys the
Veeam SQL Restore Service non-persistent runtime component on the target server and, if you recover
your data up to a specific transaction, on the staging server. This runtime component checks the valid
rights assignments required for database recovery, gets information about the databases, and later
performs required file operations including database and transaction logs copy.

The Veeam SQL Restore Service runtime component is removed from the target and the staging server
when you perform switchover or cancel the instant recovery session.

4. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service sends a request to the Veeam Mount Service to connect to the
backup repository and initiate the mounting operations.

5. The Veeam Mount Service uses backup files to start 2 iSCSI mount sessions in parallel.

o The first session mounts the necessary file system from the backup repository to the C:\VeeamFLR
directory on the target machine. The Veeam SQL Restore Service starts the database from the
mounted file system and attaches it to the target Microsoft SQL Server instance. This iSCSI mount
session is only stopped after the instant recovery session is canceled or switchover is performed.

All changes to the published database while it is online are saved in the instant recovery write cache,
stored on the mount server. You can view and change the write cache location in the mount server
settings. For more information, see the Specify Mount Server Settings section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

o The second session also mounts the file system to the C:\VeeamFLR directory on the target machine,
but this session is used to copy the database from the mounted file system to the native file system of
the target machine. This iSCSI mount session is stopped once the instant recovery session is canceled
or all database files are copied to the target machine.

Veeam SQL Restore Service uses the write cache to synchronize the recovered database with the
changes on the published database.

When performing instant recovery to a failover cluster, the file system is mounted to the C:\VeeamFLR
directory of every node of the cluster. Note that each volume is also mounted as 2 separate drives,
requiring 2 free drive letters.

After synchronization, you can switch over to the recovered database. For more information about the available
switchover options, see Switchover.

152 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

During switchover, the Veeam SQL Restore Service on the target server does the following:

1. Stops the published database.

2. Uses the write cache to synchronize differences between the published database and the recovered
database.

3. Drops the published database.

4. Starts the recovered database.

The instant recovery session is resilient to network disruption, backup server or mount server crashes. If
anything disrupts the restore process, the restore process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic
retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail, you can launch retry after the server or network is up.

153 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery of Single Database
You can perform instant recovery of a Microsoft SQL Server database by following one of these scenarios:

• Instant Recovery of Latest State

• Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

• Instant Recovery to Another Server

Instant Recovery of Latest State

To perform instant recovery of a single database to the latest state, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify switchover settings.

3. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

154 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to <original_location> .

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the instant recovery option depends on the restore point you select during the application
item restore process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is disp layed as Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant recovery of the state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

155 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a database switchover type. During switchover, the mounted database is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all databa se files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts publishing the database on the
target server.

156 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts an instant
recovery session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, cancel
instant recovery, and start manual switchover (if you have selected the Ma nual switchover option in the Instant
Recovery wizard).

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

To perform instant recovery of a database to a selected point-in-time state, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify switchover settings.

5. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

157 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the point -in-time state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the point-in-time
sta te to <original_location>.

158 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

a. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

b. If you want to load database files exactly as of the moment before undesired transactions, select the
P erform restore to the specific transaction check box. Note that this option requires a staging server
where Microsoft SQL Server is deployed. For more information, see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

159 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore the database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

160 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a database switchover type. During switchover, the mounted database is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts publishing the database on the
target server.

161 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts an instant
recovery session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, cancel
instant recovery, and start manual switchover (if you have selected the Ma nual switchover option in the Instant
Recovery wizard).

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery to Another Server

To perform instant recovery of a database to another server, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target server.

5. Specify database files location.

6. Specify switchover settings.

162 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 7. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

163 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

164 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

a. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

b. If you want to load database files exactly as of the moment before undesired transactions, select the
P erform restore to the specific transaction check box. Note that this option requires a staging server
where Microsoft SQL Server is deployed. For more information, see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

165 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore the database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

166 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target server.

1. In the Server name field, specify the target instance to which you want to restore the database. Use the
<IP address\instance> or <hostname\instance> format. You can select an instance from the drop-down list
or use the Browse button on the right.

To browse for other servers and SQL Server instances:

a. Click the Browse button.

b. You can select a SQL Server instance residing on the local machine on the Loca l Servers tab or click
the Network Servers tab and select an instance on another server. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL
Server display servers from your network where SQL Server is installed.

2. In the Da tabase name field, specify a name for the restored database.

3. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, specify credentials which will be used to connect to the
target SQL Server instance.

o Select the Use SQL Server authentication check box to use SQL Server authentication. If not selected,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will use Windows authentication.

167 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Make sure the account has been granted the sysadmin role privileges on a targe t SQL server.

168 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Database File Location
At this step of the wizard, specify the location for database files (control files, data files, log files and temp
files).

To edit the path, click the path row and specify the location you want to use. If specified folders do not exist,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will create these folders.

169 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a database switchover type. During switchover, the mounted database is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop-down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts publishing the database on the
target server.

170 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts an instant
recovery session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, cancel
instant recovery, and start manual switchover (if you have selected the Ma nual switchover option in the Instant
Recovery wizard).

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

171 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery of Multiple Databases
You can perform instant recovery of multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases hosted on a server or a certain SQL
Server instance. You can perform instant recovery to the original server or any other server in your network
where SQL Server is installed.

To instantly recover Microsoft SQL Server databases, follow one of these scenarios:

• Instant Recovery of Latest State

• Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

• Instant Recovery to Another Server

Instant Recovery of Latest State

To perform instant recovery of multiple databases to the latest state, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Select databases you want to recover.

3. Specify switchover settings.

4. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

172 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the
la test state to <original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the instant recovery option depends on the restore point you select during the application
item restore process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is disp layed as Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant recovery of the state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

173 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

174 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a database switchover type. During switchover, the mounted database is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts publishing the database on the
target server.

175 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts an instant
recovery session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, cancel
instant recovery, and start manual switchover (if you have selected the Ma nual switchover option in the Instant
Recovery wizard).

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

To perform instant recovery of multiple databases to a selected point-in-time state, use the Instant Recovery
wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Select databases you want to recover.

3. Specify a restore point.

4. Specify switchover settings.

5. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

176 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the point-in-time state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the
p oint-in-time state to <original_location>.

177 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

178 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover databases:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

If some of the databases do not have transaction log backups for the specified time, they will be displayed
below with their own time point.

179 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a database switchover type. During switchover, the mounted database is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts publishing the database on the
target server.

180 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts an instant
recovery session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, cancel
instant recovery, and start manual switchover (if you have selected the Ma nual switchover option in the Instant
Recovery wizard).

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery to Another Server

To perform instant recovery of multiple databases to another server, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Select databases you want to recover.

3. Specify restore point.

4. Specify target server.

5. Specify switchover settings.

6. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

181 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery to
a nother server.

182 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the sea rch field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

183 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover databases:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

If some of the databases do not have transaction log backups for the specified time, they will be displayed
below with their own time point.

184 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target server.

1. In the Server name field, specify the target instance to which you want to restore the database. Use the
<IP address\instance> or <hostname\instance> format. You can select an instance from the drop-down list
or use the Browse button on the right.

To browse for another servers and SQL Server instances:

a. Click the Browse button.

b. You can select a SQL Server instance residing on the local machine on the Loca l Servers tab or click
the Network Servers tab and select an instance on another server. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL
Server displays servers from your network where SQL Server is installed.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, specify credentials which will be used to connect to the
target SQL Server instance.

o Select the Use SQL Server authentication check box to use SQL Server authentication. If not selected,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server will use Windows authentication.

185 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Make sure the account has been granted the sysadmin role privileges on a target SQL server.

186 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a database switchover type. During switchover, the mounted database is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts publishing the database on the
target server.

187 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts a n instant
recovery session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, cancel
instant recovery, and start manual switchover (if you have selected the Ma nual switchover option in the Instant
Recovery wizard).

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

188 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Switchover
The switchover option becomes available after all the database files are copied to the target server and all
database files are synchronized. During switchover, the published mount is detached from the target SQL Server
instance and the copied database is attached to this instance. Note that if you have selected to restore to the
original server, the restored database will replace the original database.

Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

During switchover, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server performs the following operations:

1. Detaches the published database from the SQL Server instance.

2. Uses the write cache to synchronize changes between the published database and the copied database
files.

3. Drops the published database.

4. Attaches the recovered database to the SQL Server instance.

Note that the database will be offline between steps 1–4.

Auto Switchover
The Auto switchover option ensures minimal period of downtime.

As soon as database files are copied from the mount server, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server checks the
size of the write cache that contains changes that have been made to the database since the publishing.
Depending on the cache size, the following happens:

• If the cache size is smaller than 100 MB, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts the switchover
process.

• If the cache size is larger than 100 MB, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server uses the cache to
synchronize changes and checks the cache size once again. If the cache size is smaller than 100 MB, Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts the switchover process. If the cache size is larger than 100 MB
again, another cycle of synchronization is performed. Synchronization is relaunched until the cache size is
smaller than 100 MB.

Scheduled Switchover
After database files are copied from the mount server, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server checks the size
of the write cache that contains changes that have been made to the database since the publishing. The write
cache size is checked every minute. If the write cache size is larger than 100 MB or it has been 5 minutes since
the last synchronization, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts to synchronize the changes between
the published database and the copied database files.

After synchronization is finished, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server waits for the scheduled date and
time to start switchover.

189 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

If the synchronization process is still ongoing at the scheduled date and time, switchover starts only after the
synchronization is finished.

Manual Switchover
After database files are copied from the mount server, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server checks the size
of the write cache that contains changes that have been made to the database since the publishing. The write
cache size is checked every minute. If the write cache size is larger than 100 MB or it has been 5 minutes since
the last synchronization, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server starts to sy nchronize the changes between
the published database and the copied database files.

After synchronization is finished, you can launch switchover manually. For details, see Starting Switchover
Manually.

If you launch switchover during the synchronization process, switchover starts only after the synchronization is
finished.

Starting Switchover Manually

If you have selected the Manual switchover option in the Instant Recovery wizard, you can start the switchover
process at any time if the database is in the Ready to switchover state.

To start switchover manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select Switchover Now.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Switchover now.

190 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server sta rts an instant
recovery session which shows the progress of the recovery process.

Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

NOTE

The instant recovery session closes automatically after switchover.

Also, in the Instant Recovery session view, you can do the following:

• Edit switchover settings.

• Retry instant recovery (in case instant recovery session fails for any reason).

• Cancel instant recovery.

Editing Instant Recovery Settings

If you have started an instant recovery session and want to change switchover settings, you can edit the instant
recovery settings.

191 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To change the switchover settings of an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select E d it or right-click the database or instance and select E d it.

3. Change the switchover option and click Ap p ly.

192 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Retrying Instant Recovery
If anything disrupts the restore process (the target or mount server crashes or the network is down), the restore
process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail, you can
launch the retry manually after the server or network is up.

To start the retry process manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select the database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, click Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Retry.

Canceling Instant Recovery

If you have finished working with the published database and you do not want to switch over to it, you can
cancel the instant recovery session.

You can do this by canceling instant recovery in either Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server or the
Veeam Backup & Replication console.

NOTE

Consider the following:

• Closing either the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server window or the
Veeam Backup & Replication console does not cancel the instant recovery session.
• You do not need to cancel the instant recovery session if switchover is already performed. The
session closes automatically after switchover.

193 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Canceling Instant Recovery in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SQL Server
To cancel the instant recovery session in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Ca ncel.

Canceling Instant Recovery in Veeam Backup & Replication

Console
To cancel the instant recovery session in the Veeam Backup & Replication console, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Backup & Replication console, open the Home view.

2. In the navigation pane, select Instant Database Recovery.

194 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the preview pane, select the session and in the Instant Database Recovery tab click Stop Publishing.

Alternatively, you can right-click the session and click Stop p ublishing.

195 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
This section contains information about the available export options for Microsoft SQL Server databases.

196 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Export Works
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server allows you to export databases to the machine where Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft SQL Server is opened. You can export your database as database files (MDF and LDF files) or as a
BAK file.

Exporting databases with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server connects to the Veeam Mount Service and the staging server and
performs a series of validations. For example, it checks if the staging server has enough free space for the
staged data.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server deploys the Veeam SQL Restore Service on the staging server.
This non-persistent runtime component checks the valid rights assignments required for export, gets
information about the databases, and later performs required file operations. The Veeam SQL Restore
Service is removed from the staging server once the export process is completed.

2. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server sends an export command to the Veeam Mount Service running
on the mount server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup repository
and prepares the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the C:\VeeamFLR directory on the staging
Microsoft SQL Server machine. For more information, see How Mounting Works.

4. The Veeam SQL Restore Service saves data from the mounted file system to the C:\Windows\TEMP
directory on the staging Microsoft SQL Server machine. This step helps convert the data into the necessary
format before data transfer.

5. The Veeam SQL Restore Service sends the staged data to the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SQL Server is opened. Data transfer is established by data movers running on the staging server and the
target machine.

After the export operation successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server unmounts the
mounted file system and removes the staged data from the staging server.

197 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting as MDF
This section explains how to use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server to export database files in the MDF
format to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

Exporting Single Database

You can export a single Microsoft SQL Server database to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed by following one of these scenarios:

• Exporting Latest State

• Exporting Point-in-Time State

• Exporting to Different Location

Exporting Latest State

To export data as of the latest available state to the default location, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Files > E xport latest state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, right-click a database and select E x port files > E xport latest state to Desktop\<db_name>.

198 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

The name of the export option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port latest
sta te to Desktop\<db_name>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port state of <point_in_time>
to Desktop\<db_name>.

Exporting Point-in-Time State

To export data as of a point-in-time state to the default location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

199 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Files > E xport point-in-time state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port files > E xport point-in-time state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

200 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

201 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export your database and click E x port.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the previous step.

Exporting to Different Location

To export a single Microsoft SQL Server database to a custom location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify files location.

202 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Files > E xport to a different location.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port files > E xport to a different location.

203 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

204 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export your database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the previous step.

205 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Files Location

At this step of the wizard, specify a path to the directory where you want to export database files.

Click Browse to specify the path manually.

NOTE

The account you are using must have a sufficient permission level to access the selected directory (Read
and Write as minimum recommended).

Exporting Multiple Databases

You can export multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed by following one of these scenarios:

• Exporting Latest State

• Exporting Point-in-Time State

• Exporting to Different Location

Exporting Latest State

To export data as of the latest available state to the default location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases you want to export.

206 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select E x port Files > E xport latest state to Desktop\<server_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select E x port files > E xport latest state to
Desktop\<server_name>.

NOTE

The name of the export option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is disp layed as E x port latest
sta te to Desktop\<server_name>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port state of <point_in_time>
to Desktop\<server_name>.

207 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

Exporting Point-in-Time State

To export data as of a point-in-time state to the default location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases you want to export.

3. Specify a restore point.

208 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select E x port Files > E xport point-in-time state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select E x port files > E xport point-in-time state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

209 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

210 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created by the backup or replication job.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the specified point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option is unavailable when exporting multiple databases.

Exporting to Different Location

To export multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases to a custom location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases you want to export.

3. Specify a restore point.

4. Specify database files location.

211 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select E x port Files > E xport to a different location.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select E x port files > E xport to a different
loca tion.

212 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

213 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created by the backup or replication job.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the specified point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option is unavailable when exporting multiple databases.

214 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Database Files Location

At this step of the wizard, specify a path to the directory where you want to export database files.

215 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting as BAK
This section explains how to use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server to export database files in the BAK
file format to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

IMP ORTANT

To export database files as BAK, make sure to configure a staging SQL server, as described in Configuring
Staging SQL Server.

Exporting Single Database

You can export a single Microsoft SQL Server database to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed by following one of these scenarios:

• Exporting Latest State

• Exporting Point-in-Time State

• Exporting to Different Location

Exporting Latest State

To export data as of the latest available state to the default location, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Backup > E xport latest state to Desktop\<db_name>.bak.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port backup > E xport latest state to
Desktop\<db_name>.bak.

216 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

The name of the export option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is disp layed as E x port latest
sta te to Desktop\<db_name>.bak.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port state of <point_in_time>
to Desktop\<db_name>.bak.

Exporting Point-in-Time State

To export data as of a point-in-time state to the default location, do the following:

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

217 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Backup > E xport point-in-time state to Desktop\<db_name>.bak.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port backup > E xport point-in-time state to
Desktop\<db_name>.bak.

218 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load data as of the
moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load data as of the selected point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load data exactly as of the moment
before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

219 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export your database and click E x port.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the previous step.

Exporting to Different Location

To export a single SQL database to a custom location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the database export location.

220 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Backup > E xport to a different location.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port backup > E xport to a different location.

221 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load data as of the
moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load data as of the selected point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load data exactly as of the moment
before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

222 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export your database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the previous step.

223 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Database Export Location

At this step of the wizard, specify the path to the destination directory.

You can select E na ble compression check box to reduce the output file size.

NOTE

Compression is unavailable if the staging SQL server runs Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or any Express Edition
of Microsoft SQL Server.

Exporting Multiple Databases

You can export multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed by following one of these scenarios:

• Exporting Latest State

• Exporting Point-in-Time State

• Exporting to Different Location

Exporting Latest State

To export data as of the latest state to the default location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases you want to export.

224 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select E x port Backup > E xport latest state to Desktop\<server_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select E x port backup > E xport latest state to
Desktop\<server_name>.

225 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

Exporting Point-in-Time State

To export data as of a point-in-time state to the default location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases you want to export.

3. Specify a restore point.

226 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select E x port Backup > E xport point-in-time state to
Desktop\<server_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select E x port backup > E xport point-in-time state
to Desktop\<server_name>.

227 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

228 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created by the backup or replication job.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the specified point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option is unavailable when exporting multiple databases.

Exporting to Different Location

To export multiple Microsoft SQL Server databases as BAK to a custom location, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases you want to export.

3. Specify a restore point.

4. Specify the database export location.

229 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard

To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an instance or the server.

2. On the Instance (or Server) tab, select E x port Backup > E xport to a different location.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance or the server and select E x port backup > E xport to a different
loca tion.

230 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

231 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point

At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created by the backup or replication job.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the specified point in time.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option is unavailable when exporting multiple databases.

232 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Database Export Location

At this step of the wizard, specify the path to the destination directory.

You can select E na ble compression check box to reduce the file size.

NOTE

Compression is unavailable if the staging SQL server runs Microsoft SQL Server 2005 or any Express Edition
of Microsoft SQL Server.

233 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Database Schema and Data
This section explains how to use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server to export your database schema and
data to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

NOTE

Export of schema and data for multiple databases is not supported.

Using 1-Click Export

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server allows you to quickly export the database schema state as of the
current restore point.

To export database schema to the default location, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Schema > E xport database schema latest state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port schema > E xport database schema latest state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

NOTE

The name of the export option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port
d a tabase schema latest state to Desktop\<db_name>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port database schema state
of < point_in_time> to Desktop\<db_name>.

234 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting to Custom Location
To export database schema and data to a custom location, do the following:

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Select database objects.

5. Specify names for objects.

6. Specify the destination folder.

235 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard
To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase (or Server/Instance) tab, select E x port Schema > Export database schema and data.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port schema > E xport database schema and data.

TIP

To import data tables, use the standard SQL server b cp .exe utility. For more information, see this Microsoft
article.

236 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging SQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging SQL Server.

237 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export your database.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server database operations are listed in the SQL Server Database Operations
section.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the previous step.

238 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Select Database Objects
At this step of the wizard, select database objects to restore.

To display only specific objects, click Filter and select an object type you want to be shown in the list.

239 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Names for Objects
At this step of the wizard, specify the name to be assigned to the object.

• To specify a new name, select a database and provide a new name.

• To assign a default name with the _new suffix, click Auto.

240 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Destination Folder
Specify the destination folder to which you want to export selected database schema objects.

241 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

SQL Server Database Operations
The following table lists SQL Server database operations and their display names that appear in the fine -tune
dialog.

E ntity Op eration Display Format Constraints

<date_time> Created[/Modified]
CREATE <table_name> Table <table ID> —
<initiator>

<date_time> Deleted <table_name> Table

DROP —
<table ID> <initiator>

<date_time> Column added <table_name>

ALTER —
Table <table ID> <initiator>

<date_time> Inserted row Table name will not be

<table_name>[/table_ID] Table <initiator> displayed for deleted
INSERT INTO
table, only table ID
will be shown.

Table <date_time> Deleted row Table name will not be

<table_name>[/table_ID] Table <initiator> displayed for deleted
DELETE FROM
table, only table ID
will be shown.

<date_time> Modified Table name will not be

<table_name>>[/table_ID] Table displayed for deleted
UPDATE
<initiator> table, only table ID
will be shown.

<date_time> Truncated Table <initiator> Table name and ID will

TRUNCATE not be displayed for
deleted table.

<date_time> Inserted row

BULK INSERT —
<table_name>[/table_ID] Table <initiator>

<date_time> Created <view_name> View

CREATE —
<initiator>
View
<date_time> Deleted <view_name> Table
DROP —
<initiator>

242 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 E ntity Op eration Display Format Constraints

<date_time> Modified <view_name> View

ALTER —
<initiator>

<date_time> Created <index_name> Index

CREATE —
<initiator>

<date_time> Deleted <index_name> Index

Index DROP —
<initiator>

<date_time> Modified <index_name>

ALTER —
Index <initiator>

<date_time> Created <procedure_name>

CREATE —
Procedure <initiator>

<date_time> Deleted <procedure_name>

Procedure DROP —
Table <initiator>

<date_time> Modified <procedure_name>

ALTER —
Procedure <initiator>

<date_time> Created <function_name>

CREATE —
Function <initiator>

<date_time> Deleted <function_name>

Function DROP —
Table <initiator>

<date_time> Modified <function_name>

ALTER —
Function <initiator>

<date_time> Created <schema_name>

CREATE —
Schema <initiator>

<date_time> Deleted <schema_name>

Schema DROP —
Schema <initiator>

<date_time> Modified <schema_name> Schema cannot be

ALTER
Schema <initiator> detected.

<date_time> Created <user_name> User

User CREATE —
<initiator>

243 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 E ntity Op eration Display Format Constraints

<date_time> Deleted <user_name> User

DROP —
<initiator>

<date_time> Modified <user_name> User

ALTER —
<initiator>

<date_time> Created <trigger_name>

CREATE —
Trigger <initiator>

<date_time> Deleted <trigger_name>

Trigger DROP —
Trigger <initiator>

<date_time> Modified <trigger_name>

ALTER —
Trigger <initiator>

244 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server, you can visit Veeam R&D
Forums or submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Enabling Extended Logging.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

245 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Oracle
Veeam Explorer for Oracle allows you to restore, publish, instantly recover and export Oracle databases and
Data Guard databases from restore points created by Veeam Backup & Replication. Veeam Explorer for Oracle
supports data recovery from backups, snapshot replicas, CDP rep licas, VeeamZIP backups and storage
snapshots. Veeam Explorer for Oracle also allows you to restore your data from backups created with Veeam
Plug-in for Oracle RMAN.

NOTE
Data recovery from CDP replicas is available starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1.

246 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
Before you start using Veeam Explorer for Oracle to restore your data, consider the following requirements and
limitations.

247 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for Oracle.

Comp onent Requirement

Ora cle on Windows Veeam Explorer for Oracle supports restore of the following Oracle Database versions
OS on Microsoft Windows machines:

• Ora cle Database 21c

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 19c

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 18c

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 12c Release 2

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 12c Release 1

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 11g Release 2

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

Ora cle on Linux OS Veeam Explorer for Oracle supports restore of the following Oracle Database versions
on Linux machines:
• Ora cle Database 21c

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 19c

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 18c

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 12c Release 2

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 12c Release 1

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

• Ora cle Database 11g Release 2

For supported operating systems, see Oracle documentation.

248 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following tables list network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

Backup
Oracle on Windows

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server Source TCP, UDP 135, 137 to Ports used to deploy the runtime
machine with 139, 445 coordination process on the source
Oracle machine.

TCP 49152 to Dynamic RPC range used by the runtime

65535 coordination process that is deployed on
(for Microsoft the source machine for application-aware
Windows processing. 1
2008 or
later) For more information, see this Microsoft
article.

TCP 6167 For a rchived logs shipping

Port used by the runtime coordination

process on the source machine from
which archived logs are collected.

Source Backup server TCP 49152 to Dynamic RPC range used by the runtime
machine with 65535 coordination process that is deployed on
Oracle (for Microsoft the source machine for application-aware
Windows processing. 1
2008 or
later)

Log shipping TCP 2500 to For a rchived logs shipping

server, 3300
backup Default range of ports used for data
repository transfer over the network.

Log shipping server is used in case the

direct connection to the backup
repository is not possible. For more
information, see the Log Shipping Servers
section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

1
If you use default Microsoft Windows firewall settings, you do not need to configure dynamic RPC ports: during setup,
Veeam Backup & Replication automatically creates a firewall rule for the runtime process. If you use firewall settings other
than default ones or application-aware processing fails with the RPC function call failed error, you need to configure

249 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

dynamic RPC ports. For more information on how to configure RPC dynamic port allocation to work with firewalls, see this
Microsoft KB article.

Oracle on Linux

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server Source TCP 6162 Default port used by Linux Management
machine with Agent.
Oracle

TCP 22 Default SSH port used as a control

channel (without Linux Management
Agent).

TCP 2500 to For a rchived logs shipping

3300
Default range of ports used for managing
data transfer over the network.

Log shipping server is used in case the

direct connection to the backup
repository is not possible. For more
information, see the Log Shipping Servers
section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

TCP 6167 For a rchived logs shipping

Port used by the runtime process on the

source machine from which archived logs
are collected.

Source Log shipping TCP 2500 to For a rchived logs shipping

machine with server, 3300
Oracle backup Default range of ports used for managing
repository data transfer over the network.

Log shipping server is used in case the

direct connection to the backup
repository is not possible. For more
information, see the Log Shipping Servers
section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

250 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server, Target TCP 49152 to Recommended dynamic RPC port

Veeam Backup & Replication Windows 65535 range for Microsoft Windows 2008 or
console, mount server machine later.
associated with the backup with
repository (only for Instant Oracle, For more information, see this
Recovery or restore from staging Microsoft article.
Enterprise Manager) server
TCP 1025 to Default range of ports for the runtime
1075 component installed on the target or
staging Oracle server to support
restore operations. Each runtime
component uses the next available
port in the range, and only during
application item restore.

Note: You must manually open this

port range in Microsoft Windows
Firewall.

TCP 6160, Ports used by the Veeam Installer

11731 Service for connections to the target
Windows machine with Oracle.

Target TCP 22 Default SSH port used as a control

Linux channel.
machine
with
Oracle

Backup repository Target TCP 2500 to Default range of ports used for
Linux 3300 managing data transfer during restore
machine to the original (remote) machine or
with another Linux machine with Oracle.
Oracle

Target Linux machine with Backup TCP 2500 to Default range of ports used for
Oracle repository 3300 managing data transfer during restore
to the original (remote) machine or
another Linux machine with Oracle.

251 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Target Windows machine Mount TCP 3260 to Range of ports opened by

with Oracle, staging server server 3270 Veeam Backup & Replication to
associated manage iSCSI traffic during restore to
with the the target machine.
backup
repository This port range is opened only during
application item restore.

252 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for Oracle and
recover Oracle data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Oracle must meet the following
Ora cle launch requirements:
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore
Operator role on the backup server.

Restore, When restoring to a Windows machine, make sure to configure user accounts as
P ub lishing, Instant follows:
Recovery,
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators group on the target
Accessing staging
server machine. In addition, if ASM is used, the account must be a member of the
ORA_ASMADMIN group (for Oracle 12 and higher).
• The user account must be granted appropriate permissions to access Oracle
databases; Read and Write are the required minimum, Full Control is
recommended.
• To recover data and copy archived logs to the specified server, the user account
must be granted sufficient permissions to access the administrative share.

When restoring to a Linux machine, make sure that the user account has root
permissions on the target machine and has membership in the following groups:
OSASM [if ASM is used] (typically asmadmin), OSDBA (typically dba ), Oracle Inventory
group (typically oinstall).

253 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Restore from When restoring to a Windows machine, make sure to configure user accounts as
RMAN backups follows:

• The account must be a member of the local Administrators group and have
sysdba privileges. In addition, if ASM is used, the account must be a member of
the ORA_ASMADMIN group (for Oracle 12 and higher).
• The account must be granted appropriate permissions to access Oracle
databases; Read and Write are the required minimum, Full Control is
recommended.
• To restore data to the specified server, the user account must be granted
sufficient permissions to access the administrative share.

When restoring to a Linux machine:

• The account must be a member of the dba group. In addition, if ASM is used, the
account must be a member of the OSASM group (typically asmadmin).
• The account does not need root privileges, but make sure that the following
requirements are met:
o If Oracle home on the target machine uses an encrypted wallet, the
TNS_ADMIN (if it is used for the target Oracle home) and
ORACLE_BASE environment variables on the target server must be
set.
o The resource limits of the user account must be within the
recommended range. For more information on user resource limits,
see the Oracle documentation.

E x port as database The account under which Veeam Explorer for Oracle runs must be a member of the
files local Administrators group.

254 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
This requirement applies to backup jobs, replication jobs, and CDP policies created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

When you create a job or CDP policy, make sure to enable application-aware processing in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console:

• When you configure a backup job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Backup Job wizard.

• When you configure a replication job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Replication Job wizard.

• When you configure a CDP policy, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the New
CDP Policy wizard.

Note that when you create storage snapshots, application-aware processing is automatically enabled. For more
information, see the Application Item Restore from Storage Snapshots section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

If your restore points were created without application-aware image processing, you can still explore them, as
described in Exploring non-Application Enabled Backups.

The application-specific information is retrieved according to the following logic:

• If the a p plication-aware image processing option is enabled, Veeam Explorer for Oracle obtains
application-specific Oracle database information from the Oracle VM backup metadata located in the
backup server configuration database.

• If the a p plication-aware image processing option is disabled, Veeam Explorer for Oracle requires a staging
Oracle server to mount the selected image-level Oracle VM backup (with databases and redo logs) and to
collect required information using the guest scan and Oracle infrastructure analysis.

IMP ORTANT

Make sure to have your database in the OPEN state during backup. Otherwise, the following warning
message will appear in the backup job session: Oracle database instance state is not valid for property
collection.
Whether the backup job completes or fails depends on the selected backup job settings. For more
information, see the Application-Aware Processing section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

255 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and known limitations of Veeam Explorer for Oracle.

General
• When Veeam Explorer for Oracle is installed on a server on which both Veeam Backup & Replication and
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings will be inherited from the
Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

• [Data recovery to Linux server] You can recover data over SSH only — recovery using Linux Management
Agent is not supported.

• [Data recovery to Linux server] Data recovery with Veeam Explorer for Oracle is not supported if the
SQL*Plus environment on the target Oracle server is configured to use glogin.sql or login.sql
profile files. For details, see the Configuring SQL*Plus section of the SQL*Plus User's Guide.

• [Data recovery to Linux server] Recovery of databases that resided in an encrypted file system on the
original server is not supported. In particular, encrypted LVM volumes are not supported.

• [Data recovery to Microsoft Windows server] Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not support data recovery
using a group Managed Service Account (gMSA) to connect to the target server.

• Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not support recovery of encrypted Oracle databases.

• To recover Oracle data from a restore point containing a shut-down Oracle database, you can use heuristic
analysis. In this case, the restore point must be created without application-aware processing. For details,
see Exploring Non-Application Enabled Backups.

• Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not support heuristic analysis of backups made with Veeam Agent for
Microsoft Windows or Veeam Agent for Linux. If you use a Veeam Agent backup job or policy to back up a
shut-down Oracle database, you can restore the Oracle database using Veeam Agent functionality:
volume-level restore, file-level restore or bare metal restore.

• Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not support data restore, data publishing, instant recovery and export of
refreshable pluggable databases (PDBs). To restore refreshable PDBs, use Veeam Plug -in for Oracle
RMAN.

• Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of Oracle data from replicas can only recover
your data to the latest state of the selected restore point. Replication jobs do not copy Oracle archived
logs so data recovery to a point-in-time state is not supported.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for Oracle supports data recovery from
CDP replicas. Consider the following limitations:

o Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of Oracle data from CDP replicas can only
recover your data to the latest state of the selected long -term restore point. CDP policies do not copy
Oracle archived logs so data recovery to a point-in-time state is not supported.

o When you recover your data from CDP replicas, you can only use long -term (both application-
consistent and crash-consistent) restore points. Short-term restore points are not supported.

o You can recover your data from a CDP replica if its CDP policy is currently running. During recovery,
the CDP policy does not create new long-term restore points and does not delete existing ones.
Short-term restore points are still created.

o You cannot restore application items from a CDP replica in parallel with guest OS file restore,
SureReplica, and failover.

256 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • Mount of Btrfs and ZFS disks will fail if you want to perform instant recovery, data restore or data publish
to the original server. The issue occurs due to a restriction for mounting 2 Btrfs or ZFS disks with identical
IDs to the same machine (the Btrfs and ZFS disks have the same IDs on the backup and the original server).

Note that Btrfs volumes on a backed-up Veeam Agent machine must have identifiers in the UUID format in
the fstab configuration file.

• Mount operations with FUSE are not supported on kernel versions 4.0.0 – 4.1.33. Make sure to upgrade
the kernel to version 4.1.37 or later.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for Oracle supports SSH fingerprint
validation of Linux machines used as target and staging Oracle servers. For more information on how to
configure this feature, see the Linux Hosts Authentication section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

If you have selected the more secure, manual validation in the Veeam Backup & Replication console,
consider the following:

o If the target server is unknown or its fingerprint cannot be recognized, you will be able to proceed
with the recovery operation after you manually validate the fingerprint in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console.

o The validation process matches the fingerprint only with the network identifier of the Linux machine
(its IPv4 address, IPv6 address, FQDN, or hostname) used in the respective Veeam Explorer for Oracle
session. If you use 2 different network identifiers of the same unverified server in 2 recovery sessions
(for example, its IPv4 address in one recovery session and its hostname in another), you will need to
perform 2 separate fingerprint validations. No further validations are necessary if you reuse a
validated network identifier in another recovery session.

• [For data recovery to Oracle ASM disks] You cannot specify paths and file names for recovered database
files. During recovery, Oracle ASM will automatically create and name the necessary files in the specified
disk group using the OMF (Oracle Managed Files) feature.

• Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not support recovery of Oracle databases deployed on Solaris OS or IBM
AIX. You can restore such databases with Veeam Plug -in for Oracle RMAN. For details, see the Restore to
Original Server or the Restore to Another Server section of the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise Applications
User Guide.

Restore from Image-Level Backups

• Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not support restore using PowerShell Direct, VIX API or vSphere
Automation API.

• 1-Click restore to the original location from storage snapshots is not supported.

• A point in time restore is not supported for backups stored in the DR site by backup copy jobs and for
backups stored in a cloud repository. Such repositories cannot be used as a destination loca tion for
archived logs.

• Restore of databases from the current restore point is only supported for backups created by Veeam
backup job, replication job, VeeamZIP and for imported backup and storage snapshots.

• Before you use Veeam Backup & Replication to back up an Oracle database that was converted from a RAC
database to a non-cluster database, make sure to disable all online redo log threads that are managed by
other instances. Otherwise, Veeam Explorer for Oracle will not be able to restore the databas e.

• If OS authentication on a target Oracle server is disabled, the restore of databases with enabled ASM will
not be possible.

257 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • If OS authentication on a staging Oracle server is disabled, the restore of databases with enabled ASM as
of the selected transaction state will not be possible.

• Make sure that both the backed-up Oracle machine and the target server to which you are restoring have
the same OS patch version.

• Oracle Automatic Storage Management Filter Driver (Oracle ASMFD) is not supported.

Restore from RMAN Backups

IMP ORTANT

Restore from RMAN backups is not possible if OS authentication is disabled on the target Oracle server.

Restore of Oracle Real Application Clusters (RAC)

To restore RAC databases from RMAN backups, make sure you apply the following restore settings. Otherwise,
the databases will be restored as standalone databases.

• Restore to original server: You must perform the restore with original name and settings.

• Restore to another server:

o You must perform the restore with original name and settings.

o The Oracle home and Oracle directory structure must remain the same.

o You must copy the original control file to the target server or recovery catalog of the database which
is running in the duplicated cluster. Such a control file must contain information about backups from
which the restore is being performed.

o For Oracle ASM, the file system structure of the restored database must remain the same.

When you restore RAC databases to Oracle ASM disks, the ASM instance must be running directly on the target
server for the restore operation.

Restore of Data Guard Databases

Data restore with Veeam Explorer for Oracle from backups of Data Guard databases created by Veeam Plug -in
for Oracle RMAN has experimental support. You can restore Data Guard databases from Veeam Plug -in backups
with the following limitations:

• Restore to original server

o You can restore Data Guard primary databases as primary databases only to the original location with
the original name and settings.

o You can restore Data Guard standby databases as standby databases only to the original location with
the original name and settings.

A restore operation with different settings will fail due to Data Guard limitations.

• Restore to another server

o Make sure that the copy of the original cluster already exists in the duplicated environment.

o You must copy the original control file to the target server or recovery catalog of the database which
is running in the duplicated cluster. Such a control file must contain information about backups from
which the restore is being performed.

258 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o You can restore Data Guard primary databases as primary databases only with the original name and
settings.

o You can restore Data Guard standby databases as standby databases only to the original location with
original name and settings.

A restore operation with different settings will fail due to Data Guard limitations.

Restore of Oracle Databases

• Before you restore an Oracle database from an RMAN backup, make sure that Veeam Plug -in for Oracle
RMAN is installed on the target server and properly configured. For more information, see the
Deployment and Configuration section of the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise Applications Guide.

• Before you restore an Oracle database from an RMAN backup to another server, make sure that the
account used to connect the plug-in on the target server to the backup server and backup repository
meets the following requirements:

o The account must either have the Veeam Backup Administrator , or both the Veeam Backup Operator
and Veeam Restore Operator roles. You can also use the account under which the backup was created.
For more information on how to assign Veeam Backup & Replication roles, see the Users and Roles
section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

o The account must have access permissions to the backup repository where the backup is stored. For
more information, see the Access and Encryption Settings on Repositories section of the Veeam Plug-
ins for Enterprise Applications Guide.

If the account does not meet these requirements, you must configure the plug -in on the target server with
the credentials of an account that meets the requirements or with a recovery token. You can do this by
running the following command on the target server:

OracleRMANConfigTool --set-auth-data-for-restore

For more information about this command, see the Restore to Another Server section of the Veeam Plug-
ins for Enterprise Applications Guide.

• When restoring to another server with the original name and settings, consider the following:

o The Oracle home and Oracle directory structure must remain the same.

o You must copy the original control file to the target server or recovery catalog of the database which
is running in the duplicated cluster. Such a control file must contain information about backups from
which the restore is being performed.

o For Oracle ASM, the file system structure of the restored database must remain the same.

• With Veeam Explorer for Oracle, you can restore entire multitenant container databases (CDBs); restore of
individual pluggable databases (PDBs) is not supported. To restore individual PDBs, use Veeam Plug -in for
Oracle RMAN.

• To restore your database with a different name and settings, you must use a server parameter file (SPFILE)
for the database and set CONFIGURE CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP to ON before backup. For more
information, see the Oracle Environment Planning section of the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise
Applications Guide.

259 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publish
• Make sure that the target Oracle server to which you publish your databases is of the same version as the
database in the backup.

• Make sure that the volume with the write cache has enough free disk space to store the changes of the
published database. The write cache is stored in the /var/tmp folder on the target server.

• If the database that you publish is part of the ASM group, make sure that the target Oracle server also has
an ASM group properly configured.

Instant Recovery
• For Oracle Database 12c, instant recovery is supported starting from version 12.2.0.1.0.211019.

• Instant recovery is supported for image-level backups only. You cannot perform instant recovery from
RMAN backups.

• Make sure that both the backed-up Oracle machine and the target server to which you are restoring have
the same OS patch version.

• Instant recovery of the entire Oracle Data Guard is not supported. However, you can instantly recover
individual Data Guard databases.

• Instant recovery of SAP on Oracle is not supported.

• If you plan to perform scheduled or manual switchover, make sure that the volume with the write cache
has enough free disk space to store the changes of the published database.

o For Windows machines, the write cache is stored on the mount server. You can configure the mount
server in the backup repository settings. For more information, see the Specify Mount Server Settings
section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

o For Linux machines, the write cache is stored in the /var/tmp folder on the target server.

• During the instant recovery process, Veeam Explorer for Oracle requires 512 MB of RAM for each database.

• If you add a new pluggable database to the container during an instant recovery process, the instant
recovery session fails.

260 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Oracle, you can use any of the following methods:

• Use the Restore application item option to load Oracle data from a restore point created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

For more information, see the Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

• Use the Restore from Oracle RMAN backup option to load backups created by Veeam Plug-in for Oracle
RMAN.

For more information, see the Restore with Veeam Explorer for Oracle section of the Veeam Plug-ins for
Enterprise Applications guide.

• Go to Sta rt and click Veeam Explorer for Oracle if you want to, for example, manage ongoing instant
recovery sessions or check the installed product version. Note that this method does not load any Oracle
data and does not allow you to start new data recovery sessions.

If you open Veeam Explorer for Oracle from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of the backup server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform recovery operations, the user account used to run Veeam Explorer for Oracle must
be a member of the local Administrators or Users group on the machine where Veeam Explorers
Suite is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Oracle is running, select Use W indows session
a uthentication.

261 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

262 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
Veeam Explorer for Oracle provides you with a convenient user interface that allows you to perform required
operations in a user-friendly manner.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Oracle window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Oracle wizard or window. You will then be
redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains general program commands organized into logical groups.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of your backup files.

263 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which shows you the details about objects you have selected in the navigation pane.

264 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Mounting Works
To facilitate data transfer, Veeam Explorer for Oracle uses mounting operations during data recovery.

Mounting is performed by the Veeam Mount Service component which is deployed on the mount server
associated with the backup repository. For more information, see the Mount Servers section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

During mounting, the Veeam Mount Service retrieves a file system from the backup repository, attaches it to the
hard drive of the target machine and creates a mount point. Where the file system is mounted to depends on
the recovery operation.

• For restore, publishing and instant recovery, mounting is performed from the backup repository to the
target server.

• For export as RMAN backup and export of database files for Linux machines, mounting is performed from
the backup repository to the staging server.

• For export of database files for Windows machines, mounting is performed from the backup repository to
the machine where Veeam Explorer for Oracle is opened.

Note that when restoring your data as of the state prior to a specific transaction, Veeam Explorer for Oracle
requires an additional mount point to be created to display a list of available transactions in the recovery wizard.
In this case, the Veeam Mount Service also mounts the necessary file system from the backup repository to the
staging server. The Veeam Oracle Restore Service deployed on the staging server (for Windows machines) or
Veeam Explorer for Oracle itself (for Linux machines) obtains a list of available transactions, which Veeam
Explorer for Oracle displays in the recovery wizard. For more information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

The underlying technology used for mounting depends on the operating system of the Oracle machine.

• To mount a file system to machines with Microsoft Windows, the Veeam Mount Service uses the iSCSI
protocol. The target machine or the staging server acts as an iSCSI initiator, and the mount server
associated with the backup repository acts as an iSCSI target. The iSCSI mount point is non-persistent and
only exists during the recovery process.

• To mount a file system to machines with Linux, the Veeam Mount Service uses FUSE.

265 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Viewing Database Information
To view Oracle database information, select a database or Da ta Guard in the navigation pane and review its
properties in the preview pane.

Viewing Oracle Database Information

The following figure shows the standalone database information view.

If the current restore point was created with Oracle Automatic Storage Management (ASM), file paths will be
displayed with the ‘+’ prefix.

266 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Viewing Oracle Data Guard Information
The following figure shows the Data Guard information view.

Viewing Oracle RMAN Database Information

The following figure shows the RMAN database information view.

267 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
This section explains how to configure the required application settings and components of Veeam Explorer for
Oracle.

268 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Configuring Staging Oracle Server
To enable advanced recovery functionality, you can use an Oracle machine as a staging server. This section
explains the use cases of the staging server and how to configure it.

A staging server is required in the following cases:

• When you export Oracle databases, as described in Data Export. In this case, a staging server is not
necessary only when you export database files from a backup of a Windows -based Oracle machine.

• When you restore, export, publish, and instantly recover your data up to a specific transaction. For
example, see Fine-Tune Restore Point.

• When you explore backups created without application-aware image processing. For more information,
see Exploring Oracle Backups.

Consider the following:

• The staging server must have the same operating system and the same Oracle version as both the source
and target Oracle servers.

• If you plan to restore databases with Automatic Storage Management enabled, both staging and target
servers must have ASM enabled.

• Oracle Database Express Edition cannot be used as a staging system.

For Windows-based Oracle Servers

To configure a staging server for Windows-based Oracle servers, do the following:

1. Go to the main menu and click General Options.

2. On the Staging Server tab, select the Use this helper Oracle server for advanced recovery functionality
check box and do the following:

a. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the server that you want to use as an
Oracle staging server.

b. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select one of the following options:

▪ Use current account. To connect to the specified server using the current user account under
which Veeam Explorer for Oracle running.

▪ Use the following account. To connect to the specified server under a custom user account.

When using a custom account, in the Username field, specify a user name and in the P a ssword
field, provide the password.

269 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Specify the path to Oracle home.

Click Browse to browse for Oracle home.

For Linux-based Oracle Servers

To configure a staging server for Linux-based Oracle servers, do the following:

1. Go to the main menu and click General Options.

2. On the Ora cle tab, select the Use this helper Oracle server for advanced recovery function ality check box
and do the following:

a. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the server that you want to use as an Oracle
staging server.

b. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number.

c. In the Account field, specify a user account under which to connect to the specified server.

d. In the P a ssword field, specify the password.

e. If the private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

i. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

ii. In the P rivate key field, specify a key. To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

iii. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

270 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Specify the path to Oracle home.

4. If you specify data for a non-root account that does not have root permissions on a Linux server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file a utomatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. When registering a Linux-based server, you have an option to failover to using the su command for
distros where the sudo command is not available.

To enable the failover, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root p assword
field, enter the password for the root account.

271 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Enabling Extended Logging
Veeam Explorer for Oracle allows you to enable an extended logging mode to collect logs that contain more
details on specific operations. After you enable extended logging, you can go back to the application and
perform the actions for which you want to collect additional information. Then you can collect the logs. For
more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

To enable extended logging, do the following:

1. Go to the main menu and click General Options.

2. On the Ad vanced tab, select the E na ble extended logging check box and click OK.

272 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exploring Oracle Backups
This section contains information about exploring different kinds of Oracle backups.

273 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exploring Application-Enabled Backups
For more information about exploring backups created with application-aware image processing, see the
Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

274 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exploring Non-Application Enabled Backups
If a VM backup file that you are exploring has been created without application-aware image processing in
Veeam Backup & Replication, you can perform heuristic analysis to restore your Oracle data. The heuristic
analysis mounts the required restore points and finds existing Oracle databases in these points.

The heuristic analysis enables you to restore your Oracle data even if the VM is powered -off or a database is
shut-down at the time of backup. Note that if you backup a powered-on VM with a shut-down database,
application-aware processing must be disabled in the backup job settings. With application-aware processing
enabled, you can only backup databases in the OPEN state.

NOTE

The heuristic analysis requires a staging Oracle server to be configured in advance. For more information,
see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

To explore backups created without application-aware image processing, do the following:

1. Launch the Heuristic Analysis wizard.

2. Specify the target server.

3. Specify heuristic settings.

275 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Heuristic Analysis Wizard
To launch the Heuristic Analysis wizard, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Backup & Replication console, select the necessary backup and click Ap p lication Items >
Ora cle (or W indows) on the ribbon.

2. At the Restore P oint step of the Ora cle Database Restore wizard, select a restore point to explore.

3. Complete subsequent steps of the wizard and click Browse.

Veeam Backup & Replication will launch Veeam Explorer for Oracle and display the Heuristic Analysis wizard.

276 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Server
At this step of the Heuristic Analysis wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle
server. The set of connection settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify a server name to which you want to restore data.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to server section, select one of the following:

o Use current account. To connect to the specified server using the current user account under which
Veeam Explorer for Oracle is running.

o Use the following account. To connect to the specified server under a custom user account.

For more information on the required user account settings, see the Permissions section.

Linux-Based Oracle Server

For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

277 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 5. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root permissions on the target server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If the sudo command is not available or may fail on the target Linux server, you have an option to use
the su command instead. To enable the su command, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check
box and enter the password for the root account in the Root p assword field.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

278 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Heuristic Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the following:

• Ora cle home. To attach a database, apply log files (if required) and make a consistency check of the
database.

• Heuristic analysis settings:

o Current restore point analysis. To search for available Oracle databases within the selected restore
point only.

o E x tended analysis. To search for available Oracle databases within multiple restore points.

Typically, Veeam Explorer for Oracle scans 3 restore points; the current restore point that you select
when opening Veeam Explorer for Oracle, and 2 other restore points that come before and after the
current restore point.

Once analysis is complete, Veeam Explorer for Oracle will load available Oracle databases to the program scope
automatically.

279 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exploring RMAN Backups
This section explains how to explore backups created with the Oracle RMAN Plug -in. For more information, see
Veeam Plug-in for Oracle RMAN.

To load RMAN backups, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Backup & Replication console, open the Home view.

2. Go to the Ba ckups > Disk node.

3. Right-click an RMAN backup and select Restore from Oracle RMAN backup.

280 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
This section contains information about the available restore operations in Veeam Explorer for Oracle.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

IMP ORTANT

To restore your Oracle data, make sure to install a bash shell on the target Oracle server.

In case of latest state or point-in-time state restore to the original server, the behavior is as follows:

• Data Guard will be restored starting from the primary node. Once the primary node is restored, Veeam
Explorer for Oracle will use it to restore standby nodes.

• Database files will be copied to the original location and then mounted to the original Oracle home.

• Databases from the backed-up ASM group will be restored back to the original ASM group.

• All existing databases on the target Oracle server will be replaced with databases from the backup files.

Note that restore from storage snapshots to the original Oracle server is not supported. To restore your Oracle
data from storage snapshots, use the Restore to another server command.

281 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Restore Works
Restoring Oracle databases with Veeam Explorer for Oracle works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Oracle connects to the target server and performs a series of validations. For example,
it checks if the target server has enough free space for the restored database.

Some aspects of the validation process vary depending on the operating system of the Oracle machine.

o For Windows machines, Veeam Explorer for Oracle deploys the Veeam Oracle Restore Service on the
target server and, if you restore your data up to a specific transaction, on the staging server. This non-
persistent runtime component checks the valid rights assignments required for database recovery,
gets information about the databases, and later performs required file operations including database
and transaction logs copy. The Veeam Oracle Restore Service is removed from the target and the
staging server once the restore process is completed.

o For Linux machines, Veeam Explorer for Oracle performs the necessary validations without deploying
a non-persistent runtime component. In addition, starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1,
Veeam Explorer for Oracle validates the SSH fingerprints of the target server.

2. Veeam Explorer for Oracle sends a restore command to the Veeam Mount Service running on the mount
server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup repository and prepares
the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the target Oracle machine. Mounting is
done to the C:\VeeamFLR directory for Windows machines or the /tmp directory for Linux machines. For
more information, see How Mounting Works.

4. The Veeam Oracle Restore Service (for Windows machines) or Veeam Explorer for Oracle itself (for Linux
machines) copies the database files and archived redo logs from the mounted file system to the native file
system of the target machine and starts the restored database.

After the restore operation successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for Oracle unmounts the mounted file
system from the target server.

282 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Single Database
With Veeam Explorer for Oracle, you can restore an Oracle database to the original server or to another server.

To restore an Oracle database, follow one of these scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring to Another Server

Restoring Latest State

To restore an Oracle database or Data Guard to the latest state on the backup file, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database or Data Guard.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database or Data Guard and select Restore database > Restore latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the restore option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is disp layed as Restore latest
sta te to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

283 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Point-in-Time State
To restore an Oracle database or Data Guard as of the selected point-in-time state, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune restore point.

284 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database or Data Guard.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore point-in-time state.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database or Data Guard and select Restore database > Restore point-in-time
sta te.

IMP ORTANT

A point in time restore is only possible if the ARCHIVELOG mode is enabled.

285 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain database files as of the selected point in
time within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

Consider the following:

• The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more
information, see Required Job Settings.

• The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Oracle server. For more
information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

286 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore your database and click
Restore.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

Restoring to Another Server

This section explains how to restore Oracle databases and Oracle Data Guard databases to another server.

NOTE

When restoring from a Data Guard configuration to another server as described in this section, the
databases from the Data Guard configuration will be restored as standalone Oracle databases preserving
no Data Guard infrastructure. To restore Data Guard infrastructure altogether, use either latest state
restore, or point-in-time restore to the original server. For more information, see Restoring Latest State
and Restoring Point-in-Time State.

To restore data, take the following steps:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target server.

5. Specify Oracle settings.

287 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 6. Specify database files location.

288 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database or Data Guard.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database or Data Guard and select Restore database > Restore to another
server.

289 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

Consider the following:

• The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more
information, see Required Job Settings.

• The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Oracle server. For more
information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

290 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore your database.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

291 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle server. The set of
connection settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Oracle is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Oracle and mount server are located on separate
machines.

o Use the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

For more information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

Linux-Based Oracle Server

For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

292 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

5. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root permissions on the target server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If the sudo command is not available or may fail on the target Linux server, you have an option to use
the su command instead. To enable the su command, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check
box and enter the password for the root account in the Root p assword field.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

293 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Oracle Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the location to which you want to restore the database.

• Select Restore to the original location to restore the database back to the original location.

• Select Restore to a different location to restore the database to a custom location.

a. In the Ora cle home field, specify the Oracle home directory. To locate the Oracle home directory, click
Browse and select the folder you want to use.

b. In the Global database name field, specify the global database name as DB_NAME.DB_DOMAIN,
where:

▪ DB_NAME is the database name. Oracle limits the length of the database name to 8 characters.
If the database name you specify exceeds this limit, Veeam Explorer for Oracle will
automatically shorten the database name, and hence the global database name, during the
restore process.

The value you specify is also used for the unique database name ( DB_UNIQUE_NAME ). The
unique database name can contain up to 30 characters.

▪ DB_DOMAIN is the domain name of the database. It does not count towards any character limits
and Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not shorten it during the restore process.

For example, if you specify the global database name as orcl_restored.tech.local , Veeam Explorer for
Oracle will shorten it to orcl_res.tech.local. The database name will be orcl_res, while the unique
database name will be orcl_restored.

c. In the Ora cle SID field, specify the database system identifier. The Ora cle SID field is automatically
filled with the value entered in the Global database name field, but you can also assign a different
value.

The maximum length of the Oracle SID is 12 characters and it can only contain alphanumeric
characters (a-z, A-Z and 0-9).

294 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

If the account specified in the previous step is not the Oracle home user, you will be asked to provide a
password to access the target Oracle home. Applicable to Oracle 12c and later versions.

295 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Database Files Location
At this step of the wizard, specify the location for database files.

To edit the path, click the path row and provide the location you want to use.

296 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Multiple Databases
With Veeam Explorer for Oracle, you can restore multiple Oracle databases to the original server or to another
server with different settings.

To restore multiple Oracle database, follow one of these scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring to Another Server

Restoring Latest State

To restore multiple databases to the latest state to the original server, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the Oracle server or an Oracle home.

2. On the Server or Oracle Home tab, select Restore Database > Restore latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Oracle server or an Oracle home and select Restore databases > Restore
la test state to <original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the restore option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore latest
sta te to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

297 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Point-in-Time State
To restore multiple Oracle databases to the original server as of the selected point-in-time state, do the
following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

298 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the Oracle server or an Oracle home.

2. On the Server or Ora cle Home tab, select Restore Databases > Restore point-in-time state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Oracle server or an Oracle home and select Restore databases > Restore
p oint-in-time state to <original_location>.

299 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain database files as of the selected point in
time within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

Note that the Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if archived log backups exist. For
more information, see Required Job Settings.

Restoring to Another Server

To restore multiple Oracle databases to another server, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify a target server.

4. Specify Oracle settings.

300 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the Oracle server or an Oracle home.

2. On the Server or Ora cle Home tab, select Restore Databases > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Oracle server or an Oracle home and select Restore databases > Restore to
a nother server.

301 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore the databases:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

302 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle server. The set of
connection settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Oracle is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Oracle and mount server are located on separate
machines.

o Use the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

For more information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

Linux-Based Oracle Server

For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

303 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

5. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root permissions on the targ et server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If the sudo command is not available or may fail on the target Linux server, you have an option to use
the su command instead. To enable the su command, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check
box and enter the password for the root account in the Root p assword field.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

304 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Oracle Settings
At this step of the wizard, select a location to which you want to restore databases and launch the restore.

1. At the Sp ecify Oracle settings field, select one of the following:

o Restore to the original location: Veeam Explorer for Oracle checks if there are suitable Oracle home
directories. If yes, the databases are restored to these home directories. If no, the databases are not
restored, and Veeam Explorer for Oracle issues an error that suitable home directories have not been
found.

o Restore to a different location: Veeam Explorer for Oracle restores all databases to the custom
location. To specify the Oracle home directory, click Browse and select a folder that you want to use.

2. Click Restore.

NOTE

If the account specified in the previous step is not an Oracle home user, you will be asked to provide a
password to access the target Oracle home. Applicable to Oracle 12c and later versions.

305 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring RMAN Backups
This section explains how to restore backups created with Veeam Plug -in for Oracle RMAN. For more
information, see the Veeam Plug-in for Oracle RMAN section of the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise Applications
User Guide.

Before you restore data from RMAN backups, make sure that your infrastructure is set up properly. In particular,
note that when you restore from an RMAN backup to another server and Veeam Plug-in for Oracle RMAN on the
target server does not have access to the source backup, you must configure the plug -in authentication
settings. For more information, see Considerations and Limitations.

To restore RMAN backups, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify the recovery type.

3. Specify the target server.

4. Specify Oracle settings.

5. Specify home user password.

6. Specify point in time.

7. Specify database files location.

8. Configure channel allocation.

306 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. Open an RMAN backup, as described in Exploring RMAN Backups.

2. In the navigation pane, select a database.

3. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore or right-click a database and select Restore.

307 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Recovery Type
At this step of the wizard, select a recovery type:

• Recover database to specific point in time

Select this option to restore databases as of the latest available state.

• Restore data files to specific point in time

Select this option to restore only datafiles as of the specific point-in-time state without applying log files.

• Recover from previously restored datafiles

Select this option to apply log files to restored datafiles.

308 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle server. The set of
connection settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

If you restore to another server, make sure that Veeam Plug -in for Oracle RMAN on the target server is properly
configured. For more information, see Considerations and Limitations.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the Oracle server to which you want to
restore data. When you restore Real Application Cluster (RAC) databases , the default value is the Single
Client Access Name (SCAN) of the cluster.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to server section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account

Select this option to connect to the specified server using the current user account under which
Veeam Explorer for Oracle is running.

o Use the following account

Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user account.

For more information on the required user account settings, see the Permissions section.

309 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Linux-Based Oracle Server
For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server. When you restore Real
Application Cluster (RAC) databases, the default value is the Single Client Access Name (SCAN) of the
cluster.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

5. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

310 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Oracle Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the location to which you want to restore the database.

• Select Restore with the original name and settings to restore data using the original name and settings.

• Select Restore with different name and settings to choose custom settings:

a. In the Ora cle home field, specify the Oracle home directory.

You can click Browse to select a folder.

b. In the Global database name field, specify the global database name as DB_NAME.DB_DOMAIN,
where:

▪ DB_NAME is the database name. Oracle limits the length of the database name to 8 characters.
If the database name you specify exceeds this limit, Veeam Explorer for Oracle will
automatically shorten the database name, and hence the global database name, during the
restore process.

The value you specify is also used for the unique database name ( DB_UNIQUE_NAME ). The
unique database name can contain up to 30 characters.

▪ DB_DOMAIN is the domain name of the database. It does not count towards any character limits
and Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not shorten it during the restore process.

For example, if you specify the global database name as orcl_restored.tech.local , Veeam Explorer for
Oracle will shorten it to orcl_res.tech.local. The database name will be orcl_res, while the unique
database name will be orcl_restored.

The Global database name field is available only if you have selected the Recover database to specific
p oint in time option at the Specify Recovery Type step.

c. In the Ora cle SID field, specify the database system identifier. The Ora cle SID field is automatically
filled with the value entered in the Global database name field, but you can also assign a different
value.

The maximum length of the Oracle SID is 12 characters and it can only contain alphanumeric
characters (a-z, A-Z and 0-9).

311 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

Consider the following:

• To use the Restore with different name and settings option, make sure that Controlfile Autobackup
is enabled. For more information, see the Oracle Environment Planning section of the Veeam Plug-in
for Oracle RMAN User Guide.
• An existing Oracle SID (if any) will be replaced with that from the backup when selecting the
Restore with different name and settings option.

312 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Home User Password
This step of the wizard is available if the account specified in Specify Target Server is not the Oracle home user.

At this step of the wizard, specify the password for the Oracle home user.

313 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Point in Time
At this step of the wizard, do the following:

• Select the Restore to the latest available option to restore data as of the latest available state.

• Select the Restore to the following point in time option to select a state as of which you want to restore
data:

o Da te. Select a date as of which you want to restore data.

o SCN. Specify SCN (System Change Number).

o Sequence. Specify the sequence.

• Select the Generate new DBID check box to generate a new DBID in addition to the new database name.
This check box is available only when using the Restore with different name and settings option at the
Specify Oracle Settings step.

• Select the Sup press RESETLOG command and do not bring the database online check box to skip the
OPEN RESETLOGS operation if it was required by the database. The database in this case remains in the
mount state.
This check box is available only when using the Restore with the original name a nd settings option at the
Specify Oracle Settings step.

TIP

For more information, see the Oracle documentation.

314 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Database Files Location
At this step of the wizard, specify the location to which you want to restore data files.

Consider the following:

• When restoring with the Restore with the original name and settings option, only the location for Data
files will be available for editing.

• When restoring with the Restore with different name and settings option, the location for the following
files will be available for editing:

o Control files

o Data files

o Log files

o Temp files

To change the location, click the path row and specify the path.

315 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 8. Configure Channel Allocation
At this step of the wizard, specify channels allocation.

Channels are used to restore data in multiple threads per session. Using multiple threads allows Veeam Explorer
for Oracle to reduce the amount of time needed to complete restore sessions. For more information about
allocating channels, see the Oracle documentation.

The following options are available:

• Use default channel configuration

Select this option to use the default channel configuration defined in the RMAN plug-in settings.

• Allocate the following number of channels

Select this option to specify the number of channels to be used when restoring your data.

316 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Publishing
Publishing an Oracle database allows you to temporarily attach the databases to the target Oracle server
without launching restore. Publishing typically occurs faster than using standard restore features and could be
convenient when, for example, your time to perform disaster-recovery operations is limited.

Veeam Explorer for Oracle mounts disks from the backup repository to the target machine (under the
C:\VeeamFLR directory for Windows machines or the /tmp directory for Linux machines), retrieves required
database files and attaches the associated database directly to Oracle Database so that you can perform
required operations using Oracle Database tools such as Oracle SQL Developer.

After you have launched a publishing operation to an Oracle machine, you can quickly republish the latest or
point-in-time state of the database to the same machine.

Once you are done working with the published database, you can export the modified database as an Oracle
RMAN backup. For more information, see Exporting as RMAN Backup.

Before publishing data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

317 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Publishing Works
Publishing Oracle databases with Veeam Explorer for Oracle works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Oracle connects to the Veeam Mount Service and the target server and performs a
series of validations. Some aspects of the validation process vary depending on the operating system of
the Oracle machine.

o For Windows machines, Veeam Explorer for Oracle deploys the Veeam Oracle Restore Service on the
target server and, if you publish your data up to a specific transaction, on the staging server. This non-
persistent runtime component checks the valid rights assignments required for databas e recovery,
gets information about the databases, and later performs the required database operations. The
Veeam Oracle Restore Service is removed from the target and the staging server once you unpublish
the database.

o For Linux machines, Veeam Explorer for Oracle performs the necessary validations without deploying
a non-persistent runtime component. In addition, starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1,
Veeam Explorer for Oracle validates the SSH fingerprints of the target server.

2. Veeam Explorer for Oracle sends a publishing command to the Veeam Mount Service running on the
mount server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup repository and
prepares the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the target Oracle machine. Mounting is
done to the C:\VeeamFLR directory for Windows machines or the /tmp directory for Linux machines. For
more information, see How Mounting Works.

The Veeam Oracle Restore Service (for Windows machines) or Veeam Explorer for Oracle itself (for Linux
machines) opens the database from the mounted file system, so that you can perform the required
operations with Oracle tools.

All changes to the database that occur after publishing are saved in the publishing write cache, whose
location depends on the operating system of the Oracle machine.

o For Windows machines, the publishing write cache is stored on the mount server. You can view and
change the write cache location in the mount server settings. For more information, see the Specify
Mount Server Settings section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

o For Linux machines, the publishing write cache is stored in the /var/tmp folder on the target server.

Once the publishing operation is completed, you can export the modified database as an Oracle RMAN backup.
For more information, see Exporting as RMAN Backup.

318 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publishing to Specified Server
To publish a database to the specified Oracle server, do the following:

1. Launch the Publish wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target Oracle server.

5. Specify Oracle settings.

319 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Publish Wizard
To launch the P ub lish wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select P ub lish Database > P ublish to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select P ub lish database > P ub lish to a nother server.

320 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to publish your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Oracle server. For more
information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

321 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to publish your database.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

322 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Oracle Server
At this step of the wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle server. The set of
connection settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, select either of the following options:

o Use current account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using the account under
which Veeam Explorer for Oracle is running.

You cannot use this option if Veeam Explorer for Oracle and mount server are located on separate
machines.

o Use the following account. Select this option to connect to the specified server using a custom user
account. Then provide a user name and password for the account.

For more information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

Linux-Based Oracle Server

For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

323 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

5. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root permissions on the target server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If the sudo command is not available or may fail on the target Linux server, you have an option to use
the su command instead. To enable the su command, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check
box and enter the password for the root account in the Root p assword field.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

324 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Oracle Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the location to which you want to restore the database.

• Select Restore to the original location to publish the database to the original location.

• Select Restore to a different location to publish the database to a custom location.

a. In the Oracle home field, specify the Oracle home directory. To locate the Oracle home directory, click
Browse and select the folder you want to use.

b. In the Global database name field, specify the global database name as DB_NAME.DB_DOMAIN,
where:

▪ DB_NAME is the database name. Oracle limits the length of the database name to 8 characters.
If the database name you specify exceeds this limit, Veeam Explorer for Oracle will
automatically shorten the database name, and hence the global database name, during the
publishing process.

The value you specify is also used for the unique database name ( DB_UNIQUE_NAME ) of the
published database. The unique database name can contain up to 30 characters.

▪ DB_DOMAIN is the domain name of the database. It does not count towards any character limits
and Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not shorten it during the publishing process.

For example, if you specify the global database name as orcl_published.tech.local , Veeam Explorer for
Oracle will shorten it to orcl_pub.tech.local. The database name of the published database will be
orcl_pub , while the unique database name of the published database will be orcl_published.

c. In the Ora cle SID field, specify the database system identifier. The Ora cle SID field is automatically
filled with the value entered in the Global database name field, but you can also assign a different
value.

The maximum length of the Oracle SID is 12 characters and it can only contain alphanumeric
characters (a-z, A-Z and 0-9).

After you complete this step, a new P ub lished databases node appears at the top of the navigation pane in
Veeam Explorer for Oracle. Under this node you can find the databases that have been published during the
current session.

325 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

If the account specified in Specify Target Oracle Server is not the Oracle home user, you will be asked to
provide a password to access the target Oracle home. Applicable to Oracle 12c and later versions.

326 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publishing Latest or Point-in-Time State
After you have launched a publishing operation to an Oracle server (as described in Publishing to Specified
Server), you can quickly republish a state of the Oracle database to the same server.

You can republish either of the following states:

• The latest available state — to publish data as of the latest state in the backup file.

• A point-in-time state — to publish data as of the selected point-in-time state. This option is available only
if backups of Oracle archived logs exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

When you unpublish a database, both options remain available until you close the application so that you can
quickly republish the database if required.

Publishing Latest State

Veeam Explorer for Oracle allows you to republish an unpublished database anew. When republishing a
database, it will be attached to the target Oracle server as of the latest available state .

To republish a database as of the latest state, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select P ub lish Database > P ublish latest state to < target_server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select P ub lish database > P ub lish latest state to
< ta rget_server>.

NOTE

The name of the publish option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as P ub lish latest
sta te to <target_server>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as P ub lish state of
< p oint_in_time> to <target_server>.

327 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Once completed, the database will be published with the same name as it was during the initial publishing
session.

Publishing Point-in-Time State

Publishing a point-in-time state allows you to load a required database state and unroll specified transactions if
needed.

To publish a database as of the point-in-time state, do the following:

1. Launch the Publish wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

328 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Publish Wizard
To launch the P ub lish wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select P ub lish Database > P ublish point-in-time state to < server_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select P ub lish database > P ub lish point-in-time state to
< server_name>.

Once completed, the database will be published with the same name as it was during the initial publishing
session.

329 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to publish your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Oracle server. For more
information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

330 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to publish your database and click
P ub lish.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

331 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting as RMAN Backup
Once published, the database can be exported as an RMAN backup so that you can save the changes you may
have made on the target server. For example, after publishing a database, you may have added a column or
altered some values. To save these modifications before you unpublish the database, you can use the export
feature.

When exporting published databases, you do not need a staging server. The RMAN backup is saved directly to
the server onto which the database is published. Then, the RMAN backup is sent to the specified path on the
machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

To export a published database, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lished databases node, select a published database.

2. On the P ub lish tab, select E x port as RMAN backup or right-click a published database and select E x port as
RMAN backup.

3. In the E x port wizard, in the E x port path field, specify the location to which you want to export database
files.

If the folder you are specifying does not exist, it will be created.

4. In the File name format field, specify the format according to which your files will be named after the
export.

For more information, see this Oracle article.

5. In the Ta g to label output file with field, specify a new tag name.

6. To compress files using native Oracle compression, select the E na ble native compression check box.

7. In the Cha nnels number numeric field, specify the number of channels to be used when retrieving Oracle
databases from the backup.

8. Click E x port.

332 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Unpublishing Databases
Once you are finished working with published databases, you may want to unpublish (detach) these databases
from the target Oracle server.

Detachment occurs in the following manner:

• Upon closing the Veeam Explorer for Oracle console, all published databases will be detached from the
target Oracle server automatically. Mount points will be also dismounted from under the C:\VeeamFLR
directory for Windows-based servers and the /tmp directory for Linux-based servers.

• On manual unpublishing, databases will be detached at once but the restore point will remain mounted on
the target server for the next 15 minutes.

To unpublish a database manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lished databases node, select a published database.

2. On the P ub lish tab, select Unp ublish Database.

Alternatively, in the navigation pane, right-click a published database and select Unp ublish.

To detach more than one published database simultaneously, right-click the root P ub lished databases node and
select Unp ublish databases or select the root P ub lished databases node and click Unp ublish Databases on the
P ub lish tab.

333 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Refreshing Database Status
While databases are attached to the target Oracle server, Veeam Explorer for Oracle synchronizes each
published database state to verify its availability. By default, synchronization occurs every 5 seconds.

If something went wrong with any of the published databases, the question mark appears next to each of such
databases indicating the database unavailability. In the Da tabase Info section, you will also see the notification
message describing the problem.

To refresh a published database state manually, in the navigation pane, under the P ub lished databases node,
right-click a published database and select Refresh status.

334 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery
Instant recovery combines capabilities of the data restore and data publishing features. If you want the d atabase
to be online as quickly as possible, you can use the Instant Recovery option and restore it in the background.

Before performing instant recovery, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

335 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Instant Recovery Works
To perform instant recovery, Veeam Explorer for Oracle uses the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on
the mount server associated with the backup repository. This removes the necessity to keep Veeam Explorer for
Oracle open during an entire instant recovery session. Once the instant recovery session is started, you can close
Veeam Explorer for Oracle and then open it later when necessary.

As you complete the steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Oracle performs a series of
validations. For example, it tests the connection to the target server and, starting from
Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, it also validates the SSH fingerprints of Linux machines.

After you complete the steps of the wizard, instant recovery of Oracle database s works in the following manner:

1. To start the instant recovery process, Veeam Explorer for Oracle sends an instant recovery command to
the Veeam Mount Service . The service runs on the mount server associated with the backup repository.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service connects to the target server and performs a series of validations.
For example, it checks if the target server has enough available memory for the published and the
recovered database.

Some aspects of the validation process vary depending on the operating system of the Oracle machine.

o For Windows machines, Veeam Explorers Recovery Service deploys Veeam Oracle Restore Service
non-persistent runtime components on the target server, and if you recover your data up to a specific
transaction, on the staging server. Two runtime components are deployed for each database that is
being recovered. These runtime components check the valid rights assignments required for database
recovery, get information about the databases, and later perform required file operations including
database and transaction logs copy.

The Veeam Oracle Restore Service runtime components are removed from the target and the staging
server when you perform switchover or cancel the instant recovery session.

o For Linux machines, Veeam Explorers Recovery Service performs the necessary validations without
deploying non-persistent runtime components.

4. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service sends a request to the Veeam Mount Service to connect to the
backup repository and initiate the mounting operation.

5. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system from the backup repository to the target
Oracle machine. Mounting is done to the C:\VeeamFLR directory for Windows machines or the /tmp
directory for Linux machines. For more information, see How Mounting Works. The Veeam Explorers
Recovery Service then starts the instance from the mounted file system.

6. Once the published database is online, the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service copies the database to the
target Oracle server. The recovered database is continuously synchronized with the changes on the
published instance, using archived redo logs.

All changes to the published database are saved in the instant recovery write cache, whose location
depends on the operating system of the Oracle machine.

o For Windows machines, the instant recovery write cache is stored on the mount server. You can view
and change the write cache location in the mount server settings. For more information, see the
Specify Mount Server Settings section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

o For Linux machines, the instant recovery write cache is stored in the /var/tmp folder on the target
server.

336 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After synchronization, you can switch over to the recovered database. For more information about the available
switchover options, see Switchover.

During switchover, the Veeam Oracle Restore Service (for Windows machines) or the Veeam Explorers Recovery
Service (for Linux machines) does the following:

1. Stops the published database.

2. Uses redo logs to synchronize the remaining differences between the published database and the
recovered database.

3. Drops the published database.

4. Starts the recovered database.

The instant recovery session is resilient to network disruptions, backup server or mount server crashes. If
anything disrupts the recovery process, the recovery process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10
automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail, you can launch retry after the server or network is up.

337 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery of Single Database
You can use Veeam Explorer for Oracle to perform instant recovery to the original server or t o any other server
in your network where Oracle Database is installed.

To instantly recover an Oracle database, follow one of these scenarios:

• Instant Recovery of Latest State

• Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

• Instant Recovery to Another Server

Instant Recovery of Latest State

To perform instant recovery of a database to its latest state on the backup file, perform the following steps:

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify switchover settings.

3. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

338 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant Recovery of the latest state to <original_location> .

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the instant recovery option depends on the restore point you select during the application
item restore process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant recovery of the state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

339 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the database switchover option.

To select a switchover option and start the instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all database f iles are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts publishing the database on the target server.

340 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

To perform instant recovery of a database to a selected point-in-time state, perform the following steps:

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify switchover settings.

5. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

341 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of point-in-time state to <original
server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of p oint-in-time
sta te to <original server>.

342 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
This option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required Job
Settings.

a. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

b. If you want to load database files exactly as of the moment before undesired transactions, select the
P erform restore to the specific transaction check box. Note that this option requires a staging Oracle
server. For more information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

343 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore the database.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

344 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify database switchover options.

To select a switchover option and start the instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts publishing the database on the target serv er.

345 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery to Another Server

To perform instant recovery of a database to another server, perform the following steps:

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target Oracle server.

5. Specify Oracle settings.

6. Specify database files location.

7. Specify switchover settings.

8. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

346 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant Recovery to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

347 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore the database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

a. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

b. If you want to load database files exactly as of the moment before undesired transactions, select the
P erform restore to the specific transaction check box. Note that this option requires a staging Oracle
server. For more information, see Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

348 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to restore the database.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

349 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Oracle Server
At this step of the wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle server. The set of
connection settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, enter credentials to connect to the target Oracle server.

For more information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

Linux-Based Oracle Server

For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

5. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root permissions on the target server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

350 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If the sudo command is not available or may fail on the target Linux server, you have an option to use
the su command instead. To enable the su command, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check
box and enter the password for the root account in the Root p assword field.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

351 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Oracle Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the location to which you want to restore the database.

• Select Restore to the original location to restore the database back to the original location.

• Select Restore to a different location to restore the database to a custom location.

a. In the Ora cle home field, specify the Oracle home directory. To locate the Oracle home directory, click
Browse and select the folder you want to use.

b. In the Global database name field, specify the global database name as DB_NAME.DB_DOMAIN,
where:

▪ DB_NAME is the database name. Oracle limits the length of the database name to 8 characters.
If the database name you specify exceeds this limit, Veeam Explorer for Oracle will
automatically shorten the database name, and hence the global database name, during the
publishing process.

The value you specify is also used for the unique database name ( DB_UNIQUE_NAME ) of the
published database. The unique database name can contain up to 30 characters.

▪ DB_DOMAIN is the domain name of the database. It does not count towards any character limits
and Veeam Explorer for Oracle does not shorten it during the publishing process.

For example, if you specify the global database name as orcl_published.tech.local , Veeam Explorer for
Oracle will shorten it to orcl_pub.tech.local. The database name of the published database will be
orcl_pub , while the unique database name of the published database will be orcl_published.

c. In the Ora cle SID field, specify the database system identifier. The Ora cle SID field is automatically
filled with the value entered in the Global database name field, but you can also assign a different
value.

The maximum length of the Oracle SID is 12 characters and it can only contain alphanumeric
characters (a-z, A-Z and 0-9).

352 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

If the account specified in Specify Target Oracle Server is not the Oracle home user, you will be asked to
provide a password to access the target Oracle home. Applicable to Oracle 12c and later versions.

353 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Database File Location
At this step of the wizard, specify the location for database files (control files, data files, log files and temp
files).

To edit the path, click the path row and provide the location you want to use. If specified folders do not exi st,
Veeam Explorer for Oracle will create these folders.

354 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify database switchover options.

To select a switchover option and start the instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all data base files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts publishing the database on the target server.

355 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 8. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

356 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery of Multiple Databases
You can use Veeam Explorer for Oracle to perform instant recovery of multiple databases hosted on an Oracle
server. You can perform instant recovery to the original server or to any other server in your network where
Oracle Database is installed.

To instantly recover an Oracle database, follow one of these scenarios:

• Instant Recovery of Latest State

• Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

• Instant Recovery to Another Server

Instant Recovery of Latest State

To perform instant recovery of multiple Oracle databases to their latest state on the backup file, perform the
following steps:

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify switchover settings.

3. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

357 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To perform instant recovery of multiple databases to the latest state, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the Oracle server or an Oracle home.

2. On the Server or Oracle Home tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant Recovery of the latest state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Oracle server or an Oracle home and select Instant Recovery > Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the instant recovery option depends on the restore point you select during the application
item restore process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is disp layed as Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant recovery of the state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

358 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the database switchover option.

To select a switchover option and start the instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop-down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts publishing the databases on the target server.

359 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

To perform instant recovery of multiple Oracle databases to a selected point-in-time state, perform the
following steps:

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify switchover settings.

4. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

360 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the Oracle server or an Oracle home.

2. On the Server or Oracle Home tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of point-in-time state to
< original server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Oracle server or an Oracle home and select Instant recovery > Instant
recovery of p oint-in-time state to <original server>.

361 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

362 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify database switchover options.

To select a switchover option and start the instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts publishing the database on the target server.

363 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

Instant Recovery to Another Server

To perform instant recovery of multiple Oracle databases to another server, perform the following steps:

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify the target server.

4. Specify Oracle settings.

5. Specify switchover settings.

6. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

364 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the Oracle server or an Oracle home.

2. On the Server or Ora cle Home tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant Recovery to a nother server.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Oracle server or an Oracle home and select Instant recovery > Instant
recovery to another server.

365 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the Instant Recovery wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Note that this option is available only if archived log backups exist. For more information, see Required
Job Settings.

Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

366 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
The Sp ecify Target Server step of the wizard is available if you select the instant recovery to another server
option.

At this step, specify connection settings required to access the target Oracle server. The set of connection
settings depends on the OS type of the target server: Windows or Linux.

Windows-Based Oracle Server

For a Windows-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server name field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect section, enter credentials to connect to the target Oracle server.

For more information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

Linux-Based Oracle Server

For a Linux-based Oracle server, do the following:

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target Oracle server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number of the selected Oracle server.

3. In the Account field, specify an account under which to connect to the specified server. For more
information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

4. In the P a ssword field, enter the password.

367 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 5. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root permissions on the target server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If the sudo command is not available or may fail on the target Linux server, you have an option to use
the su command instead. To enable the su command, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check
box and enter the password for the root account in the Root p assword field.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a key.

To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

368 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Oracle Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the location to which you want to restore the database.

• Select Restore to the original location to restore the database back to the original location.

• Select Restore to a different location to restore the database to a custom location. To locate the Oracle
home directory, click Browse and select the folder you want to use.

NOTE

If the account specified in Specify Target Oracle Server is not the Oracle home user, you will be asked to
provide a password to access the target Oracle home. Applicable to Oracle 12c and later versions.

369 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify database switchover options.

To select a switchover option and start the instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all database files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by user at any time after all database files are copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Recover.

After you click Recover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts publishing the database on the target server.

370 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

371 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Switchover
The switchover option becomes available after the published database is fully copied to the target server.
During switchover, the published database is switched to its full copy on the target server. Note that if you have
selected to restore to the original server, the restored database will replace the original database.

Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in on of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

During switchover, Veeam Explorer for Oracle performs the following operations:

1. Detaches the published database from the Oracle server.

2. Uses archived redo logs to synchronize changes between the published database and the recovered
database.

3. Drops the published database.

4. Starts the recovered database.

Auto Switchover
The Auto switchover option ensures minimal period of downtime.

As soon as the published database is fully copied to the target server, Veeam Explorer for Oracle uses archived
redo logs to find differences between the published database and the recovered database. Depending on the
size of differences in archived redo logs, the following happens:

• If the size of differences in archived redo logs is smaller than 10 MB, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts the
switchover process. In this case, the databases are synchronized during switchover.

• If the size of differences in archived redo logs is larger than 10 MB, Veeam Explorer for Oracle uses redo
logs to synchronize the changes.

After synchronizations, Veeam Explorer for Oracle checks the size of differences in archived redo logs
once again. If the size is smaller than 10 MB, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts the switchover process. If
the size is larger than 10 MB again, another cycle of synchronization is performed. Synchronization is
relaunched until the size of differences in logs is smaller than 10 MB.

Scheduled Switchover
As soon as the published database is fully copied to the target server, Veeam Explorer for Oracle uses archived
redo logs to find differences between the published database and the recovered databas e. Veeam Explorer for
Oracle checks the size of differences every minute. If the size is larger than 10 MB or it has been 5 minutes since
the last synchronization, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts to synchronize the changes between the published
database and the recovered database.

After synchronization is finished, Veeam Explorer for Oracle waits for the scheduled date and time to start
switchover.

If the synchronization process is still ongoing at the scheduled date and time, switchover starts only after the
synchronization is finished.

372 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Manual Switchover
As soon as the published database is fully copied to the target server, Veeam Explorer for Oracle uses archived
redo logs to find differences between the published database and the recovered database. Veea m Explorer for
Oracle checks the size of differences every minute. If the size is larger than 10 MB or it has been 5 minutes since
the last synchronization, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts to synchronize the changes between the published
database and the recovered database.

After synchronization is finished, you can launch switchover manually. For details, see Starting Switchover
Manually.

If you launch switchover during the synchronization process, switchover starts only afte r the synchronization is
finished.

Starting Switchover Manually

If you have selected the Manual switchover option in the Instant Recovery wizard, you can start the switchover
process at any time if the database is in the Ready to switchover state.

To start switchover manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select Switchover Now.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Switchover now.

373 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for Oracle starts an instant recovery
session which shows the progress of the recovery process.

Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

NOTE

The instant recovery session closes automatically after switchover.

Also, in the Instant Recovery session view, you can do the following:

• Edit switchover settings.

• Retry instant recovery (in case instant recovery session fails for any reason).

• Cancel instant recovery.

Editing Instant Recovery Settings

If you have started an instant recovery session and want to change switchover settings, you can edit instant
recovery settings.

374 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To change switchover settings of an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select E d it or right-click the database or instance and select E d it.

3. Change the switchover option and click Ap p ly.

375 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Retrying Instant Recovery
If anything disrupts the recovery process (the target or mount server crashes or the network is down), the
recovery process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail,
you can launch the retry manually after the server or network is up.

To start the retry process manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select the database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, click Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Retry.

Canceling Instant Recovery

If you have finished working with the published database and you do not want to switch over to it, you can
cancel the instant recovery session.

You can do this by canceling instant recovery in either Veeam Explorer for Oracle or the
Veeam Backup & Replication console.

NOTE

Consider the following:

• Closing either the Veeam Explorer for Oracle window or the Veeam Backup & Replication console
does not cancel the instant recovery session.
• You do not need to cancel the instant recovery session if switchover is already performed. The
session closes automatically after switchover.

376 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Canceling Instant Recovery in Veeam Explorer for Oracle
To cancel the instant recovery session in Veeam Explorer for Oracle, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Ca ncel.

Canceling Instant Recovery in Veeam Backup & Replication

Console
To cancel the instant recovery session in the Veeam Backup & Replication console, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Backup & Replication console, open the Home view.

2. In the navigation pane, select Instant Database Recovery.

377 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the preview pane, select the session and in the Instant Database Recovery tab click Stop Publishing.

Alternatively, you can right-click the session and click Stop p ublishing.

378 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
This section explains how to export Oracle data using Veeam Explorer for Oracle.

NOTE

To export Oracle databases you need to configure a staging server. This is not necessary only when you
export database files from a backup of a Windows-based Oracle machine. For more information, see
Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

379 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Export Works
Veeam Explorer for Oracle allows you to export Oracle databases to the machine where the
Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed. You can export your data as RMAN backups and as database
files.

Export as RMAN Backup

Exporting Oracle databases as RMAN backups with Veeam Explorer for Oracle works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Oracle connects to the Veeam Mount Service and the staging server and performs a
series of validations. For example, it checks if the staging server has enough free space for the staged
RMAN backup.

Some aspects of the validation process vary depending on the operating system of the Oracle machine .

o For Windows machines, Veeam Explorer for Oracle deploys the Veeam Oracle Restore Service on the
staging server. This non-persistent runtime component checks the valid rights assignments required
for export, gets information about the databases, and later performs required file operations. The
Veeam Oracle Restore Service is removed from the staging server once the export process is
completed.

o For Linux machines, Veeam Explorer for Oracle performs the necessary validations without deploying
a non-persistent runtime component. In addition, starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1,
Veeam Explorer for Oracle validates the SSH fingerprints of the staging server.

2. Veeam Explorer for Oracle sends an export command to the Veeam Mount Service running on the mount
server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup repository and prepares
the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the staging Oracle server. Mounting is done
to the C:\VeeamFLR directory for Windows machines or the /tmp directory for Linux machines. For more
information, see How Mounting Works.

4. On the staging Oracle server, Veeam Oracle Restore Service (for Windows machines) or Veeam Explorer
for Oracle itself (for Linux machines) uses native Oracle RMAN functionality to create a backup of the
database. The backup is saved to the C:\Windows\TEMP directory for Windows machines or to the
/var/tmp directory for Linux machines.

5. The Veeam Oracle Restore Service (for Windows machines) or Veeam Explorer for Oracle itself (for Linux
machines) sends the staged RMAN backup to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console
is installed. Data transfer is established by data movers running on the staging server and the target
machine.

380 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After the export operation successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for Oracle unmounts the mounted file
system and removes the RMAN backup from the staging server.

Export Database Files

Exporting database files with Veeam Explorer for Oracle relies on different processes and infrastructure
components depending on the operating system of the Oracle machine.

Exporting Database Files for Windows Machines

Exporting database files from a backup of a Windows machine with Oracle works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Oracle connects to the Veeam Mount Service running on the mount server associated
with the backup repository.

2. Veeam Explorer for Oracle sends an export command to the Veeam Mount Service . The service connects
to the backup repository and prepares the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the C:\VeeamFLR directory of the
machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed. For more information, see How
Mounting Works.

381 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 4. Veeam Explorer for Oracle saves database files and archived redo logs from the mounted file system to
the native file system of the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

After the export process successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for Oracle unmounts the mounted file
system.

Exporting Database Files for Linux Machines

Exporting database files from a backup of a Linux machine with Oracle works in the following manner:

1. Veeam Explorer for Oracle connects to the Veeam Mount Service and the staging server and performs a
series of validations. For example, it checks if the target machine has enough free space for the exported
files.

2. Veeam Explorer for Oracle sends an export command to the Veeam Mount Service running on the mount
server associated with the backup repository. The service connects to the backup repository and prepares
the mounting operation.

3. The Veeam Mount Service mounts the necessary file system to the /tmp directory of the staging Oracle
server. For more information, see How Mounting Works.

382 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 4. Veeam Explorer for Oracle transfers database files and archived redo logs from the mounted file system to
the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed. Data transfer is established by
data movers running on the staging server and the target machine.

After the export process successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for Oracle unmounts the mounted file
system from the staging server.

383 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Export as RMAN Backup
In Veeam Explorer for Oracle, you can export Oracle databases as RMAN backups to the machine where the
Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

Exporting Latest State

To export data as of the latest available state to the default location, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port as RMAN backup > Export latest state to Desktop \<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port as RMAN backup > E x port latest state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

NOTE

The name of the export option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port latest
sta te to Desktop\<db_name>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port state of <point_in_time>
to Desktop\<db_name>.

Consider that Veeam Explorer for Oracle exports files in the following format: _%I_%d_%T_%U. For more
information, see this Oracle article. To set a different export format, use Exporting to Custom Location.

384 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Point-in-Time State
To export data as of the point-in-time state to the default location, do the following:

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

385 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard
To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port as RMAN backup > E xport point-in-time state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port as RMAN backup > E x port point-in-time state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

Consider that Veeam Explorer for Oracle exports files in the following format: _%I_%d_%T_%U. For more
information, see this Oracle article. To set a different export format, use Exporting to Custom Location.

386 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

387 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export data and click E x port.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

Exporting to Custom Location

To export a database to a custom location, do the following:

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target location.

388 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard
To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port as RMAN backup > E xport to a different location.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port as RMAN backup > E x port to a different location.

389 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

390 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export data.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

391 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Location
At this step of the wizard, do the following:

1. In the E x port path field, specify the location on the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed to which you want to export database files.

If the folder you are specifying does not exist, it will be created.

2. In the File name format field, specify the format according to which your files will be named after the
export.

For more information, see this Oracle article.

3. In the Ta g to label output file with field, specify a new tag name.

4. To compress files using native Oracle compression, select the E na ble native compression check box.

5. In the Cha nnels number numeric field, specify the number of channels to be used when retrieving Oracle
databases from the backup.

6. Click E x port.

392 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Export Database Files
This section explains how to export Oracle databases to the machine where the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed.

Exporting Latest State

To export data as of the latest available state to the default location, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Database Files > E xport latest state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port database files > E x port latest state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

NOTE

The name of the export option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as E x port latest
sta te to Desktop\<db_name>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displa yed as E x port state of <point_in_time>
to Desktop\<db_name>.

Exporting Point-in-Time State

This section explains how to export data as of a point-in-time state to the default location.

393 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To export data as of a point-in-time state, do the following:

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

394 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard
To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Database Files > E xport point-in-time state to Desktop\<db_name>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port database files > E x port point-in-time state to
Desktop\<db_name>.

395 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Oracle server even if you are
exporting database files from backups of Windows machines with Oracle. For more information, see
Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

396 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export data and click E x port.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

Exporting to Custom Location

This section explains how to export a database to a custom location.

To export a database to a custom location, do the following:

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Fine-tune the restore point.

4. Specify the target location.

397 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard
To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select E x port Database Files > E xport to a different location.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port database files > E x port to a d ifferent location.

398 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to restore your database:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to load database files as of the selected point in time.
Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

• Select the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box to load database files exactly as of the
moment before undesired transactions.

NOTE

The P erform restore to the specific transaction option requires a staging Oracle server even if you are
exporting database files from backups of Windows machines with Oracle. For more information, see
Configuring Staging Oracle Server.

399 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Fine-Tune Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select an operation prior to which you want to export data.

NOTE

This step is available only if you have selected the P erform restore to the specific transaction check box at
the Specify Restore Point step of the wizard.

400 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Location
At this step of the wizard, in the E x port path field, specify the location to which you want to export database
files.

401 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Oracle, you can visit Veeam R&D Forums or submit a
support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Enabling Extended Logging.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

402 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL
Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL allows you to restore, publish, instantly recover PostgreSQL instances and
export PostgreSQL databases from restore points created by Veeam Backup & Replication. Veeam Explorer for
PostgreSQL supports data recovery from backups, snapshot replicas, CDP replicas, or storage snapshots.

NOTE
Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can instantly recover PostgreSQL instances, export
PostgreSQL databases, and recover your data from CDP replicas.

403 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
Before you start using Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL to restore your data, consider the following requirements
and limitations.

404 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL.

Comp onent Requirement

P ostgreSQL on Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL supports restore of the following PostgreSQL versions
Linux on Linux machines:

• PostgreSQL 16
• PostgreSQL 15
• PostgreSQL 14
• PostgreSQL 13
• PostgreSQL 12

405 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following tables list network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

Backup

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server Source Linux TCP 6162 Default port used by Linux Management
machine with Agent.
PostgreSQL

TCP 22 Default SSH port used as a control

channel (without Linux Management
Agent).

TCP 2500 to For W AL files shipping

3300
Default range of ports used for managing
data transfer over the network.

Log shipping server is used in case the

direct connection to the backup
repository is not possible. For more
information, see the Log Shipping Servers
section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

Source Linux Log shipping TCP 2500 to For W AL files shipping

machine with server, 3300
PostgreSQL backup Default range of ports used for managing
repository data transfer over the network.

Log shipping server is used in case the

direct connection to the backup
repository is not possible. For more
information, see the Log Shipping Servers
section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

Restore

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server, Mount TCP 6170 Port used for connections to the
Veeam Backup & Replication server mount service.
console

406 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup repository Target TCP 2500 to Default range of ports used for
Linux 3300 managing data transfer during restore
machine to the original (remote) machine or
with another Linux machine with
PostgreSQL PostgreSQL.

Target Linux machine with Backup TCP 2500 to Default range of ports used for
PostgreSQL repository 3300 managing data transfer during restore
to the original (remote) machine or
another Linux machine with
PostgreSQL.

Mount server Target TCP 22 Default SSH port used as a control

Linux channel.
machine
with
PostgreSQL

407 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL and
recover PostgreSQL data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for The account used to run Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL must meet the following
P ostgreSQL launch requirements:
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore
Operator role on the backup server.

Restore, Publish, The account used for PostgreSQL data recovery must be a Linux user with root
Instant Recovery privileges on the target machine. Root privileges are required to mount the backed -up
file system to the target server and to communicate with PostgreSQL.

E x port When you export data to the local host where the Veeam Backup & Replication console
is installed, the account under which Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL runs must be a
member of the local Administrators group.

Note that when you export data to a Linux server, the account used to connect to the
target server can be a Linux user without root or elevated privileges.

408 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
This requirement applies to backup jobs, replication jobs, and CDP policies created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

When you create a job or CDP policy, make sure to enable application-aware processing in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console:

• When you configure a backup job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Backup Job wizard.

• When you configure a replication job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Replication Job wizard.

• When you configure a CDP policy, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the New
CDP Policy wizard.

Note that when you create storage snapshots, application-aware processing is automatically enabled. For more
information, see the Application Item Restore from Storage Snapshots section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

409 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and known limitations of Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL.

General
• High availability cluster configurations and replication setups of PostgreSQL servers are not supported.

• Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL does not support recovery operations over VIX API or vSphere Automation
API.

• Recovery of databases that reside in an encrypted file system on the source machine is not supported. In
particular, encrypted LVM volumes are not supported.

• You can recover PostgreSQL data over SSH only, restore using Linux Management Agent is not supported.

• With Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL, you can only recover PostgreSQL data from backups of powered -on
machines and from instances that were running at the time of backup.

• Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of PostgreSQL instances or databases to a
point-in-time state require backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log (WAL) files. To allow
Veeam Backup & Replication to create PostgreSQL WAL file backups, PostgreSQL instances must have the
replica wal_level setting or higher. The minimal wal_level setting does not write information about
database transactions and it allows you to create a crash-consistent backup only.

• Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of PostgreSQL data from replicas can only
recover your data to the latest state of the selected restore point. Replication jobs do not copy
PostgreSQL write ahead log (WAL) files so data recovery to a point-in-time state is not supported.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL supports data recovery
from CDP replicas. Consider the following limitations:

o Restore, publishing, instant recovery, and export operations of PostgreSQL data from CDP replicas
can only recover your data to the latest state of the selected long -term restore point. CDP policies do
not copy PostgreSQL write ahead log (WAL) files so data recovery to a point-in-time state is not
supported.

o When you recover your data from CDP replicas, you can only use long -term (both application-
consistent and crash-consistent) restore points. Short-term restore points are not supported.

o You can recover your data from a CDP replica if its CDP policy is currently running. During recovery,
the CDP policy does not create new long-term restore points and does not delete existing ones.
Short-term restore points are still created.

o You cannot restore application items from a CDP replica in parallel with guest OS file restore,
SureReplica, and failover.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL supports SSH fingerprint
validation of Linux machines used as target and staging servers. For more information on how to configure
this feature, see the Linux Hosts Authentication section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

If you have selected the more secure, manual validation in the Veeam Backup & Replication console,
consider the following:

o If the target server is unknown or its fingerprint cannot be recognized, you will be able to proceed
with the recovery operation after you manually validate the fingerprint in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console.

410 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o The validation process matches the fingerprint only with the network identifier of the Linux machine
(its IPv4 address, IPv6 address, FQDN, or hostname) used in the respective Veeam Explorer for
PostgreSQL session. If you use 2 different network identifiers of the same unverified server in 2
recovery sessions (for example, its IPv4 address in one recovery session and its hostname in another),
you will need to perform 2 separate fingerprint validations. No further validations are necessary if you
reuse a validated network identifier in another recovery session.

• In PostgreSQL 15 and earlier, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL does not support configuration sub -files that
are specified in the include, include_dir and include_if_exist options in the postgresql.conf
file. All PostgreSQL configurations, instance ports in particular, must be specified in a single
postgresql.conf file.

Starting from PostgreSQL 16, the pg_hba.conf and pg_ident.conf files can also have configuration
sub-files, specified in the include, include_dir and include_if_exist options. Veeam Explorer for
PostgreSQL does not support these configuration sub -files either, so make sure that in PostgreSQL 16 all
configurations are specified only in the postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf and pg_ident.conf files.

• The en_US.utf8 locale must be installed on the target server. The locale is also required on the staging
server for export operations.

• Interactive login scripts configured on the target server (and staging server for export operations) may
interrupt the recovery process. To prevent data recovery from failure, disable the scripts.

• [For Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1 or later] If the pg_ctl utility is located in a custom directory on the
target server (and staging server for export operations), Veeam Explore r for PostgreSQL may not find the
utility. In this case, go to the %ProgramData%\Veeam\Backup\ExplorerStandByService\ directory
on the mount server. If a configuration file named Config.xml does not exist in this directory, create this
file.

In the configuration file, enter the following XML code:

<Veeam>
<PostgreSqlExplorer>
<PostgreSQL PostgreSqlBinariesDirectory="<path>" />
</PostgreSqlExplorer>
</Veeam>

where <path> is the path to the directory that contains the pg_ctl utility. For example, the path can be
/directory_name/postgres/postgres-14.10.0/bin. To finish the configuration, save the
Config.xml file and restart the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service on the same server.

Restore, Publishing and Instant Recovery

• Mount of Btrfs and ZFS disks will fail if you perform instant recovery, data restore or data publish
operations to the original server. The issue occurs due to a restriction for mounting 2 Btrfs or ZFS disks
with identical IDs to the same machine (the disks have the same IDs on the backup and the original
server).

• With Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL, you can restore, instantly recover and publish entire PostgreSQL
instances; restore, instant recovery and publishing of individual databases is not supported.

• PostgreSQL on the target machine and on the backed-up machine must be of the same major version. For
example, you can restore a PostgreSQL instance based on PostgreSQL 15.1 to a machine with PostgreSQL
15.3.

• Before you restore, instantly recover, or publish an PostgreSQL instance to another server, make sure
PostgreSQL is installed on the target machine.

411 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • [For restore and instant recovery] If you specify another data directory for the recovered PostgreSQL
instance, services will not be created automatically (including systemd).

• [For restore and instant recovery on Debian and Ubuntu] When you restore a PostgreSQL instance to a
new data directory, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL saves PostgreSQL configuration files to the specified
data directory (not to the /etc/postgresql directory). In this case, you will not be able to discover the
recovered PostgreSQL instance with the pg_lsclusters utility.

• [For publishing and instant recovery] Make sure that the volume with the write cache has enough free disk
space to store the changes of the published database. The write cache is stored in the /var/tmp folder on
the target server.

Export
• Exporting multiple databases one by one may cause performance issues — do so only if you need to
restore each database to a different point-in-time state. To export up to a 1000 databases in parallel,
start the export sessions from a published PostgreSQL instance (the only option if you use PowerShell), a
backed-up PostgreSQL instance, or from the backed-up PostgreSQL server.

• You cannot export databases whose pg_database system catalog has the datallowconn parameter set
to false. This setting prevents all connections to the database and causes export operations to fail. For
example, this is the case for the template0 database, that is used to create new databases — as a
template database, it must remain unchanged.

• PostgreSQL on the staging server and on the backed -up machine must be of the same major version. For
example, if PostgreSQL 15.1 is installed on the backed-up machine, the staging server can have
PostgreSQL 15.3.

• You can use pg_restore to reconstruct a database from a DUMP file exported with Veeam Explorer for
PostgreSQL. If a new database is created in the process and the database in the DUMP file has
tablespaces, you must manually create tablespaces with the same names as the ones in the DUMP file.
Note that the --no-tablespace argument of the pg_restore utility, which places the reconstructed
database in the default tablespace, is not supported for DUMP files exported with Veeam Explorer for
PostgreSQL. For more information, see Restoring Exported Database.

412 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL, you can use either of the following methods:

• Use the Restore application item option to load PostgreSQL data from a restore point created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

For more information, see the Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

• Go to Sta rt and click Veeam Explorer for P ostgreSQL if you want to, for example, manage ongoing data
recovery sessions or check the installed version of Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL. Note that this method
does not load any PostgreSQL data and does not allow you to start new data recovery sessions.

If you open Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of the backup server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform recovery operations, the user account used to run Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL
must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group on the machine where Veeam
Explorers Suite is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL is running, select Use Windows
session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

413 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
The user interface of Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL is designed to let you quickly find commands that you
need to restore PostgreSQL instances from backups.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to enable extended logging. For more information, see Enabling Extended
Logging.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL wizard or window. You will then be
redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains operation commands organized into logical groups represented as tabs.
The ribbon is displayed at the top of the main application window.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of folders with backed-up data.

414 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which allows you to view details about items that are contained in a folder you have
selected in the navigation pane.

415 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Mounting Works
To facilitate data transfer, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL uses mounting operations during data recovery.

Mounting is performed by the Veeam Mount Service component which is deployed on the mount server
associated with the backup repository. For more information, see the Mount Servers section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide. To mount a file system to the target machine, the Veeam Mount
Service uses FUSE.

During mounting, the Veeam Mount Service retrieves a file system from the backup repository, attaches it to the
hard drive of the target machine and creates a mount point. For restore, publishing and instant recovery,
mounting is performed from the backup repository to the target server, and in the case of export, from the
backup repository to the staging server.

416 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Viewing Instance Information
To view PostgreSQL instance information, select an instance in the navigation pane and review its properties in
the preview pane.

417 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
This section explains how to configure the required application settings and components in Veeam Explorer for
PostgreSQL.

418 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Configuring Staging PostgreSQL Server
To enable advanced recovery functionality, you can use a PostgreSQL machine as a staging server. A staging
server is required when exporting data, as described in Data Export.

The Linux machine used as a staging server can reside in the same domain as the machine hosting Veeam
Explorer for PostgreSQL, as well as in a trusted domain or untrusted domain.

To configure a staging server, do the following:

1. Go to the main menu and click General Options.

2. On the Staging Server tab, select the Use this helper PostgreSQL server for advanced recovery
functionality check box and do the following:

a. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or the IP address of the PostgreSQL server to which you
want to recover data.

b. In the SSH p ort field, specify the port number.

c. In the Account field, specify a user account under which to connect to the specified server.

d. In the P a ssword field, specify the password.

e. If the private key is required to connect to the selected server, do the following:

i. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

ii. In the P rivate key field, specify a key. To select a key, click Browse and select a key.

iii. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase.

3. If you specify data for a non-root account that does not have root permissions on a Linux server, click
Ad vanced to grant sudo rights to this account.

a. To provide a non-root user with root account privileges, select the E levate specified account to root
check box.

419 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file a utomatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. When registering a Linux server, you have an option to failover to using the su command for distros
where the sudo command is not available.

To enable the failover, select the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root p assword
field, enter the password for the root account

420 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Enabling Extended Logging
Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL allows you to enable an extended logging mode to collect logs that contain
more details on specific operations. After you enable extended logging, you can go back to the application and
perform the actions for which you want to collect additional information. Then you can collect the logs. For
more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

To enable extended logging, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. On the Ad vanced tab, select the E na ble extended logging check box and click OK.

421 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
You can restore a single PostgreSQL instance or multiple PostgreSQL instances at a time.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

422 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Restore Works
Restoring PostgreSQL instances with Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL works in the following manner:

1. To start the restore process, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL sends a restore command to the Veeam
Mount Service. The service runs on the mount server associated with the backup repository.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service connects to the target server. The service validates the permissions
of the selected user and checks if there is enough free space on the target server. The Veeam Explorers
Recovery Service sends a request to the Veeam Mount Service to connect to the backup repository and
initiate the mounting operation.

4. The Veeam Mount Service uses FUSE to mount the necessary file system from the backup repository to
the /tmp directory on the target PostgreSQL machine.

5. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service copies the data directory and WAL files from the mounted file
system to the native file system of the target machine. The service edits the postgresql.conf file with
the selected restore settings, starts the instance and reverts the postgresql.conf file to its previous
state.

The restore session is resilient to network disruption, backup server or mount server crashes. If anything
disrupts the publishing process (the target or mount server crashes, or the network is down), you can launch the
retry manually after the server or network is up.

After the restore operation successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL unmounts the mounted file
system and if necessary, performs the post-restore actions selected at the Specify Post-Restore Action step.

423 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Single Instance
You can restore a PostgreSQL instance by following one of the scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring to Another Server

Restoring Latest State

To restore the latest state of a PostgreSQL instance, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to restore.

2. On the Instance tab, select Restore Instance > Restore latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Restore instance > Restore latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the restore option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore latest
sta te to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

424 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Point-in-Time State
To restore a point-in-time state of a PostgreSQL instance, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

425 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to restore.

2. On the Instance tab, select Restore Instance > Restore point-in-time state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Restore Instance > Restore p oint-in-time state to
< original_location>.

426 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

Restoring to Another Server

You can restore a PostgreSQL instance to another server or to the same server but with different settings.

To restore a PostgreSQL instance, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify a target server.

4. Specify PostgreSQL settings.

5. Specify tablespaces.

6. Specify a post-restore action.

427 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to restore.

2. On the Instance tab, select Restore Instance > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Restore Instance > Restore to another server.

428 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

429 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target PostgreSQL server.

1. In the Server field, enter the DNS name or IP address of the target server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify an SSH port (by default, port 22 is used).

3. In the Account field, specify a Linux system account name under which to connect to the specified server.

4. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root privileges on the target server, click
Ad vanced:

a. Select the E levate specified account to root check box.

The account must have root privileges to mount the backed -up file system to the target server and to
communicate with PostgreSQL.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If you plan to use the account to connect to Linux servers where the sudo command is not available
or may fail, you have an option to use the su command instead. To enable the su command, select
the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root password field, enter the password for the
root account.

Veeam Backup & Replication will first try to use the sudo command. If the attempt fails,
Veeam Backup & Replication will use the su command.

5. In the P a ssword field, enter the account password.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a file that contains a private key.

To locate a file, click Browse and select a key.

430 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase used to decrypt the private key.

431 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify PostgreSQL Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the following PostgreSQL settings:

1. Specify a location to which you want to restore the PostgreSQL instance:

o Select Restore to the original location to restore the PostgreSQL instance to the original data
directory.

o Select Restore to a different location and specify a path in the Da ta directory path field to restore the
PostgreSQL instance to another directory. To locate a new directory, click Browse and select a folder
you want to use.

2. In the Instance port field, specify an instance port, which will also serve as an instance identifier. The port
must be free. If the specified port is occupied, the recovered PostgreSQL will be shut down.

To start the PostgreSQL instance manually, do the following:

a. Change the port number in the postgresql.conf file.

b. Launch the PostgreSQL instance with the pg_ctl command:

$ pg_ctl start -D <data_directory>

where <data_directory> is a data directory of the PostgreSQL instance.

For example:

$ pg_ctl start -D /var/lib/pgsql/13/data

NOTE

If the target data directory is not empty, you will be prompted to overwrite it before proceeding
to the next step.

432 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

433 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide
Step 5. Specify Tablespaces
At this step of the wizard, specify paths of directories where database tables will be stored.

NOTE

If any of the target tablespace directories are not empty, you will be prompted to overwrite them before
proceeding to the next step.

434 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Post-Restore Action
This step is available only if you have selected the Restore to a specific point in time option at the Specify
restore point step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, select one of the following post-restore actions that the PostgreSQL instance must
take after the instance is restored:

• Select P romote the PostgreSQL server to accept connections once recovery is finished to make the
PostgreSQL instance available for connections.

• Select P a use recovery process and keep the P ostgreSQL server in recovery mode to make the PostgreSQL
instance run but not accepting incoming remote TCP connections.

To resume the paused state, use the pg_wal_replay_resume() command:

psql -p <port> -c "SELECT pg_wal_replay_resume();"

where <port> is a port number of the PostgreSQL instance.

• Select Shut d own the P ostgreSQL server once recovery process is completed to make the PostgreSQL
instance stop upon recovery.

In this case, you will need to start the PostgreSQL instance manually:

a. Change or remove the recovery.signal configuration file.

b. Launch the PostgreSQL instance with the pg_ctl command:

$ pg_ctl start -D <data_directory>

where <data_directory> is a data directory of the PostgreSQL instance.

For example:

$ pg_ctl start -D /var/lib/pgsql/13/data

435 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Multiple Instances
You can restore multiple PostgreSQL instances by following one of the scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring to Another Server

Restoring Latest State

To restore the latest state of the PostgreSQL server, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the PostgreSQL server.

2. On the Server tab, select Restore Instances > Restore latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the server and select Restore instances > Restore latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the restore option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore latest
sta te to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Restore state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

436 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Point-in-Time State
To restore a point-in-time state of the PostgreSQL server, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

437 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to restore.

2. On the Server tab, select Restore Instances > Restore point-in-time state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Restore Instances > Restore point-in-time state to
< original_location>.

438 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

Restoring to Another Server

You can restore multiple PostgreSQL instances to another server or to the same server but with different
settings.

To restore PostgreSQL instances, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify a target server.

439 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the PostgreSQL server.

2. On the Server tab, select Restore Instances > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Restore Instances > Restore to another server.

440 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

441 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target PostgreSQL server.

1. In the Server field, enter the DNS name or IP address of the target server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify an SSH port (by default, port 22 is used).

3. In the Account field, specify a Linux system account name under which to connect to the specified server.

4. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root privileges on the target server, click
Ad vanced:

a. Select the E levate specified account to root check box.

The account must have root privileges to mount the backed -up file system to the target server and to
communicate with PostgreSQL.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If you plan to use the account to connect to Linux servers where the sudo command is not available
or may fail, you have an option to use the su command instead. To enable the su command, select
the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root password field, enter the password for the
root account.

Veeam Backup & Replication will first try to use the sudo command. If the attempt fails,
Veeam Backup & Replication will use the su command.

5. In the P a ssword field, enter the account password.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a file that contains a private key.

To locate a file, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase used to decrypt the private key.

442 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

When restoring multiple instances to another server, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL restores data to the
same data directories and tablespace directories as on the backup file. If any of the target data or
tablespace directories are not empty, you will be prompted to overwrite them before proceeding to the
next step.

443 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Restore Session
After you finish the steps of the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts a restore session for each
of the selected instances.

Under the Restore node in the upper part of the navigation pane, you can find the instances with an ongoing
restore process. Click an instance to get a more detailed overview of the progress of its restore session in the
preview pane.

If the restore process completes successfully or you cancel it, the instance moves to the Comp leted node in the
bottom section of the navigation pane.

At this step, you can also manually retry the restore session if something interrupts it, or cancel the session.

Retrying Restore
If anything disrupts the restore process (the target or mount server crashes or the network is down), the restore
process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail, you can
launch the retry manually after the server or network is up. You cannot manually launch retry of an ongoing
restore session.

To retry one or all ongoing restore sessions, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, click the Restore node to select all ongoing restore sessions, or select the relevant
instance.

2. On the Restore tab, select Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Restore node or the relevant instance and select Retry.

444 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Canceling Restore
To cancel one or all ongoing restore sessions, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, click the Restore node to select all ongoing export sessions, or select the relevant
instance.

2. On the Restore tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Restore node or the relevant instance and select Ca ncel.

445 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Publishing
Publishing a PostgreSQL instance allows you to temporarily attach the instance to the target PostgreSQL server
without launching restore. Publishing typically occurs faster than using standard restore features and could be
convenient when, for example, your time to perform disaster-recovery operations is limited.

Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL mounts disks from the backup repository to the target machine (under the /tmp
directory), retrieves required instance files and attaches the associated instance directly to PostgreSQL so that
you can perform required operations using PostgreSQL tools such as pgAdmin.

After you have launched a publishing operation to a PostgreSQL machine, you can quickly republish the latest or
point-in-time state of the instance to the same machine.

Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can export the modified databases managed by the
published instance. For more information, see Exporting From Published Instances.

Before publishing data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

446 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Publishing Works
Publishing PostgreSQL instances with Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL works in the following manner:

1. To start the publishing process, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL sends a publishing command to the
Veeam Mount Service . The service runs on the mount server associated with the backup repository.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service connects to the target server. The service validates the permissions
of the selected user and checks if there is enough free space on the target server. The Veeam Explorers
Recovery Service sends a request to the Veeam Mount Service to connect to the backup repository and
initiate the mounting operation.

4. The Veeam Mount Service uses FUSE to mount the necessary file system from the backup repository to
the /tmp directory on the target PostgreSQL machine. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service opens the
instance from the mounted file system, so that you can perform the required operations with PostgreSQL
tools. All changes in instance files that occur after publishing are saved in the publishing write cache,
which is stored in the /var/tmp directory on the target server.

After you have launched a publishing operation to a PostgreSQL server, you can quickly republish the latest or
point-in-time state of the PostgreSQL instance to the same server.

The publishing session is resilient to network disruption, backup server or mount server crashes. All changes in
instance files that occur after publishing are saved in the publishing write cache, which is stored in the
/var/tmp directory on the target server. If anything disrupts the publishing process (the target or mount server
crashes, or the network is down), you can launch the retry manually after the server or network is up.

Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can export the modified databases managed by the
published instance. For more information, see Exporting From Published Instances.

447 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publishing to Specified Server
To publish a PostgreSQL instance to the specified PostgreSQL server, use the P ub lish wizard.

1. Launch the Publish wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify the target PostgreSQL server.

4. Specify PostgreSQL settings.

448 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Publish Wizard
To launch the P ub lish wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to publish.

2. On the Instance tab, select P ub lish Instance > P ublish to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select P ub lish Instance > P ublish to another server.

449 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

450 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target PostgreSQL server.

1. In the Server field, enter the DNS name or IP address of the target server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify an SSH port (by default, port 22 is used).

3. In the Account field, specify a Linux system account name under which to connect to the specified server.

4. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root privileges on the target server, click
Ad vanced:

a. Select the E levate specified account to root check box.

The account must have root privileges to mount the backed -up file system to the target server and to
communicate with PostgreSQL.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If you plan to use the account to connect to Linux servers where the sudo command is not available
or may fail, you have an option to use the su command instead. To enable the su command, select
the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root password field, enter the password for the
root account.

Veeam Backup & Replication will first try to use the sudo command. If the attempt fails,
Veeam Backup & Replication will use the su command.

5. In the P a ssword field, enter the account password.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a file that contains a private key.

To locate a file, click Browse and select a key.

451 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase used to decrypt the private key.

452 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify PostgreSQL Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify a free PostgreSQL instance port in the Instance p ort field.

The specified port must be free. If the port is occupied, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL will display an error.

453 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Publishing Latest or Point-in-Time State
After you have launched a publishing operation to a PostgreSQL instance (as described in Publishing to Specified
Server), you can quickly republish a state of the PostgreSQL instance to the same server.

You can republish either of the following states:

• The latest available state — to publish data as of the latest state in the backup file.

• A point-in-time state — to publish data as of the selected point-in-time state. This option is available only
if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log (WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job
Settings.

When you unpublish an instance, both options remain available until you close the application so that you can
quickly republish the instance if required.

Publishing Latest State

You can republish an unpublished instance anew. When republishing an instance, it will be attached to the
target PostgreSQL server as of the latest available state.

To republish an instance as of the latest state, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to republish.

2. On the Instance tab, select P ub lish Instance > P ublish latest state to < target_server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select P ub lish instance > P ublish latest state to
< ta rget_server>.

NOTE

The name of the publish option depends on the restore point you select during the application item restore
process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as P ub lish latest
sta te to <target_server>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as P ub lish state of
< p oint_in_time> to <target_server>.

454 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Once completed, the instance will be published with the same settings as you specified during the initial
publishing session.

Publishing Point-in-Time State

After you have launched a publishing operation to a PostgreSQL server (as described in Publishing to Specified
Server), you can quickly publish another point-in-time state of the PostgreSQL instance to the same server.

To publish a PostgreSQL instance as of the point-in-time state, use the P ub lish wizard.

1. Launch the Publish wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

455 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Publish Wizard
To launch the P ub lish wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a PostgreSQL instance you want to republish.

2. On the Instance tab, select P ub lish Instance > P ublish p oint-in-time state to < target_server>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select P ub lish Instance > P ublish point-in-time state to
< ta rget_server>.

456 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

457 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Publishing Session
After you finish the steps of the P ub lish wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts a publishing session.

Under the P ub lish node in the upper part of the navigation pane, you can find the instances with an ongoing or
completed publishing process. Click an instance to get a more detailed over view of the publishing process in the
preview pane.

Also, in the Publishing session view, you can do the following:

• Export data from the published instance.

• Retry the publishing process (in case the publishing session fails for any reason).

• Unpublish the instance.

Exporting From Published Instances

Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can use Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL to export published
PostgreSQL databases. This feature exports the modified databases managed by the instance, preserving all the
changes that have been made during the publishing session.

NOTE

Exporting databases from a published instance does not require setting up a staging server.

To export a published instance, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lish node, select a published instance.

2. On the P ub lish tab, select E x port Database.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select E x port databases.

458 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Retrying Publishing
If anything disrupts the publishing process (the target or mount server crashes or the network is down), the
restore process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail,
you can launch the retry manually after the server or network is up.

To start the retry process manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lish node, select the instance.

2. On the P ub lish tab, click Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the instance and select Retry.

Unpublishing Instances
Once you have finished working with published instances, you may want to unpublish (detach) these instances
from the target server.

Detachment occurs in the following manner:

• Upon closing the Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL console, all published instances will be detached from
target servers automatically. Mount points will be also dismounted from under the /tmp directory.

• On manual unpublishing, instances will be detached at once but the restore point will remain mounted on
the target server for the next 15 minutes.

To unpublish an instance manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the P ub lished instances node, select a published instance.

2. On the P ub lish tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, in the navigation pane, right-click a published database and select Ca ncel.

459 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To detach more than one published instance simultaneously, right-click the root P ub lish node and select Ca ncel
or select the root P ub lish node and click Ca ncel on the P ub lish tab.

460 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery
Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can use Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL to perform instant
recovery of PostgreSQL instances.

Instant recovery combines capabilities of the data restore and data publishing features. If you want instances to
be online as quickly as possible, you can use the Instant Recovery option and restore the instances in the
background.

Before performing instant recovery, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

461 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Instant Recovery Works
Instant recovery of PostgreSQL instances with Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL works in the following manner:

1. To start the instant recovery process, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL sends an instant recovery command
to the Veeam Mount Service . The service runs on the mount server associated with the backup repository.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service connects to the target server. The service validates the permissions
of the selected user and checks if there is enough free space on the target se rver. The Veeam Explorers
Recovery Service sends a request to the Veeam Mount Service to connect to the backup repository and
initiate the mounting operation.

4. The Veeam Mount Service uses FUSE to mount the necessary file system from the backup repository to
the /tmp directory on the target PostgreSQL machine. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service starts the
instance from the mounted file system.

5. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service replicates the published instance on the target server using the
pg_basebackup utility. All changes in instance files that occur after publishing are saved in the instant
recovery write cache, which is stored in the /var/temp directory on the target server. The standby
instance is continuously synchronized with the changes on the published instance.

After the instances are fully synchronized, you can switch over to the up -to-date standby instance on the
production server. For more information on the available switchover options, see Switchover.

During switchover, the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service does the following:

1. Switches the published instance to the read-only mode.

2. Synchronizes the remaining differences between the published instance and the standby instance on the
target server.

3. Turns off the published and the standby instance.

4. Starts the standby instance as a standalone instance.

The instant recovery session is resilient to network disruptions, backup server or mount server crashes. All
changes in instance files that occur after publishing are saved in the publishing write cache, which is stored in
the /var/temp directory on the target server. If anything disrupts the instant recovery process, the process
stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail, you can launch
retry after the server or network is up.

462 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery of Single Instance
You can perform instant recovery of a PostgreSQL instance by following one of these scenarios:

• Instant Recovery of Latest State

• Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

• Instant Recovery to Another Server

Instant Recovery of Latest State

To perform instant recovery of a single instance to the latest state, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify switchover settings.

3. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

463 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select an instance.

2. On the Instance tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to <original_location> .

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the instant recovery option depends on the restore point you select during the application
item restore process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant recovery of the state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

464 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify an instance switchover type. During switchover, the mounted instance is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all instance files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all instances files copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Restore.

After you click Restore, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts publishing the instance on the target
server.

465 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant recovery
session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, retry
instant recovery and cancel instant recovery. For more information, see Managing Instant Recovery Session.

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually, anytime after synchronization

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

If switchover is successfully performed or the instant recovery session is canceled, the ins tance moves from the
Instant Recovery node to the Comp leted node at the bottom of the navigation pane.

Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

To perform instant recovery of an instance to a selected point-in-time state, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify switchover settings.

4. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

466 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select an instance.

2. On the Instance tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the point -in-time state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the point-in-time
sta te to <original_location>.

467 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

468 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify an instance switchover type. During switchover, the mounted instance is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all instance files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all instances files copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Restore.

After you click Restore, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts publishing the instance on the target
server.

469 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant recovery
session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, retry
instant recovery and cancel instant recovery. For more information, see Managing Instant Recovery Session.

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually, anytime after synchronization

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

If switchover is successfully performed or the instant recovery session is canceled, the instance moves from the
Instant Recovery node to the Comp leted node at the bottom of the navigation pane.

Instant Recovery to Another Server

To perform instant recovery of an instance to another server, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify the target server.

4. Specify PostgreSQL settings.

5. Specify tablespaces.

470 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 6. Specify switchover settings.

7. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

471 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select an instance.

2. On the Instance tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click an instance and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

472 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

473 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target PostgreSQL server.

1. In the Server field, enter the DNS name or IP address of the target server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify an SSH port (by default, port 22 is used).

3. In the Account field, specify a Linux system account name under which to connect to the specified server.

4. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root privileges on the target server, click
Ad vanced:

a. Select the E levate specified account to root check box.

The account must have root privileges to mount the backed -up file system to the target server and to
communicate with PostgreSQL.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If you plan to use the account to connect to Linux servers where the sudo command is not available
or may fail, you have an option to use the su command instead. To enable the su command, select
the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root password field, enter the password for the
root account.

Veeam Backup & Replication will first try to use the sudo command. If the attempt fails,
Veeam Backup & Replication will use the su command.

5. In the P a ssword field, enter the account password.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a file that contains a private key.

To locate a file, click Browse and select a key.

474 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase used to decrypt the private key.

475 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify PostgreSQL Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify the following PostgreSQL settings:

1. Specify a location to which you want to restore the PostgreSQL instance:

o Select Restore to the original location to restore the PostgreSQL instance to the original data
directory.

o Select Restore to a different location and specify a path in the Da ta directory path field to restore the
PostgreSQL instance to another directory. To locate a new directory, click Browse and select a folder
you want to use.

2. In the Instance port field, specify a free instance port, which will also serve as an instance identifier.

NOTE

If the target data directory is not empty, you will be prompted to overwrite it before proceeding to the
next step.

476 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Tablespaces
At this step of the wizard, specify paths of directories where database tables will be stored.

NOTE

If any of the target tablespace directories are not empty, you will be prompted to overwrite them before
proceeding to the next step.

477 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify an instance switchover type. During switchover, the mounted instance is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all instance files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all instances files copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop-down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Restore.

After you click Restore, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts publishing the instance on the target
server.

478 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant recovery
session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, retry
instant recovery and cancel instant recovery. For more information, see Managing Instant Recovery Session.

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually, anytime after synchronization

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

If switchover is successfully performed or the instant recovery session is canceled, the instance moves from the
Instant Recovery node to the Comp leted node at the bottom of the navigation pane.

479 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Instant Recovery of Multiple Instances
You can perform instant recovery of multiple PostgreSQL instances hosted on a server. You can perform instant
recovery to the original server or any other server in your network where PostgreSQL is installed.

To instantly recover PostgreSQL instances, follow one of these scenarios:

• Instant Recovery of Latest State

• Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

• Instant Recovery to Another Server

Instant Recovery of Latest State

To perform instant recovery of multiple instances to their latest state, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify switchover settings.

3. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

480 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the server.

2. On the Server tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to <original_location> .

Alternatively, you can right-click the server and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the latest state to
< original_location>.

NOTE

The name of the instant recovery option depends on the restore point you select during the application
item restore process in the Veeam Backup & Replication console.

• If you select the most recent available restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant
recovery of the latest state to <original_location>.
• If you select any other restore point, the option name is displayed as Instant recovery of the state of
< p oint_in_time> to <original_location>.

481 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify an instance switchover type. During switchover, the mounted instance is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all instance files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all instances files copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Restore.

After you click Restore, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts publishing the instance on the target
server.

482 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant recovery
session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, retry
instant recovery and cancel instant recovery. For more information, see Managing Instant Recovery Session.

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually, anytime after synchronization

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

If switchover is successfully performed or the instant recovery session is canceled, the instance moves from the
Instant Recovery node to the Comp leted node at the bottom of the navigation pane.

Instant Recovery of Point-in-Time State

To perform instant recovery of multiple instances to a selected point-in-time state, use the Instant Recovery
wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify a restore point.

3. Specify switchover settings.

4. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

483 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the server.

2. On the Server tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery of the point -in-time state to
< original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the server and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery of the point-in-time
sta te to <original_location>.

484 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

485 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify an instance switchover type. During switchover, the mounted instance is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all instance files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all instances files copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop-down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Restore.

After you click Restore, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts publishing the instance on the target
server.

486 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant recovery
session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, retry
instant recovery and cancel instant recovery. For more information, see Managing Instant Recovery Session.

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually, anytime after synchronization

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

If switchover is successfully performed or the instant recovery session is canceled, the instance moves from the
Instant Recovery node to the Comp leted node at the bottom of the navigation pane.

Instant Recovery to Another Server

To perform instant recovery of multiple instances to another server, use the Instant Recovery wizard.

1. Launch the Instant Recovery wizard.

2. Specify restore point.

3. Specify target server.

4. Specify switchover settings.

5. Finalize the Instant Recovery session.

487 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Instant Recovery Wizard
To launch the Instant Recovery wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation tree, select the server.

2. On the Server tab, select Instant Recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click the server and select Instant recovery > Instant recovery to another server.

488 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your data:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load instance files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain instance files as of the selected point in time
within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some instances for the selected
point in time, those instances will be recovered as of their latest available state.

489 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Server
At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target PostgreSQL server.

1. In the Server field, enter the DNS name or IP address of the target server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify an SSH port (by default, port 22 is used).

3. In the Account field, specify a Linux system account name under which to connect to the specified server.

4. If you have specified a non-root account that does not have root privileges on the target server, click
Ad vanced:

a. Select the E levate specified account to root check box.

The account must have root privileges to mount the backed -up file system to the target server and to
communicate with PostgreSQL.

b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If you plan to use the account to connect to Linux servers where the sudo command is not available
or may fail, you have an option to use the su command instead. To enable the su command, select
the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root password field, enter the password for the
root account.

Veeam Backup & Replication will first try to use the sudo command. If the attempt fails,
Veeam Backup & Replication will use the su command.

5. In the P a ssword field, enter the account password.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a file that contains a private key.

To locate a file, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase used to decrypt the private key.

490 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

When performing instant recovery of multiple instances to another server, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL
restores data to the same data directories and tablespace directories as on the backup file. If the data
tablespace directories of any of the backed-up instances are not empty on the target server, you will be
prompted to overwrite them before proceeding to the next step.

491 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Switchover Settings
At this step of the wizard, specify an instance switchover type. During switchover, the mounted instance is
switched to its complete copy on the target server.

To select a switchover type and start an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. At the Sp ecify switchover type field, select one of the following switchover options:

o Auto: switchover is performed automatically after all instance files are copied and synchronized.

o Ma nual: switchover is started manually by the user at any time after all instances files copied and
synchronized.

o Scheduled: switchover is performed at a specified date and time. Use the drop -down calendar to
specify the date and time.

2. Click Restore.

After you click Restore, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts publishing the instance on the target
server.

492 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Finalize Instant Recovery Session
After you finish steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant recovery
session.

In the Instant Recovery session view, you can see the progress of the recovery, edit switchover settings, retry
instant recovery and cancel instant recovery. For more information, see Managing Instant Recovery Session.

Depending on the selected switchover option, switchover starts in one of the following ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually, anytime after synchronization

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

If switchover is successfully performed or the instant recovery session is canceled, the instance moves from the
Instant Recovery node to the Comp leted node at the bottom of the navigation pane.

493 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Switchover
The switchover option becomes available the published instance is fully replicated on the target server. During
switchover, the published instance is switched to its complete replica on the target server. Note that if you have
selected to restore to the original server, the restored instance will replace the original instance.

Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

During switchover, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL does the following:

1. Switches the published instance to the read-only mode.

2. Synchronizes the remaining differences between the published instance and the standby instance on the
target server.

3. Turns off the published instance and the standby instance.

4. Starts the standby instance as a standalone instance.

Auto Switchover
The Auto switchover option ensures minimal downtime.

After the replication process is complete, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts to synchronize the changes
between the published instance and the standby instance.

When the remaining differences become minimal (approximately 100 MB), Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL
starts the switchover process and switches the published database to the read -only mode. The remaining
synchronization takes place as part of the switchover process, during which the published instance is in the
read-only mode and cannot be modified.

Scheduled Switchover
After the replication process is complete, the instance goes into the Ready for switchover state and remains in
this state until the scheduled date and time for switchover. Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL synchronizes the
changes between the published instance and the standby instance in the background.

At the scheduled date and time for switchover, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL switches the published database
to the read-only mode and synchronizes any remaining changes as part of the switchover process.

Manual Switchover
After the replication process is complete, the instance goes into the Ready for switchover state and remains in
this state until you manually launch switchover. Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL synchronizes the changes
between the published instance and the standby instance in the background.

When you manually launch switchover, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL switches the published database to the
read-only mode and synchronizes any remaining changes as part of the switchover process.

For more information on how to perform manual switchover, see Starting Switchover Manually.

494 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Starting Switchover Manually
If you have selected the Manual switchover option in the Instant Recovery wizard, you can start the switchover
process at any time if the instance is in the Ready to switchover state.

To start switchover manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select a published instance.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select Switchover now.

Alternatively, you can right-click the instance and select Switchover now.

495 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Instant Recovery Session
After you finish the steps of the Instant Recovery wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an instant
recovery session which shows the progress of the recovery process.

Depending on the option you choose in the Instant Recovery wizard, switchover starts in one of the following
ways:

• Automatically, immediately after synchronization

• Automatically, according to a specified schedule

• Manually

If you have selected the Ma nual switchover option, you must perform switchover manually as described in
Starting Switchover Manually.

NOTE

The instant recovery session closes automatically after switchover.

Also, in the Instant Recovery session view, you can do the following:

• Edit switchover settings.

• Retry instant recovery (in case instant recovery session fails for any reason).

• Cancel instant recovery.

Editing Instant Recovery Settings

If you have started an instant recovery session and you want to perform switchover with different settings than
the ones you originally specified, you can edit the instant recovery settings.

496 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To change the switchover settings of an instant recovery session, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select an instance with an active instant recovery
session.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select E d it or right-click the instance and select E d it.

3. Change the switchover option and click E d it to save the new switchover settings.

497 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Retrying Instant Recovery
If anything disrupts the restore process (the target or mount server crashes or the network is down), the restore
process stays in the waiting mode and performs 10 automatic retries every 5 minutes. If the retries fail, you can
launch the retry manually after the server or network is up.

To start the retry process manually, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select the database.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, click Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the database and select Retry.

Canceling Instant Recovery

If you have finished working with the published instance and you do not want to switch over to it, you can
cancel the instant recovery session.

You can do this by canceling instant recovery in either Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL or the
Veeam Backup & Replication console.

NOTE

Consider the following:

• Closing either the Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL window or the Veeam Backup & Replication
console does not cancel the instant recovery session.
• You do not need to cancel the instant recovery session if switchover is already performed. The
session closes automatically after switchover.

498 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Canceling Instant Recovery in Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL
To cancel the instant recovery session in Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, under the Instant Recovery node, select an instance with an active instant recovery
session.

2. On the Instant Recovery tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, you can right-click the instance and select Ca ncel.

Canceling Instant Recovery in Veeam Backup & Replication

Console
To cancel the instant recovery session in the Veeam Backup & Replication console, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Backup & Replication console, open the Home view.

2. In the navigation pane, select Instant Database Recovery.

499 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the preview pane, select the session and in the Instant Database Recovery tab click Stop Publishing.

Alternatively, you can right-click the session and click Stop p ublishing.

500 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can use Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL to export
PostgreSQL databases.

Before exporting data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

501 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Export Works
Exporting PostgreSQL databases with Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL works in the following manner:

1. To start the export process, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL sends an export command to the Veeam
Mount Service. The service runs on the mount server associated with the backup repository.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service connects to the staging server (or the target server for the
publishing operation when exporting from a published instance). The service validates the permissions of
the selected user and checks if there is enough free space on the staging server and the target machine.
The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service sends a request to the Veeam Mount Service to connect to the
backup repository and initiate the mounting operation.

4. The Veeam Mount Service uses FUSE to mount the necessary file system from the backup repository to
the /tmp directory on the staging server. Veeam Explorers Recovery Service starts the instance from the
mounted file system.

5. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service saves the selected databases to the /var/tmp directory on the
staging server using the pg_dump utility. The output of the export operation is a DUMP file in the
directory format (-Fd option).

Note that when exporting a database from a published instance, the DUMP file is saved directly to the
server onto which the instance is published and it does not require a staging server. For more information,
see Exporting From Published Instances.

6. The Veeam Explorers Recovery Service sends the DUMP file to the target machine, which can either be the
local host where the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed, or any Linux machine. Data transfer
is established by data movers running on the staging server (target server for the publishing operation if
exporting from a published instance) and the target machine.

The export session is resilient to network disruptions, backup server or mount server crashes. If anything
disrupts the export process, you can launch retry after the server or network is up.

After the export operation successfully completes, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL removes the DUMP file from
/var/tmp directory on the staging server and drops the published instance.

502 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

You can save the exported DUMP file to the necessary PostgreSQL server and restore it with the pg_restore
utility. For more information about restoring DUMP files, see Restoring Exported Database.

503 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Databases
To export one or multiple databases, use the E x port wizard.

1. Launch the Export wizard.

2. Select databases.

3. Specify a restore point.

4. Specify target host.

5. Specify target host credentials.

6. Specify export location.

504 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Export Wizard
To launch the E x port wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database, instance or the server.

2. On the Da tabase, Instance or Server tab, select E x port databases.

Alternatively, right-click a database, instance or the server and select E x port databases.

505 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
This step of the wizard is only available if you have selected an instance or the server at the Launch Export
Wizard step.

At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to export.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name. If the databases
belong to multiple instances, you can also sort the databases by instance name.

506 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Point
At this step of the wizard, select a state as of which you want to recover your databases:

• Select the Restore to the point in time of the selected image-level backup option to load database files as
of the moment when the current restore point was created.

• Select the Restore to a specific point in time option to obtain database files as of the selected point in
time within the available restore period. Use the slider to choose the point in time you need.

The Restore to a specific point in time option is available only if backups of PostgreSQL write ahead log
(WAL) files exist. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

Note that if the backed-up WAL files do not contain information about some databases for the selected
point in time, the databases will be recovered as of their latest available state.

NOTE

Exporting backed-up PostgreSQL databases requires a staging PostgreSQL server. For more information,
see Configuring Staging PostgreSQL Server.

507 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Host
At this step of the wizard, specify the server to which you want to export your PostgreSQL databases.

• Select This server to export your databases to the local host on which the Veeam Backup & Replication
console is installed.

• Select Another Linux server to export your databases to any Linux server.

508 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Target Host Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify connection settings required to access the target server for the export
operation. The set of connection settings depends on whether you have chosen to export your databases to the
local host or another Linux server.

Local Host
This step of the wizard is available if you have selected to export your PostgreSQL databases to the local host
on which the Veeam Backup & Replication console is installed.

Enter the administrator credentials to connect to the local host where the Veeam Backup & Replication console
is installed.

For more information on the required user account configuration, see the Permissions section.

Linux Server
This step of the wizard is available if you have selected to export your PostgreSQL databases to a Linux server.

At this step of the wizard, specify credentials to access the target Linux server.

1. In the Server field, enter the DNS name or IP address of the target server.

2. In the SSH p ort field, specify an SSH port (by default, port 22 is used).

3. In the Account field, specify a Linux system account name under which to connect to the specified server.
You can export data to a Linux server using an account that does not have root privileges on the target
server.

4. If you need additional privileges for other operations and you want to elevate the specified account to
root, click Ad vanced:

a. Select the E levate specified account to root check box.

509 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 b. To add the user account to the sudoers file, select the Ad d account to the sudoers file automatically
check box. In the Root password field, enter the password for the root account.

If you do not enable this option, you will have to manually add the user account to the sudoers file.

c. If you plan to use the account to connect to Linux servers where the sudo command is not available
or may fail, you have an option to use the su command instead. To enable the su command, select
the Use su if sudo is unavailable check box and in the Root password field, enter the password for the
root account.

Veeam Backup & Replication will first try to use the sudo command. If the attempt fails,
Veeam Backup & Replication will use the su command.

5. In the P a ssword field, enter the account password.

6. If a private key is required to connect to the server, do the following:

a. Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box.

b. In the P rivate key field, specify a file that contains a private key.

To locate a file, click Browse and select a key.

c. In the P a ssphrase field, enter the passphrase used to decrypt the private key.

510 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Export Location
At this step of the wizard, specify the path to the directory where you want to export database files.

Click Browse to manually select the destination folder from the directory structure of the target server.

Select the E na ble compression check box to compress the contents of the exported database.

NOTE

The account you are using must have a sufficient permission level to access the selected directory (Read
and Write as minimum recommended).

511 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Export Session
After you finish the steps of the E x port wizard, Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL starts an export session for each
of the selected databases.

Under the E x port node in the upper part of the navigation pane, you can find the databases with an ongoing
export process. Click a database to get a more detailed overview of the progress of its export session in the
preview pane.

If the export process completes successfully or you cancel it, the database moves to the Completed node in the
bottom section of the navigation pane.

At this step, you can also manually retry the export session if something interrupts it, or cancel the session.

Retrying Export
If anything disrupts the export process (the target or mount server crashes or the network is down), you can
launch the retry manually after the server or network is up. You cannot manually launch retry of an ongoing
export session.

To retry one or all ongoing export sessions, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, click the E x port node to select all ongoing restore sessions, or select the relevant
database.

2. On the E x port tab, select Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the E x port node or the relevant database and select Retry.

512 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Canceling Export
To cancel one or all ongoing export sessions, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, click the E x port node to select all ongoing export sessions, or select the relevant
database.

2. On the E x port tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, you can right-click the E x port node or the relevant database and select Ca ncel.

513 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Exported Database
Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL exports databases to the target destination as DUMP files. These files are
portable across platforms and can be used to restore the original state of the database s with the pg_restore
utility. For more information about this utility, see the PostgreSQL Documentation.

To restore an exported database, save the DUMP file to the necessary PostgreSQL server and run the following
command:

$ pg_restore -p <port> -U <user> [-C] -d <database> <dump_file>

where:

• <port> is the instance port.

• <user> is the user or owner of the database.

• -C creates a new database. Use this argument only if you want the pg_restore utility to create a new
database.

Note that if you create a new database and the database in the DUMP file has tablespaces, you must
manually create tablespaces with the same names as the ones in the DUMP file. The --no-tablespace
argument of the pg_restore utility, which places databases in the default tablespace, is not supported
for DUMP files exported with Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL.

• <database> may stand for different databases depending on whether or not you use the -C argument.

o If you use the -C argument, <database> is the name of the database that pg_restore uses to run
the necessary commands for restoring the database in the DUMP file, such as CREATE DATABASE.

o If you do not use the -C argument, <database> is the name of the target database. You can use the
-c argument to overwrite the target database with the one in the DUMP file.

• <dump_file> is the path to the DUMP file.

For example:

$ pg_restore -p 5433 -U root -C -d sales /var/tmp/Import/export.dump

514 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for PostgreSQL, you can visit Veeam R&D Forums or
submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, s ee
Enabling Extended Logging.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

515 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA
Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, you can use Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA to restore your SAP
HANA data. You can restore system or tenant SAP HANA databases from backups created by application backup
policies managed by Veeam Backup & Replication and backup jobs managed by a standalone Veeam Plug -in for
SAP HANA.

516 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
Before you start using Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA to restore your data, consider the following requirements
and limitations.

517 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA.

Comp onent Requirement

SAP HANA Support Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA supports SAP HANA 2.0: SPS 02, SPS 03, SPS 04, SPS
P a ckage Stacks 05, SPS 06 and SPS 07.
( SP S)
SAP HANA 2.0 SPS 01 and earlier support package stacks are not supported.

518 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following tables list network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

Backup

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server Source Linux TCP 6162 Default port used by Linux Management
machine with Agent.
SAP HANA

TCP 22 Default SSH port used as a control

channel (without Linux Management
Agent).

TCP 2500 to Default range of ports that

3300 Veeam Backup & Replication uses as data
transmission channels. For every TCP
connection that a backup process uses,
Veeam Backup & Replication assigns one
port from this range.

Source Linux Backup TCP 2500 to Default range of ports that

machine with repository 3300 Veeam Backup & Replication uses as data
SAP HANA transmission channels. For every TCP
connection that a backup process uses,
Veeam Backup & Replication assigns one
port from this range.

Restore

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server, Mount TCP 6170 Port used for connections to the
Veeam Backup & Replication server mount service.
console

Backup server, SAP Web TCP 1129, Ports used for establishing an HTTPS
Veeam Backup & Replication Services 5<xx>14 connection to SAP Web Services. Port
console where 1129 is used by the SAP Control web
<xx> is service and port 5<xx>14 is used by
the the SAP Start web service.
number of
the
instance

519 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 From To P rotocol P ort Notes

TCP 1128, Ports used for establishing an HTTP

5<xx>13 connection to SAP Web Services. Port
where 1128 is used by the SAP Control web
<xx> is service and port 5<xx>13 is used by
the the SAP Start web service.
number of
the
instance

Backup server, Target TCP 3<xx>13 Port used for establishing an SSL
Veeam Backup & Replication SAP HANA where connection to the target SAP HANA
console System <xx> is system database when restoring
the tenant databases.
number of
the
instance

Backup repository Target TCP 2500 to Default range of ports used for
Linux 3300 managing data transfer during restore
machine to the original (remote) machine or
with SAP another Linux machine with SAP
HANA HANA.

Target Linux machine with Backup TCP 2500 to Default range of ports used for
SAP HANA repository 3300 managing data transfer during restore
to the original (remote) machine or
another Linux machine with SAP
HANA.

520 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA and
restore SAP HANA data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for The account used to run Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA must meet the following
SAP HANA launch requirements:
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore
Operator role on the backup server.

Restore When restoring your data with Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA, make sure to configure
user accounts as follows:
• The account used for SAP HANA data recovery must be a Linux user with
operating system user (<sid>adm) privileges on the target machine. Operating
system user privileges are required to execute restore operations and to handle
database processes. For more information about operating system user
privileges, see the SAP HANA documentation.
• The database user on the target SAP HANA system must have the SYSTEM,
RECOVERY OPERATOR or DATABASE ADMIN privilege.

521 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
You can create backups of SAP HANA machines using application backup policies managed by
Veeam Backup & Replication and backup jobs managed by a standalone Veeam Plug -in for SAP HANA.

• To create an application backup policy managed by Veeam Backup & Replication, do the following:

a. Add the source SAP HANA machine to a protection group. For more information, see the Creating
Protection Groups section of the Veeam Agent Management Guide.

b. Create an application backup policy using the protection group. For more information, see the
Creating SAP HANA Backup Policy section of the Veeam Plug-in for Enterprise Applications Guide.

• To create a backup job managed by a standalone Veeam Plug-in for SAP HANA, you can use HDBSQL
scripts, or native SAP HANA tools such as SAP HANA studio and SAP HANA Cockpit. For more information,
see the Database Protection section of the Veeam Plug-in for Enterprise Applications Guide.

After the backups are successfully created using one of these methods, you can use Veeam Explorer for SAP
HANA to restore your SAP HANA data.

522 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and known limitations of Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA.

General
• When Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA is installed on a server on which both Veeam Backup & Replication
and Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings will be inherited from the
Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

Restore
• Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA does not support restore using PowerShell Direct, VIX API or vSphere
Automation API.

• Before you restore a tenant database, make sure that the system database on the target server is running.

• Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA does not support restore of the system database to another server.

• Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA does not support restore from backups created by Veeam Plug -in for SAP
HANA on Linux machines running IBM Power Systems.

• You cannot use Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA to restore your data if the OS user credentials in your SAP
HANA backup policy are configured using an SSH private key — use the SSH credentials option instead.

• Before you restore an SAP HANA tenant database to another server, make sure SAP HANA is installed on
the target server. For more information on supported SAP HANA support package stacks, see System
Requirements.

• Before you restore an SAP HANA tenant database, make sure that the target system has an SAP HANA SPS
that is the same or newer than the one installed on the backed -up system.

• The target server to which you restore your data must have Veeam Plug -in for SAP HANA installed and
configured, otherwise the restore operation will fail. To do this, add the machine to a protection group in
Veeam Backup & Replication or install the plug-in manually.

• Before you restore an SAP HANA tenant database to another server, make sure that the account used to
connect the plug-in on the target server to the backup server and backup repository meets the following
requirements:

o The account must have either the Veeam Backup Administrator , or both the Veeam Backup Operator
and Veeam Restore Operator roles. You can also use the account under which the backup was created.
For more information on how to assign Veeam Backup & Replication roles, see the Users and Roles
section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

o The account must have access permissions to the backup repository where the backup resides. For
more information, see the Access and Encryption Settings on Repositories section of the Veeam Plug-
ins for Enterprise Applications Guide.

If the account does not meet these requirements, you must configure the plug -in on the target server with
the credentials of an account that meets the requirements or with a recovery token. To do this, go to
/opt/veeam/VeeamPluginforSAPHANA on the target server and run the following command:

hxeadm@saphana01:/opt/veeam/VeeamPluginforSAPHANA> SapBackintConfigTool --
set-backup-for-restore

523 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 For more information about this command, see the Restore to Another Server (System Copy) section of
the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise Applications Guide.

• Before you restore a database, make sure that the target server has enough free disk space or the restore
process will freeze.

• You cannot restore SAP HANA data from multiple backups in parallel to the same target machine.

• Before you restore a system database, make sure that automatic file rotation for the backup.log file is
disabled or the restore process will freeze.

• If you restore a tenant database with a custom name to another server, make sure that the name does not
contain keywords that belong to the RESERVED_KEYWORDS system view. To get a list of these keywords,
run the following query on your SAP HANA system:

SELECT * FROM RESERVED_KEYWORDS ORDER BY RESERVED_KEYWORD

• Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA can only restore from backups created with Veeam Backup & Replication
12.1 (build 12.1.0.2131) and later. This applies to both backups created in the console and with a
standalone Veeam Plug-in for SAP HANA.

• Before restoring your SAP HANA data with PowerShell, make sure that the following conditions are met:

o The target system has a supported SAP HANA SPS.

o The target system has an SAP HANA SPS that is the same or newer than the one installed on the
backed-up system.

o The backup repository contains at least one full backup.

• If you want to restore multiple databases, you cannot select system databases and tenant databases
within the same restore operation. This is because you cannot simultaneously restore the system database
of an SAP HANA system and its tenant databases — the system database is shut down during its restore
process, while tenant databases require the system database to be online during theirs.

• If you disable a backup job managed by a standalone plug -in (where the backed-up machine has
catalog_backup_using_backint set to true in the global.ini file) or an application backup policy
managed by Veeam Backup & Replication, the restore process will freeze. This is because after recovering
the data, SAP HANA automatically creates a new backup catalog and sends it to the backint as part of the
restore process, which requires the backup job or the application backup policy to be active.

• If you restore the system database to a state of an earlier point in time, all tenant databases created after
that point of time will be deleted from the target server. You will need to restore those tenant databases
within a separate restore operation.

• You cannot assign backup prefixes to backups created with application backup policies in
Veeam Backup & Replication. To be able to assign backup prefixes to your backup, create a backup with a
standalone Veeam Plug-in for SAP HANA. For more information, see the Database Protection section of
the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise Applications Guide.

• Before you restore a tenant database using the SSL protocol, make sur e that the target SAP HANA system
is properly configured to use SSL and that the backup server has SAP Common Crypto Library installed.
For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on Windows machines, see the SAP
Help Portal.

524 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • If you are using secure restore, the backup server is running Microsoft Windows Server 2012 or 2016 and
you are using SAP Common Crypto Library 8.5.51 or higher, you must export the SSL private key with the
Triple DES encryption algorithm. SAP Common Crypto Library 8.5.51 or higher uses the AES 256
encryption algorithm as default for PKCS #12 encryption, while this encryption algorithm is not supported
in Microsoft Windows Server 2012 and 2016.

525 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application
To open Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA, you can use either of the following methods:

• Use the Restore from SAP HANA backup option in Veeam Backup & Replication to load backups created
either with an application backup policy in Veeam Backup & Replication or a backup job managed by a
standalone Veeam Plug-in for SAP HANA. For more information, see Required Job Settings.

• Go to Sta rt and click Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA if you want to, for example, manage ongoing restore
sessions or check the installed product version. Note that this method does not load any backups and does
not allow you to start new restore sessions.

If you open Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of the backup server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform recovery operations, the user account used to run Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA
must be a member of the local Administrators or Users group on the machine where Veeam
Explorers Suite is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA is running, select Use Windows session
a uthentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

526 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA provides you with a convenient user interface that allows you to perform the
required operations in a user-friendly manner.

Main Menu
To open the main menu, click the menu toggle in the upper-left part of the main application window.

In the main menu, you can perform the following actions:

• Click General Options to configure the general application settings.

• Hover over Help to see the Online help and Ab out options.

o Click Online help to open the online help page.

o Click Ab out to see additional information about Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA, such as the build
number.

• Click E x it to close the Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA wizard or window. You will then be
redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains general program commands organized into logical groups.

527 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through your SAP HANA databases.

• The preview pane, which shows you details about the objects you have selected in the navigation pane.

528 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Enabling Extended Logging
Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA allows you to enable an extended logging mode to collect more detailed logs on
specific operations. After you enable extended logging, you can go back to the application and perform the
actions for which you want to collect additional information. Then you can collect the logs. For more
information on log collection, see Getting Support.

To enable extended logging, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA main menu, click General Options.

2. On the Ad vanced tab, select the E na ble extended logging check box and click OK.

529 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
This section contains information about the available restore operations in Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

530 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

How Restore Works
Restoring SAP HANA databases with Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA works in the following manner:

1. To start the restore process, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA sends a restore command to the Veeam Mount
Service. The service runs on the backup server.

2. The Veeam Mount Service delegates this request to the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service running on the
same server.

3. To start the restore process on the target server, the Veeam Explorers Recovery Service creates a restore
job. The service sends a restore command through SAP Web Services to the SAP HANA system on the
target server. The restore command can be sent using HTTP or HTTPS.

4. On the target server, the SAP HANA system requests data from Veeam Plug -in for SAP HANA.

5. Veeam Plug-in for SAP HANA retrieves data from the backups stored in the backup repository and starts
Veeam Data Mover services on the backup repository and the target SAP HANA server.

6. Veeam Data Movers transport the SAP HANA data from the backup repository to the target server. The
SAP HANA system on the target server applies the changes to the relevant databases.

531 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Single Database
You can restore an SAP HANA database by following one of these scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring to Another Server

Restoring Latest State

To restore the latest state of an SAP HANA database, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify server credentials.

3. Specify system credentials.

4. Specify SYSTEM user password.

532 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To restore the latest available state of an SAP HANA database, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore the latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Restore latest state to <original_location>.

533 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Server Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA server.

1. In the OS User field, specify the operating system user (<sid>adm).

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the operating system user.

3. In the P rotocol drop-down list, select the protocol that Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will use to connect
to SAP Web Services, which are then used to control the target SAP HANA system.

o Select HTTP S to establish a secure connection to the target server. Selecting this option will import 2
certificates issued by the target server to the backup server (2 certificates per host in multiple -host
systems). The first certificate is used to securely connect to the SAP Control web service and the
second to the SAP Start web service. Before proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for
SAP HANA will prompt you to review each certificate in a separate Certificate Security Alert dialog
box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

534 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Select HTTP only if your backup infrastructure requires minimal security precautions and you want to
quickly restore SAP HANA data. This option does not import any certificates to the backup server.

For more information about the ports used to connect to SAP Web Services, see Ports.

535 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify System Credentials
This step of the wizard is only available if you are restoring a tenant SAP HANA database.

At this step, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA system.

1. In the Da tabase user field specify an SAP HANA database user. For more information about the necessary
permissions for this user, see Permissions.

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the database user.

3. Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection to the target SAP HANA system.

o Selecting this option will import a certificate issued by the target server to the backup server. Before
proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will prompt you to review the
certificate in the Certificate Security Alert dialog box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

o Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box to also use a private key generated on
the target SAP HANA system to validate the user of the backup server. Once you import the private
key on the backup server, specify the path to the private key and the passphrase specified when
generating the key.

For more information about how to generate a private client key on the target SAP HANA system, see
the SAP Help Portal.

536 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Note that before you restore a tenant database using SSL, you must have SAP Common Crypto Library
installed on the backup server. For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on
Windows machines, see the SAP Help Portal.

537 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify SYSTEM User Password
This step of the wizard is only available if the restore process creates a new tenant database on the target
server.

At this step, specify a password for the new SYSTEM user of the new database. The password policy follows the
default SAP HANA configuration — the password must contain at least 8 characters, one uppercase, one
lowercase letter, and one number.

Restoring Point-in-Time State

To restore a point-in-time state of an SAP HANA database, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify server credentials.

3. Specify system credentials.

4. Specify a recovery type.

5. Specify recovery catalog options.

6. Select a backup.

7. Specify SYSTEM user password.

538 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Database tab, select Restore database > Restore point-in-time state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Restore point-in-time state to <original_location>.

539 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Server Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA server.

1. In the OS User field, specify the operating system user (<sid>adm).

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the operating system user.

3. In the P rotocol drop-down list, select the protocol that Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will us e to connect
to SAP Web Services, which are then used to control the target SAP HANA system.

o Select HTTP S to establish a secure connection to the target server. Selecting this option will import 2
certificates issued by the target server to the backup server (2 certificates per host in multiple-host
systems). The first certificate is used to securely connect to the SAP Control web service and the
second to the SAP Start web service. Before proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for
SAP HANA will prompt you to review each certificate in a separate Certificate Security Alert dialog
box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

540 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Select HTTP only if your backup infrastructure requires minimal security precautions and you want to
quickly restore SAP HANA data. This option does not import any certificates to the backup server.

For more information about the ports used to connect to SAP Web Services, see Ports.

541 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify System Credentials
This step of the wizard is only available if you are restoring a tenant SAP HANA database.

At this step, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA system.

1. In the Da tabase user field specify an SAP HANA database user. For more information about the necessary
permissions for this user, see Permissions.

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the database user.

3. Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection to the target SAP HANA system.

o Selecting this option will import a certificate issued by the target server to the backup server. Before
proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will prompt you to review the
certificate in the Certificate Security Alert dialog box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

o Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box to also use a private key generated on
the target SAP HANA system to validate the user of the backup server. Once you import the private
key on the backup server, specify the path to the private key and the passphrase specified when
generating the key.

For more information about how to generate a private client key on the target SAP HANA system, see
the SAP Help Portal.

542 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Note that before you restore a tenant database using SSL, you must have SAP Common Crypto Library
installed on the backup server. For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on
Windows machines, see the SAP Help Portal.

543 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Recovery Type
At this step of the wizard, specify whether to restore your database to a specific data backup or a point in time.

• Select Recover to a specific data backup to restore the database to a specific data backup. You can select
the necessary backup at the next step of the wizard.

Note that this action clears all transaction logs stored in the system memory that were not yet saved to
the log backups at the time of backup.

• Select Recover to specific point in time to restore the database to a specific point in time.

a. In the Da te field, specify the date and time of the state that you want to restore your database to.

b. From the Time zone drop-down list, select the time zone for the time specified in the Da te field. By
default, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA displays the time zone of the backup server.

c. Select the Initialize log area check box to remove all log segments in the log area or, in other words,
to clear the part of the system memory that temporarily stores transaction logs before they are
moved to the log backups. This allows you to restore the database to the latest available log backup
before the selected point in time.

Note that initializing the log area may cause loss of in-memory data, so perform this action only if the
log area is unavailable. If you do not initialize the log area when the log area is unavailable, the
restore operation will fail. To resolve this issue, repeat the restore operation with the Initialize log
a rea check box selected.

544 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Recovery Catalog Options
This step of the wizard is only available if you have selected the Recover to a specific data backup option at the
Specify Recovery Type step.

At this step of the wizard, you can choose whether to restore SAP HANA data by selecting a full backup from the
backup catalog stored in the Veeam Backup & Replication configuration database, or by using the necessary
backup prefix.

• The Select backup from the catalog option allows you to restore your database from any of the available
full backups stored in the Veeam Backup & Replication configuration database. The backup catalog is
available for both backups made with application backup policies managed by
Veeam Backup & Replication and backup jobs managed by a standalone Veeam Plug -in for SAP HANA.

• The Sp ecify backup without catalog option allows you to restore your database from a backup with the
specified backup prefix. Use this option for backups created with the standalone Veeam Plug -in for SAP
HANA. For more information, see the Database Protection section of the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise
Applications Guide.

To specify the backup prefix of the backup you want to use, use the Ba ckup prefix field. If multiple
backups have the same prefix, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA uses the most recent backup associated with
that backup prefix.

545 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Select Backup
This step of the wizard is only available if you have selected Recover using the backup catalog at the Specify
Recovery Catalog Options step.

At this step, select one of the available full data backups to restore your database to an earlier state.

You can sort the available data backups by their backup IDs, the time they were created and by their size. Note
that the displayed start time of the backups uses the time zone of the backup server.

546 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify SYSTEM User Password
This step of the wizard is only available if the restore process creates a new tenant database on the target
server.

At this step, specify a password for the new SYSTEM user of the new database. The password policy foll ows the
default SAP HANA configuration — the password must contain at least 8 characters, one uppercase, one
lowercase letter, and one number.

Restoring to Another Server

To restore an SAP HANA tenant database to another server, use the Restore wizard.

IMP ORTANT

Before restoring a tenant database to another server, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify server credentials.

3. Specify system credentials.

4. Specify the database name.

5. Specify a recovery type.

6. Specify recovery catalog options.

7. Select a backup.

8. Specify the SYSTEM user password.

547 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a database.

2. On the Da tabase tab, select Restore Database > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click a database and select Restore to another server.

NOTE

Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA does not support restore of the system database to another server.

548 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Server Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA server.

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target SAP HANA server.

2. In the SAP System field, specify the name (SID) of the target SAP HANA system.

3. In the OS User field, specify the operating system user (<sid>adm).

4. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the operating system user.

5. In the P rotocol drop-down list, select the protocol that Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will use to connect
to SAP Web Services, which are then used to control the target SAP HANA system.

o Select HTTP S to establish a secure connection to the target server. Selecting this option will import 2
certificates issued by the target server to the backup server (2 certificates per host in multiple -host
systems). The first certificate is used to securely connect to the SAP Control web service and the
second to the SAP Start web service. Before proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for
SAP HANA will prompt you to review each certificate in a separate Certificate Security Alert dialog
box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

549 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Select HTTP only if you want to quickly restore SAP HANA data and your backup infrastructure
requires minimal security precautions. Selecting this option will not import any certificates from the
target server to the backup server or give any prompts.

For more information about the ports used to connect to SAP Web Services, see Ports.

550 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify System Credentials
At this step, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA system.

1. In the Da tabase user field specify an SAP HANA database user. For more information about the necessary
permissions for this user, see Permissions.

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the database user.

3. Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection to the target SAP HANA system.

o Selecting this option will import a certificate issued by the target server to the backup server. Before
proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will prompt you to review the
certificate in the Certificate Security Alert dialog box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

o Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box to also use a private key generated on
the target SAP HANA system to validate the user of the ba ckup server. Once you import the private
key on the backup server, specify the path to the private key and the passphrase specified when
generating the key.

For more information about how to generate a private client key on the target SAP HANA system, see
the SAP Help Portal.

551 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Note that before you restore a tenant database using SSL, you must have SAP Common Crypto Library
installed on the backup server. For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on
Windows machines, see the SAP Help Portal.

552 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Database Name
At this step of the wizard, specify the name of restored database on the target SAP HANA system.

• Select Restore with the original name to keep the original name of the database on the target SAP HANA
system.

• Select Restore with a different name to change the name of the restored database on the target SAP
HANA system.

In Da tabase name field, type the name of the restored database. Make sure that the name does not
contain keywords that belong to the RESERVED_KEYWORDS system view. For more information, see
Considerations and Limitations.

553 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Recovery Type
At this step of the wizard, specify whether to restore your database as of a specific data backup, or a point in
time within a data backup.

• Select Recover to a specific data backup to restore the database as of a specific data backup. You can
select the necessary backup at the next step of the wizard.

Note that this action clears all transaction logs stored in the system memory that were not yet saved to
the log backups at the time of backup.

• Select Recover to a specific point in time to restore the database as of a specific point in time.

a. In the Da te field, specify the date and time of the state that you want to restore your database to.

b. From the Time zone drop-down list, select the time zone for the time specified in the Da te field. By
default, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA displays the time zone of the backup server.

The Initialize log area check box is automatically selected and grayed out when you restore your data to
another server, to ensure stable operation of the tenant databases on the target SAP HANA system.

This action removes all log segments in the log area or, in other words, clears the part of the system
memory that temporarily stores transaction logs before they are moved to the log backups. The database
is restored to the latest available log backup before the selected point in time.

554 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Recovery Catalog Options
This step of the wizard is only available if you have selected Recover to a specific data backup at the Specify
Recovery Type step.

At this step of the wizard, you can choose whether to restore SAP HANA data by selecting a full backup from the
backup catalog stored in the Veeam Backup & Replication configuration database, or by using the necessary
backup prefix.

• The Select backup from the catalog option allows you to restore your database from any of the available
full backups stored in the Veeam Backup & Replication configuration database. The backup catalog is
available for both backups made with application backup policies managed by
Veeam Backup & Replication and backup jobs managed by a standalone Veeam Plug -in for SAP HANA.

• The Sp ecify backup without catalog option allows you to restore your database from a backup with the
specified backup prefix. Use this option for backups created with the standalone Veeam Plug-in for SAP
HANA. For more information, see the Database Protection section of the Veeam Plug-ins for Enterprise
Applications Guide.

To specify the backup prefix of the backup you want to use, use the Ba ckup prefix field. If multiple
backups have the same prefix, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA uses the most recent backup associated with
that backup prefix.

555 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Select Backup
This step of the wizard is only available if you have selected Select backup from the catalog at the Specify
Recovery Catalog step.

At this step, select one of the available full data backups to restore your database to an ear lier state.

You can sort the available data backups by their backup IDs, the time they were created and by their size. Note
that the displayed start time of the backups uses the time zone of the backup server.

556 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 8. Specify SYSTEM User Password
This step of the wizard is only available when the target server does not contain a database with the name you
specified at the Specify Database Name step. In this case, the SAP HANA system creates a new tenant database
on the target server and a new SYSTEM user for the tenant database.

At this step, specify a password for this new SYSTEM user. The password policy follows the default SAP HANA
configuration — the password must contain at least 8 characters, one uppercase, one lowercase letter, and one
number.

557 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Multiple Databases
You can restore multiple tenant SAP HANA databases by following one of these scenarios:

• Restoring Latest State

• Restoring Point-in-Time State

• Restoring to Another Server

Restoring Latest State

To restore the latest available state of multiple SAP HANA tenant databases, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select databases to restore.

3. Specify server credentials.

4. Specify system credentials.

5. Specify SYSTEM user password.

558 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the SAP HANA system.

2. On the Sy stem tab, select Restore Database > Restore the latest state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click the server and select Restore latest state to <original_location>.

559 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the sea rch field or sort the databases by name.

NOTE

The system database cannot be added to restore operations containing multiple databases. This is because
you cannot simultaneously restore the system database of an SAP HANA system and its tenant databases —
the SAP HANA system must be offline before you can restore the system database, while tenant databases
require the system to be online during restore.

560 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Server Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA server.

1. In the OS User field, specify the operating system user (<sid>adm).

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the operating system user.

3. In the P rotocol drop-down list, select the protocol that Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will use to connect
to SAP Web Services, which are then used to control the target SAP HANA system.

o Select HTTP S to establish a secure connection to the target server. Selecting this option will import 2
certificates issued by the target server to the backup server (2 certificates per host in multiple -host
systems). The first certificate is used to securely connect to the SAP Control web service and the
second to the SAP Start web service. Before proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for
SAP HANA will prompt you to review each certificate in a separate Certificate Security Alert dialog
box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

561 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Select HTTP only if your backup infrastructure requires minimal security precautions and you want to
quickly restore SAP HANA data. This option does not import any certificates to the b ackup server.

For more information about the ports used to connect to SAP Web Services, see Ports.

562 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify System Credentials
This step of the wizard is only available if you are restoring tenant SAP HANA databases.

At this step, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA system.

1. In the Da tabase user field specify an SAP HANA database user. For more information about the necessary
permissions for this user, see Permissions.

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the database user.

3. Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection to the target SAP HANA system.

o Selecting this option will import a certificate issued by the target server to the backup server. Before
proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will prompt you to review the
certificate in the Certificate Security Alert dialog box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

o Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box to also use a private key generated on
the target SAP HANA system to validate the user of the ba ckup server. Once you import the private
key on the backup server, specify the path to the private key and the passphrase specified when
generating the key.

For more information about how to generate a private client key on the target SAP HANA system, see
the SAP Help Portal.

563 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Note that before you restore a tenant database using SSL, you must have SAP Common Crypto Library
installed on the backup server. For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on
Windows machines, see the SAP Help Portal.

564 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify SYSTEM User Password
This step of the wizard is only available if any of the databases selected at the Select Databases step do not
exist on the target server. In this case, the SAP HANA system creates new tenant databases on the target server
and a new SYSTEM user for the new databases.

At this step, specify a password for this new SYSTEM user. Note that this password app lies to all the databases
created during the restore process.

The password policy follows the default SAP HANA configuration — the password must contain at least 8
characters, one uppercase, one lowercase letter, and one number.

Restoring Point-in-Time State

To restore a point-in-time state of multiple SAP HANA tenant databases, use the Restore wizard.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select databases to restore.

3. Specify server credentials.

4. Specify system credentials.

5. Specify a point in time.

6. Specify SYSTEM user password.

565 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the SAP HANA system.

2. On the Sy stem tab, select Restore Database > Restore point-in-time state to <original_location>.

Alternatively, you can right-click an SAP HANA system and select Restore point-in-time state to
< original_location>.

566 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name.

NOTE

The system database cannot be added to restore operations containing multiple databases. This is because
you cannot simultaneously restore the system database of an SAP HANA system and its tenant databases —
the SAP HANA system must be offline before you can restore the system database, while tenant databases
require the system to be online during restore.

567 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Server Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA server.

1. In the OS User field, specify the operating system user (<sid>adm).

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the operating system user.

3. In the P rotocol drop-down list, select the protocol that Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will use to connect
to SAP Web Services, which are then used to control the target SAP HANA system.

o Select HTTP S to establish a secure connection to the target server. Selecting this option will import 2
certificates issued by the target server to the backup server (2 certificates per host in multiple -host
systems). The first certificate is used to securely connect to the SAP Control web service and the
second to the SAP Start web service. Before proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for
SAP HANA will prompt you to review each certificate in a separate Certificate Security Alert dialog
box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

568 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Select HTTP only if your backup infrastructure requires minimal security precautions and you want to
quickly restore SAP HANA data. This option does not import any certificates to the backup server.

For more information about the ports used to connect to SAP Web Services, see Ports.

569 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify System Credentials
This step of the wizard is only available if you are restoring tenant SAP HANA databases.

At this step, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA system.

1. In the Da tabase user field specify an SAP HANA database user. For more information about the necessary
permissions for this user, see Permissions.

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the database user.

3. Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection to the target SAP HANA system.

o Selecting this option will import a certificate issued by the target server to the backup server. Before
proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will prompt you to review the
certificate in the Certificate Security Alert dialog box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

o Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box to also use a private key generated on
the target SAP HANA system to validate the user of the ba ckup server. Once you import the private
key on the backup server, specify the path to the private key and the passphrase specified when
generating the key.

For more information about how to generate a private client key on the target SAP HANA system, see
the SAP Help Portal.

570 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Note that before you restore a tenant database using SSL, you must have SAP Common Crypto Library
installed on the backup server. For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on
Windows machines, see the SAP Help Portal.

571 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Point in Time
At this step of the wizard, specify a point in time to which you want to restore the selected SAP HANA
databases.

1. In the Da te field, specify the date and time of the state that you want to restore your database to.

2. From the Time zone drop-down list, select the time zone for the time specified in the Da te field. By
default, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA displays the time zone of the backup server.

3. Select the Initialize log area check box to remove all log segments in the log area or, in other words, to
clear the part of the system memory that temporarily stores transaction logs before they are moved to the
log backups. This allows you to restore the database to the latest availa ble log backup before the selected
point in time.

Note that initializing the log area may cause loss of in-memory data, so perform this action only if the log
area is unavailable. If you do not initialize the log area when the log area is unavailable, the restore
operation will fail. To resolve this issue, repeat the restore operation with the Initialize log area check box
selected.

Each database will be restored to the most recent point in time to the one selected in the Da te field. Note that if
any of the databases that you want to restore were first backed up after the specified point in time, their restore
process will fail.

572 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify SYSTEM User Password
This step of the wizard is only available if any of the databases selected at the Select Databases step do not
exist on the target server. In this case, the SAP HANA system creates new tenant databases on the target server
and a new SYSTEM user for the new databases.

At this step, specify a password for this new SYSTEM user. Note that this password applies to all the databases
created during the restore process.

The password policy follows the default SAP HANA configuration — the password must contain at least 8
characters, one uppercase, one lowercase letter, and one number.

Restoring to Another Server

To restore multiple SAP HANA tenant databases to another server, use the Restore wizard.

IMP ORTANT

Before restoring tenant databases to another server, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select databases to restore.

3. Specify server credentials.

4. Specify system credentials.

5. Specify a point in time.

6. Specify SYSTEM user password.

573 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select the SAP HANA system.

2. On the Sy stem tab, select Restore Database > Restore to another server.

Alternatively, you can right-click the system and select Restore to another server.

574 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Databases
At this step of the wizard, select the databases that you want to recover.

To quickly find the necessary databases, use the search field or sort the databases by name.

NOTE

You can only select tenant databases in this window, for the following reasons:

• Restore of the system database to another server is not supported.

• The system database cannot be restored simultaneously with tenant databases — the SAP HANA
system must be offline before you can restore the system database, while tenant databases require
the system to be online during restore.

575 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Server Credentials
At this step of the wizard, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA server.

1. In the Server field, specify the DNS name or IP address of the target SAP HANA server.

2. In the SAP System field, specify the name (SID) of the target SAP HANA system.

3. In the OS User field, specify the operating system user (<sid>adm).

4. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the operating system user.

5. In the P rotocol drop-down list, select the protocol that Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will use to connect
to SAP Web Services, which are then used to control the target SAP HANA system.

o Select HTTP S to establish a secure connection to the target server. Selecting this option will import 2
certificates issued by the target server to the backup server (2 certificates per host in multiple-host
systems). The first certificate is used to securely connect to the SAP Control web service and the
second to the SAP Start web service. Before proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for
SAP HANA will prompt you to review each certificate in a separate Certificate Security Alert dialog
box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

576 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Select HTTP only if you want to quickly restore SAP HANA data and your backup infrastructure
requires minimal security precautions. Selecting this option will not import any certificates from the
target server to the backup server or give any prompts.

For more information about the ports used to connect to SAP Web Services, see Ports.

577 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify System Credentials
At this step, specify the connection parameters for the target SAP HANA system.

1. In the Da tabase user field specify an SAP HANA database user. For more information about the necessary
permissions for this user, see Permissions.

2. In the P a ssword field, specify the password for the database user.

3. Select the Use SSL check box to establish a secure SSL connection to the target SAP HANA system.

o Selecting this option will import a certificate issued by the target server to the backup server. Before
proceeding with the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA will prompt you to review the
certificate in the Certificate Security Alert dialog box.

▪ Select the Do not p rompt for connections to <host_name:port> check box if you want to use the
certificate in future restore operations to the specified server. The certificate thumbprint will be
saved to a configuration file on the backup server, located in
%UserProfile%\AppData\Local\Veeam\Backup\SapHanaExplorer\Config.xml.

▪ Click View Certificate... to see more details about the imported certificate.

o Select the P rivate k ey is required for this connection check box to also use a private key generated on
the target SAP HANA system to validate the user of the backup server. Once you import the private
key on the backup server, specify the path to the private key and the passphrase specified when
generating the key.

For more information about how to generate a private client key on the target SAP HANA system, see
the SAP Help Portal.

578 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Note that before you restore a tenant database using SSL, you must have SAP Common Crypto Library
installed on the backup server. For more information about how to install SAP Common Crypto Library on
Windows machines, see the SAP Help Portal.

579 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Point in Time
At this step of the wizard, specify a point in time to which you want to restore the selected SAP HANA
databases.

1. In the Da te field, specify the date and time of the state that you want to restore your databases to.

2. From the Time zone drop-down list, select the time zone for the time specified in the Da te field. By
default, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA displays the time zone of the backup server.

The Initialize log area check box is automatically selected and grayed out when you restore your data to
another server, to ensure stable operation of the tenant databases on the target SAP HANA system.

This action removes all log segments in the log area or, in other words, clears the part of the system
memory that temporarily stores transaction logs before they are moved to the log backups. The database
is restored to the latest available log backup before the selected point in time.

Each database will be restored to the most recent point in time to the one s elected in the Da te field. Note that if
any of the databases that you want to restore were first backed up after the specified point in time, their restore
process will fail.

580 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify SYSTEM User Password
This step of the wizard is only available if any of the databases selected at the Select Databases step do not
exist on the target server. In this case, the SAP HANA system creates new tenant databases on the target server
and a new SYSTEM user for the new databases.

At this step, specify a password for this new SYSTEM user. Note that this password applies to all the databases
created during the restore process.

The password policy follows the default SAP HANA configuration — the password must contain at least 8
characters, one uppercase, one lowercase letter, and one number.

581 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Managing Restore Session
After you finish the steps of the Restore wizard, Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA starts a restore session.

Under the Restore node in the upper part of the navigation pane, you can find the databases with an ongoing
restore process. Click a database to get a more detailed overview of the progress of its restore process in the
preview pane.

If a database is successfully restored or its restore process is canceled, it moves to the Comp leted node in the
bottom section of the navigation pane.

At this step, you can also manually retry the restore session if something interrupts it, or cancel the session.

Retrying Restore
If anything disrupts the restore process (the target server crashes or the network is down), you can launch the
retry manually after the server or network is up. You cannot manually launch retry of an ongoing restore
session.

To retry one or all ongoing restore sessions, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, click the Restore node to select all ongoing restore sessions, or select the relevant
database.

2. On the Restore tab, select Retry.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Restore node or the relevant database and select Retry.

Canceling Restore
To cancel one or all ongoing restore sessions, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, click the Restore node to select all ongoing restore sessions, or select the relevant
database.

582 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. On the Restore tab, select Ca ncel.

Alternatively, you can right-click the Restore node or the relevant database and select Ca ncel.

NOTE

Consider the following:

• Canceling a restore session of a tenant database will leave the database on the target server in an
inconsistent state. A new recovery process will be necessary to resolve the situation.
• Canceling the restore session of the system database is not supported.

583 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for SAP HANA, you can visit Veeam R&D Forums or
submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Enabling Extended Logging.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

584 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to restore and export Microsoft Ex change data from
backups, snapshot replicas, CDP replicas, VeeamZIP backups or storage snapshots created by
Veeam Backup & Replication. You can also restore and export Microsoft Exchange data from backups created by
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

NOTE
Data recovery from CDP replicas is available starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1.

585 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
You can configure your environment before you start using Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

586 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

The set of supported Microsoft Exchange versions depends on the product Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Exchange is installed with: Veeam Backup & Replication or Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

P roduct Requirement

Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange supports restore of the following
Microsoft Exchange versions:

• Microsoft Exchange 2019

• Microsoft Exchange 2016
• Microsoft Exchange 2013

Veeam Backup for Microsoft Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange supports restore of the following
365 Microsoft Exchange versions:
• Microsoft 365 Exchange Online

Microsoft 365 and Office 365 service families, standalone services

and plans for Business, Education, and Government* hosted by
Microsoft are supported. For more information about system
requirements and limitations for Microsoft 365, see this Microsoft
article.
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2019 (on-premises)
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2016 (on-premises)
• Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 (on-premises)

*Government support is experimental. For more information on Veeam experimental support, see this Veeam KB article.

Consider the following:

• To work with database files, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange requires a dynamic link library ese.dll
supplied with Microsoft Exchange. The ese.dll file must be of the same version as that of Microsoft
Exchange in which database files were created.

• To restore mailbox items from a server running Microsoft Windows ReFS, the backup server or
Veeam Backup & Replication console must be installed on a machine that runs Microsoft Windows Server
2012 or later.

• To restore mailbox items from a server running Microsoft Windows ReFS 3.x, the backup server or
Veeam Backup & Replication console must be installed on a machine that runs Microsoft Windows Server
2016 or later, and the ReFS version must be supported on this machine.

• To restore data that was backed up by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 using PowerShell, make sure to
install Windows PowerShell 5.1 or later.

587 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following tables list network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

Backup

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup Source TCP, UDP 135, 137 to Ports used to deploy the runtime
server, guest Windows 139, 445 coordination process on the source
interaction machine with machine.
proxy Microsoft
(Enterprise Exchange
and TCP 6005 to The dynamic RPC range that is used by
Enterprise 65535 the runtime coordination process which is
Plus editions) deployed on the source machine for
application-aware processing (when
working over the network).

Note: Microsoft Exchange (in particular,

Client Access) expands standard Windows
dynamic RPC port range to provide better
scalability. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

Source Backup TCP 6005 to The dynamic RPC range that is used by
Windows server, guest 65535 the runtime coordination process which is
machine with interaction deployed on the source machine for
Microsoft proxy application-aware processing (when
Exchange (Enterprise working over the network).
and
Enterprise Note: Microsoft Exchange (in particular,
Plus editions) Client Access) expands standard Windows
dynamic RPC port range to provide better
scalability. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

NOTE

Configuring dynamic RPC range is not required when using default Microsoft Windows firewall settings as
Veeam Backup & Replication automatically creates an associated firewall rule for the runtime process
during installation. When using custom firewall settings or if application-aware processing fails with the
RPC function call failed error, make sure to configure dynamic RPC ports manually. For more information,
see this Microsoft article.

588 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Backup server, Target Microsoft TCP 443 Port used for Microsoft Exchange
Veeam Backup & Replication Exchange web services connections.
console 2013/2016/2019
CAS server

589 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Exchange and recover Microsoft Exchange data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange must meet
E x change launch the following requirements:
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam
Restore Operator role on the backup server.

Restore to Microsoft 365 and To restore data to Microsoft 365 and on-premises Microsoft Exchange
on-p remises Microsoft organizations, you must grant the following roles and permissions to user
E x change accounts:

Restore to Public Folder Using Basic Authentication Method

• The account must own a mailbox on a target Microsoft Exchange
server.
• The account must be a member of the Organization Management
role group on a target Microsoft Exchange server. See Adding User
Account to Organization Management Role Group.
• [For restore of In-Place Hold Items to the original location] If the In-
Place Hold Items folder already exists, make sure the account being
used can create, modify and delete items. If the In-Place Hold Items
folder does not exist, the account being used must be able to create
folders under the All Public Folders root node.

Restore to Mailbox Using Basic Authentication Method

• If the account owns a mailbox, make sure it has Full Access .

• If the account does not own a mailbox, then access must be granted
through impersonation. See Granting Full Access.

Restore Using Modern Authentication Method

The account used to log in to Microsoft 365 must be assigned the following
roles:
• ApplicationImpersonation role. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.
• Global Administrator or Exchange Administrator role.

Also make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD
application used for restore. For more information, see the Configuring
Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

590 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Compare Data with Production The Veeam Backup account must have a valid Exchange Online license and
E nvironment an active mailbox within the Microsoft 365 organization.

Examples
Adding User Account to Organization Management Role Group
To add user account to the Organization Management role group, use the following cmdlet:

Add-RoleGroupMember "Organization Management" –Member "<user_account>"

For more information about the Add-RoleGroupMember cmdlet, see this Microsoft article.

Granting Full Access

To grant Full Access to the account that owns a mailbox, use the following cmdlet:

Add-MailboxPermission –Identity "<target_mailbox>" -User "<user_account>" -Acce

ssRights FullAccess –InheritanceType All

For more information about the Add-MailboxPermission cmdlet, see this Microsoft article.

To grant Full Access to the account that does not own a mailbox (in particular, through impersonation), use the
following cmdlet:

New-ManagementRoleAssignment -Name "<role_name>" -Role ApplicationImpersonation

-User "<user_account>"

For more information about the New-ManagementRoleAssignment cmdlet, see this Microsoft article.

Recalling Given Permissions

To recall given access level, run one of the following cmdlets:

Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment "<role_name>"

Remove-ManagementRoleAssignment -Identity "<role_name>"

591 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
This requirement applies to backup jobs, replication jobs, and CDP policies created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

When you create a job or CDP policy, make sure to enable application-aware processing in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console:

• When you configure a backup job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Backup Job wizard.

• When you configure a replication job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Replication Job wizard.

• When you configure a CDP policy, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the New
CDP Policy wizard.

Note that when you create storage snapshots, application-aware processing is automatically enabled. For more
information, see the Application Item Restore from Storage Snapshots section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

NOTE

By default, Exchange transaction logs will be truncated upon successful backup. To keep transaction logs
for further processing by a 3rd party application, select the Exchange server VM from the lis t, click E d it and
on the General tab select P erform copy only.

Support for Database Availability Groups (DAG)

Veeam Backup & Replication supports any configuration of DAGs. In particular, having all the databases active
on a single node or with the active databases on each node. Transaction logs will be truncated on all DAG
members.

For more information and recommendations, see the following articles:

• How to virtualize and protect Exchange 2016

• Veeam Knowledge Base article

592 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and limitations of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

General
• When Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange is installed on a server on which both
Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings
will be inherited from the Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange does not support data recovery using a group Managed Service
Account (gMSA) to connect to the target server.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange supports data
recovery from CDP replicas. Consider the following limitations:

o When you recover your data from CDP replicas, you can only use long -term (both application-
consistent and crash-consistent) restore points. Short-term restore points are not supported.

o You can recover your data from a CDP replica if its CDP policy is currently running. During recovery,
the CDP policy does not create new long-term restore points and does not delete existing ones.
Short-term restore points are still created.

o You cannot restore application items from a CDP replica in parallel with guest OS file restore,
SureReplica, and failover.

Restore
• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange does not support restore using PowerShell Direct, VIX API or
vSphere Automation API.

• Sending objects that exceed 3 MB in size may fail. To fix this issue, install this Microsoft update.

• Bulk restore (restore of multiple objects) is not supported for public folder mailboxes. Use the regular
per-object restore instead.

• Mailboxes can be restored only to mailboxes of the same type. For example, a user mailbox to a user
mailbox, an archive mailbox to an archive mailbox.

• To restore In-Place Hold Items or Litigation Hold Items to the original location, consider the following:

o In-Place Hold Items restore is not supported for On-Premises Exchange Server 2013 due to EWS
limitations.

o To restore In-Place Hold Items of Exchange 2016 mailboxes, these mailboxes must have In-Place Hold
enabled and applied at least once with DiscoveryHolds system folder creation. Otherwise, restore will
fail with the following error:

" Failed to restore In-Place Hold Items. Restore of In-Place Hold Items into Exchange 2013 is not
supported ".
For information on enabling In-Place Hold and Litigation Hold , see this Microsoft article.

• [For Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange that comes with Veeam Backup & Replication] Restore of an
entire mailbox or selected mailbox items to the original location is available with Veeam Universal License.
When using a legacy socket-based license, the Enterprise or Enterprise Plus editions of
Veeam Backup & Replication is required.

593 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • [For restore from Veeam Backup & Replication backups] If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange
comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 installation, you cannot restore your
Microsoft Exchange data by default. To enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup & Replication
Enterprise edition or higher on the machine.

NOTE

To use an internet proxy server to restore backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365, make sure
to provide appropriate proxy server address and the port number. To do this, go to the Control Panel >
Internet Options Connections tab, click LAN Settings, select the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box
and specify a proxy server you want to use. Credentials for such a proxy (if needed) will be taken from the
Control Panel > Credential Manager > W indows Credentials console.

Consider that this functionality is only available in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange that comes as
part of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 installation package.

Export
• Export is available if you have a 64-bit version of Microsoft Outlook 2010 or later installed on a computer
with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

NOTE

For Outlook for Microsoft 365, only the Semi-Annual Enterprise Channel is supported. For more
information, see this Microsoft article.

• To avoid conflicts during export, make sure to exclude PST files from the indexing scope. Oftentimes
conflicts may occur due to a file you are exporting is being indexed at the same time. When exporting to
shared folders, exclude Outlook files or disable Windows search on the des tination computer.

594 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange and load Exchange data, you can use either of the following
methods:

• Use the Restore application item option to load Exchange data from a restore point created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

For more information, see the Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

• Go to Sta rt, click Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange and manually open Microsoft Exchange
databases. For more information, see Standalone Databases and External Servers.

If you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of a server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform restore operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange must be run with
elevated permissions. The user account must be a member of the local Administrators group on
the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange is running, select Use
W ind ows session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

595 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
The user interface of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange is designed to let you quickly find commands that
you need to restore and export Microsoft Exchange data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 and Veeam Backup & Replication.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings. For more information, see General
Application Settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange wizard or window. You will
then be redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains operation commands organized into logical groups represented as tabs.
The ribbon menu is displayed at the top of the main application window.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of folders with backed -up data.
Also, it allows you to search for mailboxes using keywords.

596 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which provides search capabilities and allows you to view details about items that are
contained in a folder you have selected in the navigation pane.

597 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange to view the contents of a backup file, open messages,
search for mailboxes and for items in a backup file as well as customize criteria of your search.

Searching for Mailboxes

You can use keywords to search for mailboxes in the database structure containing your Exchange obj ects. To do
this, enter a search query in the search field at the top of the navigation pane.

To remove a keyword, click the cross mark.

Browsing Backup Content

To view the contents of a backup file, you use the navigation pane which shows you the database structure
containing your Exchange objects.

598 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After you select an object in the navigation pane, you can see its content in the preview pane.

Opening Messages
To open a message, right-click a message in the preview pane and select Op en. You can also double-click a
message:

• To show message headers, click Show message headers.

• To open attachments, double-click an attachment.

• To save attachments, right-click an attachment and select Sa ve as.

599 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Searching for Objects in Backup File
The search mechanism allows you to find items matching specified search criteria.

To search for required items, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an object in which you want to find data.

2. Enter a search query in the search field at the top of the preview pane.

Consider the following:

• You can use double quotes to find the exact phrase. For example, "Microsoft 365" .

• You can narrow search results by specifying various search criteria using the criteria:value format. For
more information about search parameters, see this section of REST API Reference. For example,
from:[email protected].

• You can use logical upper-cased operators such as AND, OR and NOT along with wildcard characters such
as * and ?.

For example:

o meeting AND from:[email protected] — returns messages that include both specified

keywords.

o meeting OR from:[email protected] — returns messages that include one of the specified

keywords.

o NOT from:[email protected] — excludes messages specified by a keyword.

o subject:set* — returns all messages with the subject that contains words started with set.

o ?all — returns all messages that contain the specified keyword with any alphabet in the first position.

Using Advanced Find

The Ad vanced Find mechanism allows you to define your search criteria more precisely.

600 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

For example, to find messages with the subject Notes, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select a node and click Ad vanced Find on the ribbon.

2. In the Define search criteria section, select Ca tegory > All fields.

3. From the Field list, select Sub ject.

4. From the Condition list, select conta ins.

5. In the Va lue field, specify a substring to look for.

6. Click Ad d to List and then click Sta rt.

To remove a filter, click the cross mark on the left. To remove all configured filters, click Reset.

601 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
You can configure general settings for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

602 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Extensible Storage Engine
To work with database files, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange requires a dynamic link library ese.dll
which is distributed with Microsoft Exchange.

The ese.dll file must be of the same version as the Microsoft Exchange application that was used to create a
database. When restoring a VM that was backed up with application-aware image processing, the ese.dll file
will be located automatically.

To specify the path to the ese.dll file, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the E x tensible Storage E ngine tab.

3. Click the link next to the Microsoft Exchange version and specify the path to the ese.dll file.

This file can be found on the Microsoft Exchange server distribution CD in the
X:\Setup\ServerRoles\Common\ese.dll directory or in the installation directory of the Microsoft Exchange
server.

4. Click OK.

603 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Mail Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to send Exchange items that are located in a backup by email
and deliver export reports.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange sends email messages on behalf of your Google or M icrosoft 365
account using OAuth 2.0 Authorization Framework, or you can specify connection settings of an SMTP server
that uses basic authentication.

For more information, see the following sections:

• SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

• Google Account

• Microsoft 365 Account

SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

To configure sending email messages using an SMTP server with basic authentication, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select SMTP server (basic authentication) .

5. Click Ad vanced to configure advanced settings. You can do the following:

o Specify a port number of an SMTP server that you want to use.

The default port number is 25. If you want to use SSL data encryption, specify port 587.

o Select the Connect using SSL check box to establish a secure connection.

o If an SMTP server requires an authentication for outgoing mail, select the The SMTP server requires
a uthentication check box and provide authentication credentials.

6. In the SMTP server field, specify the address of a server that you want to use as an SMTP server.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange establishes a connection to the smtp.office365.com
server.

7. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

8. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Exchange sends a test email message.

604 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 9. Click Send to send a test email message.

10. Click OK.

Google Account
You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange to send email messages on behalf of your Google
account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange communicates with the Gmail API.
For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange uses an access token issued by Google Authorization
Server. To acquire an access token, you can either use an application preinstalled by
Veeam Backup & Replication or specify OAuth 2.0 client credentials of the custom application registered in the
Google Cloud console. For more information on obtaining client credentials, see Registering Application in
Google Cloud Console.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Google account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Google Gmail (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Sig n in with Google and enter
credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Sig n in with
Goog le and enter credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Exchange sends a test email message.

605 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Google account,
specify a new email address in the From field and click Sig n in with Google.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Goog le Gmail Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify the following:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify specify the obtained client ID.

2. In the Client secret field, specify the client secret.

Registering Application in Google Cloud Console

To register an application in the Google Cloud console, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Google Cloud console under a Google account that you want to use for sending emails.

606 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Create a new project and enable Gmail API for the project.

You can do this with the Google setup tool.

3. Configure OAuth consent screen for your project.

4. Create the OAuth 2.0 client ID credentials — a client ID and client secret for the custom application.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Client ID

o Client secret

Microsoft 365 Account

You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange to send email notifications on behalf of your
Microsoft 365 account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange communicates with the
Microsoft Graph API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange uses an access token issued by
the Microsoft identity platform. To acquire an access token, you can either use an application preinstalled by
Veeam Backup & Replication or specify details of the custom Azure AD application registered in the Azure
portal. For more information on obtaining client credentials, see Registering Application in Azure Portal.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Microsoft 365 (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Authorize now and enter
credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Authorize
now and enter credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Exchange sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

607 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Microsoft 365
account, specify a new email address in the From field and click Re-a uthorize.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Microsoft 365 Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify an identification number of your Azure AD application.

You can find this number in an application settings in your Azure Active Directory. For more information,
see this Microsoft article.

2. In the Tena nt ID field, specify Azure Active Directory tenant ID.

Registering Application in Azure Portal

To register an application in the Azure portal, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Azure portal using an account that you want to use for sending emails. The account must
have an active subscription.

2. Register an application. For more information on registering applications, see this Microsoft article.

608 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Select AP I permissions and grant the application the Mail.Send permission of the Application type for the
Microsoft Graph API.

4. Select Authentication > P latform configurations > Ad d a platform > Configure p latforms > Mobile and
d esktop applications and specify http://localhost as a redirect URI. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Directory (tenant) ID

o Application (client) ID

609 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Advanced Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to configure advanced settings such as extended logging
mode, pop-up notifications and PST size availability.

To configure advanced settings, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ad vanced tab.

3. If you want to see the estimated size of the Outlook database file in the status bar, select the Show P ST
size estimation in status bar check box.

4. If you want to enable extended logging mode to collect logs that contain additional information on
specific operations, select the E na ble extended logging check box. After enabling extended logging mode,
you can go back to the application and perform actions for which you want to collect additional
information. Then you can collect logs. For more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

5. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange displays notifications when loading backups created
by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 from object storage. If you want to disable these notifications, clear
the Show p op-up notifications on startup check box.

6. Click OK.

610 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Standalone Databases and External Servers
You can add standalone databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange scope as well as connect to a
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server or service provider server to view backups located on these servers.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange supports adding databases created with the following Microsoft
Exchange versions:

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2019

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2016

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

611 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Microsoft Exchange Databases
You can add Microsoft Exchange databases to the application scope manually.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange supports adding databases created with the following Microsoft
Exchange versions:

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2019

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2016

• Microsoft Exchange Server 2013

NOTE

Consider the following:

• Before adding databases, make sure that Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange has access to the
ese.dll file. For more information, see Extensible Storage Engine.
• If a database is in Dirty State, you will need to recover it by applying log files. Click Recover and wait
until log files are applied, then re-add the database. Make sure that the W rite permission is granted
to the account being used.
• Make sure you have disabled the Veeam Backup Proxy for Microsoft Office 365 service when adding
local databases. You can stop this service by using the services.msc console. If you try to add a
database having this service still in progress, you will receive an error message and will not be able
to access the database due to database lock.

To manually add a Microsoft Exchange database, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Store > Microsoft Exchange mailbox database on the ribbon.

o Right-click the All Stores node and select Ad d Microsoft Exchange mailbox database.

2. Click Browse to specify the path to the .edb or .adb file and Exchange logs folder.

612 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server
In Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange, you can connect to a Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server to view
backups located on this server.

To connect to a Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Store > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server on the ribbon.

o Right-click the All Stores node and select Ad d Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server.

2. Specify a server name or IP address and enter credentials to access the specified server.

Select the Use W indows session authentication check box to connect with the user account under which
you are currently logged in.

3. Click Connect.

613 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service
Provider
In Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange, you can connect to a service provider server to add it s backups to the
application scope and perform data recovery operations directly from such backups.

NOTE

Make sure that both Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange and Veeam Backup & Replication are installed
on the same server and at least one service provider is added to Veeam Backup & Replication. For more
information, see the Connecting to Service Providers section of the Veeam Cloud Connect Guide.

To add Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service providers, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Store > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider on the ribbon.

o Right-click the All Stores node and select Ad d Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider.

2. From the Select service provider and authentication method drop-down list, select a service provider that
you want to add and select an authentication method that can be either Modern authentication or Basic
authentication.

3. [For Modern authentication] Select a region to which a Microsoft 365 organization of the selected service
provider belongs.

4. [For Modern authentication] Copy the device code and use it to sign in to Azure Active Directory.

For Basic authentication, you must enter a user name and password to connect to the service provider
server.

NOTE

You cannot use Basic authentication to load backups if a Microsoft 365 organization has been added
to the service provider infrastructure using Modern authentication.

5. Select a point-in-time state as of which you want to load Microsoft 365 backups.

To select a point in time, use the calendar control.

6. Select the Show items that have been deleted by user check box to see all the items that were removed.

7. Select the Show a ll versions of items that have b een modified by user check box if you want to load
modified versions.

614 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. Click Connect.

615 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Removing Stores
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to remove an Exchange store from the application scope
when you no longer need it.

To remove a store from the application scope, right-click a store in the navigation pane and select Remove
store.

616 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore from Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 Backups
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to perform granular restore of Microsof t Exchange data. You
can restore data of mailboxes and mailbox folders as well as specific emails, calendar items, contacts, tasks,
notes, journal items, and so on.

You can restore Microsoft Exchange data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to the
original location or other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-premises Microsoft organizations.

Consider the following:

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365, the
backup content is loaded automatically when you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of Veeam Backup & Replication, add a
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server. For more information, see Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 Server.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

617 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

1-Click Restore
The 1-Click Restore feature allows you to quickly restore Exchange mailboxes, folders and items according to
the following:

• The original Exchange server, original folder and the original mailbox name are restored.

• Both changed and missing items are restored.

• Restored items are marked as unread.

• No folders are excluded.

You can use 1-Click Restore when you do not want to configure a restore session and prefer to restore data with
the default settings.

Restoring to Microsoft 365 Organizations

To perform 1-Click Restore to Microsoft 365 organizations, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify a user account to impersonate with a public folder mailbox.

618 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

619 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
Modern authentication allows Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore.
Such an application is used to restore the specified mailbox, folder or item back to Microsoft 365 organizations
with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information,
see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Starting from Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange build 7.1.0.2031, you can also use modern authentication
with Azure AD application certificate, in addition to the existing modern authentication with one -time
authentication code.

Using Modern Authentication with One-Time Authentication Code

To use modern authentication with an one-time authentication code, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (one-time
password) .

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Using Modern Authentication with Azure AD Application Certificate

NOTE

If Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup & Replication
installation, modern authentication with Azure AD application certificate is not available by default. To
enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 on the machine.

620 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To use modern authentication with the Azure AD application certificate, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (certificate-based) .

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that y ou want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

3. Click Select to specify an SSL certificate that you want to use for data exchange between Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft Exchange and the specified Azure AD application.

4. In the Select Certificate wizard, select a certificate. For more information, see Installing SSL Certificates.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

621 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Enter credentials to connect to the Exchange organization and click Restore.

Make sure that the account that you use has both the Exchange Administrator and the Global
Administrator roles.

622 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) option at the
previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has both the ApplicationImpersonation and the Exchange
Administrator roles. For more information, see this Microsoft article.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Restore.

623 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Impersonation Account
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (certificate-based) option at the
Select Authentication Method step. Note that this step is only available for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Exchange that comes with the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 installation.

If you want to restore your data to a public folder mailbox, you can optionally specify a user account to
impersonate with this public folder mailbox.

Restoring to On-Premises Microsoft Servers

To perform 1-Click Restore to on-premises Microsoft servers, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a user account.

624 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

625 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify User Account
At this step of the wizard, specify an account that you want to use to connect to the Exchange server.

NOTE

This step of the wizard is only available in the following cases:

• When the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange is opened and the Microsoft
Exchange server belong to different domains.
• When the account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange does not exist on the domain
of the Microsoft Exchange server.

626 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations
You can restore data to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and
security defaults.

When you restore your data with this option, you can specify a target mailb ox, select an authentication method
that you want to use, specify a target folder to which you want to restore data and configure restore options.

You can also use 1-Click Restore if you do not want to configure a restore session and prefer to restore your data
using the default settings.

Restoring Single Mailbox, Folder or Item

To restore a single mailbox, folder or item, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target mailbox.

3. Select an authentication method.

4. Log in to Microsoft 365.

5. Specify a user account to impersonate with a public folder mailbox.

6. Specify a CAS server.

7. Specify a target folder.

8. Specify restore options.

627 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to.

o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to.

628 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Mailbox
At this step of the wizard, specify the target mailbox and mailbox location.

To specify mailbox settings, do the following:

1. In the Ma ilbox field, enter a mailbox name to which you want to restore data.

You can specify any name that you want. You can also restore a ma ilbox to a different organization. For
example, you have backed up a mailbox [email protected] . To restore such a mailbox to
a different organization, you can specify, for example, [email protected] to restore a
mailbox to the xyz.onmicrosoft.com organization.

2. Select Microsoft 365 to restore the specified mailbox to an Exchange Online organization with enabled
multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see
the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

You can also restore data from backups created for Exchange Online organizations to on-premises
Microsoft Exchange servers and vice versa. For more information, see Restore to On-Premises Microsoft
Servers.

629 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
Modern authentication allows Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore.
Such an application is used to restore the specified mailbox, folder or item back to Microsoft 365 organizations
with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information,
see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Starting from Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange build 7.1.0.2031, you can also use modern authentication
with Azure AD application certificate, in addition to the existing modern authentication with one-time
authentication code.

Using Modern Authentication with One-Time Authentication Code

To use modern authentication with an one-time authentication code, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (one-time
password) .

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your Exchange Online organization belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your Exchange Online organization.

Make sure that the organization name matches the name specified at the previous step of the wizard.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

630 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Using Modern Authentication with Azure AD Application Certificate

NOTE

If Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup & Replication
installation, modern authentication with Azure AD application certificate is not available by default. To
enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 on the machine.

To use modern authentication with the Azure AD application certificate, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (certificate-based) .

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your Exchange Online organization belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your Exchange Online organization.

Make sure that the organization name matches the name specified at the previous step of the wizard.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

5. Click Select to specify an SSL certificate that you want to use for data exchange between Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft Exchange and the specified Azure AD application.

6. In the Select Certificate wizard, select a certificate. For more information, see Installing SSL Certificates.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

631 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Enter credentials to connect to the Exchange organization.

Make sure that the account that you use has both the Exchange Administrator and the Global
Administrator roles.

632 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) option at the
previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

633 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Impersonation Account
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (certificate-based) option at the
Select Authentication Method step.

If you want to restore your data to a public folder mailbox, you can op tionally specify a user account to
impersonate with this public folder mailbox.

634 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify CAS Server and Target Folder
This step is only available if you have selected the Basic Authentication option at the Select Authentication
Method step.

At this step of the wizard, specify a CAS server and provide a folder to which you want to restore data. You can
restore data to the original folder or specify a custom folder.

To provide a CAS server and target folder, do the following:

1. Specify a CAS server name or IP address.

This field is populated automatically with the CAS server address from your domain. You can also enter a
CAS server manually.

2. Select a folder to which you want to restore data. You can restore data to the original folder or specify a
custom folder.

When you select to restore to a custom folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange checks if the
specified folder exists, if not, it creates a folder automatically. For example, if you specify a path li ke
Folder1/Folder2/Folder3, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange will restore your data to the Folder3.
You can use both the slash ("/") and the backslash ("\") characters when specifying a path.

635 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Target Folder
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) or the Modern
authentication (certificate-based) option at the Select Authentication Method step.

At this step of the wizard, select a target folder to which you want to restore the specified mailbox. You can
restore data to the original folder or specify a custom folder.

When you select to restore to a custom folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange checks if the specified
folder exists, if not, it creates a folder automatically. For example, if you specify a path like
Folder1/Folder2/Folder3, Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 will restore your data to the Folder3. You can use
both the slash ("/") and the backslash ("\") characters when specifying a path.

636 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 8. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that have been changed. When you select this option,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange overwrites existing items in your target location.

• Missing Items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that are missing in your target location. For example,
some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

• Ma rk restored items as unread

Select this check box if you want to mark each restored item as unread.

If you restore a mailbox, to prevent certain folders from being restored, click the E x clude folders link and select
folders to exclude.

NOTE

The E x clude folders link is not available when restoring folders and items.

Restoring Multiple Mailboxes

This scenario is only available for data restore from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

To restore multiple Exchange mailboxes, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Select mailboxes to restore.

637 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 5. Select restore options.

638 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do one the following:

• In the navigation pane, select an organization whose mailboxes you want to restore, and on the Home tab,
click Restore Mailboxes.

• In the navigation pane, right-click an organization and select Restore mailboxes.

639 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
Modern authentication allows Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore.
Such an application is used to restore the specified mailboxes back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled
multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Starting from Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange build 7.1.0.2031, you can also use modern authentication
with Azure AD application certificate, in addition to the existing modern authentication with one-time
authentication code.

Using Modern Authentication with One-Time Authentication Code

To use modern authentication with an one-time authentication code, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (one-time
password) .

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Using Modern Authentication with Azure AD Application Certificate

NOTE

If Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup & Replication
installation, modern authentication with Azure AD application certificate is not available by default. To
enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 on the machine.

640 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To use modern authentication with the Azure AD application certificate, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (certificate-based).

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

3. Click Select to specify an SSL certificate that you want to use for data exchange between Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft Exchange and the specified Azure AD application.

4. In the Select Certificate wizard, select a certificate. For more information, see Installing SSL Certificates.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

641 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the Exchange organization.

Make sure that the account that you use has both the Exchange Administrator and the Global
Administrator roles.

642 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) option at the
previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

643 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Select Mailboxes to Restore
At this step of the wizard, select mailboxes that you want to restore.

To see the full email address in the E ma il column, click Resolve selected mailboxes.

644 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Select Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that have been changed. When you select this option,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange overwrites existing items in your target location.

• Missing Items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that are missing in your target location. For example,
some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

• Ma rk restored items as unread

Select this check box if you want to mark each restored item as unread.

When restoring multiple mailboxes, select the Finish the restore of recent items before restoring the remaining
items check box and set the value in the Restore items for the last <N> days first field to restore multiple
mailboxes in "chunks", when the most recent items in the backup will be processed first.

To prevent certain folders from being restored, click the E x clude folders link and select folders to exclude.

645 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers
You can restore data to on-premises Microsoft Exchange servers.

When you restore your Exchange data with this option, you can specify a target mailbox, specify a target folder
to which you want to restore data and configure restore options.

You can also use 1-Click Restore if you do not want to configure a restore session and prefer to restore your data
using the default settings.

To restore a single mailbox, folder or item, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target mailbox.

3. Specify a user account.

4. Specify a CAS server and target folder.

5. Specify restore options.

646 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to.

o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to.

647 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Mailbox
At this step of the wizard, specify the target mailbox and mailbox location.

To specify mailbox settings, do the following:

1. In the Ma ilbox field, enter a mailbox name to which you want to restore data.

2. Select On-p remises Microsoft Exchange Server to restore the specified mailbox to an on-premises
Microsoft Exchange organization. For more information, see the Adding On-Premises Microsoft
Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

You can also restore from backups created for on-premises Microsoft Exchange organizations to Exchange
Online organizations and vice versa. For more information, see Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations.

648 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify User Account
At this step of the wizard, specify an account that you want to use to connect to the Exchange server in your
domain.

649 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify CAS Server and Target Folder
At this step of the wizard, specify a CAS server and provide a folder to which you want to restore data. You can
restore your data to the original folder or specify a custom folder.

To provide a CAS server and target folder, do the following:

1. Specify a CAS server name or IP address.

This field is populated automatically with the CAS server address from your domain. You can also enter a
CAS server manually.

2. Select a folder to which you want to restore data. You can restore your data to the original folder or
specify a custom folder.

When you select to restore to a custom folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange checks if the
specified folder exists, if not, it creates a folder automatically. For example, if you specify a path like
Folder1/Folder2/Folder3, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange will restore your data to the Folder3.
You can use both the slash ("/") and the backslash ("\") characters when specifying a path.

650 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that have been changed. When you select this option,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange overwrites existing items in your target location.

• Missing Items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that are missing in your target location. For example,
some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

• Ma rk restored items as unread

Select this check box if you want to mark each restored item as unread.

If you restore a mailbox, to prevent certain folders from being restored, click E x clude folders and select folders
to exclude.

NOTE

The E x clude folders link is not available when restoring folders and items.

651 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore from Veeam Backup & Replication
Backups
You can restore Microsoft Exchange data from backups created by Veeam Backup & Replication to the original
location or other on-premises Microsoft organizations and Microsoft 365 organizations.

Consider the following:

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of Veeam Backup & Replication, the backup
content is loaded automatically when you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange.

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 installation, you cannot restore from Veeam Backup & Replication backups by default. To enable this
functionality, install Veeam Backup & Replication on the machine and add a Microsoft Exchange database.
For more information, see Adding Microsoft Exchange Databases.

You can get the EDB or ADB files directly from the original Microsoft Exchange machine, or you can use
Veeam Backup & Replication to restore guest OS files of the machine. For more information, see the
Restore from Microsoft Windows File Systems (FAT, NTFS or ReFS) section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

652 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

1-Click Restore
The 1-Click Restore feature allows you to quickly restore Exchange mailboxes, folders and items according to
the following:

• The original Exchange server, original folder and the original mailbox name are restored.

• Both changed and missing items are restored.

• Restored items are marked as unread.

• No folders are excluded.

You can use 1-Click Restore when you do not want to configure a restore session and prefer to restore data with
the default settings.

IMP ORTANT

1-Click Restore from Veeam Backup & Replication backups is only available if the following conditions are
met:

• The machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange is opened must be within the same
domain as the Microsoft Exchange server.
• The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange must exist within the same domain
as the Microsoft Exchange server.

Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to <mailbox_name>.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to <mailbox_name>.

653 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to
< ma ilbox_name>.

654 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers
You can restore data to on-premises Microsoft Exchange servers.

When you restore your data with this option, you can specify a target mailbox, specify a target folder to which
you want to restore data and configure restore options.

You can also use 1-Click Restore if you do not want to configure a restore session and prefer to restore your data
using the default settings.

Restoring Single Mailbox, Folder or Item

To restore a single mailbox, folder or item, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target mailbox.

3. Specify a user account.

4. Specify a CAS server and target folder.

5. Specify restore options.

655 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to.

o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to.

656 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Mailbox
At this step of the wizard, specify the target mailbox and mailbox location.

To specify mailbox settings, do the following:

1. In the Ma ilbox field, enter a mailbox name to which you want to restore data.

2. Select On-p remises Microsoft Exchange Server to restore the specified mailbox to an on-premises
Microsoft Exchange organization. For more information, see the Adding On-Premises Microsoft
Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

You can also restore from backups created for on-premises Microsoft Exchange organizations to Exchange
Online organizations and vice versa. For more information, see Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations.

657 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify User Account
At this step of the wizard, specify an account that you want to use to connect to the Exchange server in your
domain.

658 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify CAS Server and Target Folder
At this step of the wizard, specify a CAS server and provide a folder to which you want to restore data. You can
restore your data to the original folder or specify a custom folder.

To provide a CAS server and target folder, do the following:

1. Specify a CAS server name or IP address.

This field is populated automatically with the CAS server address from your domain. You can also enter a
CAS server manually.

2. Select a folder to which you want to restore data. You can restore your data to the original folder or
specify a custom folder.

When you select to restore to a custom folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange checks if the
specified folder exists, if not, it creates a folder automatically. For example, if you specify a path like
Folder1/Folder2/Folder3, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange will restore your data to the Folder3.
You can use both the slash ("/") and the backslash ("\") characters when specifying a path.

659 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that have been changed. When you select this option,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange overwrites existing items in your target location.

• Missing Items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that are missing in your target location. For example,
some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

• Ma rk restored items as unread

Select this check box if you want to mark each restored item as unread.

If you restore a mailbox, to prevent certain folders from being restored, click E x clude folders and select folders
to exclude.

NOTE

The E x clude folders link is not available when restoring folders and items.

Restoring Multiple Mailboxes

To restore multiple Exchange mailboxes, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a domain and credentials.

3. Select mailboxes to restore.

4. Specify a target mailbox server.

5. Select restore options.

660 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do one the following:

• In the navigation pane, select an organization whose mailboxes you want to restore, and on the Home tab,
click Restore Mailboxes.

• In the navigation pane, right-click an organization and select Restore mailboxes.

661 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Domain and Credentials
At this step of the wizard, enter a domain name where your CAS server resides and provide credentials.

662 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Select Mailboxes to Restore
At this step of the wizard, select mailboxes that you want to restore.

To see the full email address in the E ma il column, click Resolve selected mailboxes.

663 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Mailbox Server
At this step of the wizard, specify a target server to which you want to restore mailboxes.

664 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Select Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that have been changed. When you select this option,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange overwrites existing items in your targ et location.

• Missing Items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that are missing in your target location. For example,
some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

• Ma rk restored items as unread

Select this check box if you want to mark each restored item as unread.

When restoring multiple mailboxes, select the Finish the restore of recent items before restoring the remaining
items check box and set the value in the Restore items for the last <N> days first field to restore multiple
mailboxes in "chunks", when the most recent items in the backup will be processed first.

To prevent certain folders from being restored, click the E x clude folders link and select folders to exclude.

665 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations
You can restore your Exchange data to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-factor authentication
(MFA) and security defaults.

To restore a single mailbox, folder or item, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target mailbox.

3. Select an authentication method.

4. Log in to Microsoft 365.

5. Specify a user account to impersonate with a public folder mailbox.

6. Specify a CAS server.

7. Specify a target folder.

8. Specify restore options.

666 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• If you want to restore a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox that you want to restore, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click
Restore Mailbox > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er > Restore to.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder that you want to restore and select Restore to.

• If you want to restore an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item that you want to restore, and on the Items tab, click Restore Item
> Restore to.

o In the preview pane, right-click an item that you want to restore and select Restore to.

667 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Mailbox
At this step of the wizard, specify the target mailbox and mailbox location.

To specify mailbox settings, do the following:

1. In the Ma ilbox field, enter a mailbox name to which you want to restore data.

You can specify any name that you want. You can also restore a mailbox to a different organization. For
example, you have backed up a mailbox [email protected] . To restore such a mailbox to
a different organization, you can specify, for example, [email protected] to restore a
mailbox to the xyz.onmicrosoft.com organization.

2. Select Microsoft 365 to restore the specified mailbox to an Exchange Online organization with enabled
multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see
the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

You can also restore from backups created for Exchange Online organizations to on-premises Microsoft
Exchange servers and vice versa. For more information, see Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers.

668 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
Modern authentication allows Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore.
Such an application is used to restore the specified mailbox, folder or item back to Microsoft 365 organizations
with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information,
see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Starting from Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange build 7.1.0.2031, you can also use modern authentication
with Azure AD application certificate, in addition to the existing modern authentication with one -time
authentication code.

Using Modern Authentication with One-Time Authentication Code

To use modern authentication with an one-time authentication code, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (one-time
password) .

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your Exchange Online organization belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your Exchange Online organization.

Make sure that the organization name matches the name specified at the previous step of the wizard.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

669 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Using Modern Authentication with Azure AD Application Certificate

NOTE

If Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup & Replication
installation, modern authentication with Azure AD application certificate is not available by default. To
enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 on the machine.

To use modern authentication with the Azure AD application certificate, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (certificate-based) .

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your Exchange Online organization belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your Exchange Online organization.

Make sure that the organization name matches the name specified at the previous step of the wizard.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, ma ke sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

5. Click Select to specify an SSL certificate that you want to use for data exchange between Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft Exchange and the specified Azure AD application.

6. In the Select Certificate wizard, select a certificate. For more information, see Installing SSL Certificates.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

670 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Enter credentials to connect to the Exchange organization.

Make sure that the account that you use has both the Exchange Administrator and the Global
Administrator roles.

671 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) option at the
previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. F or more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

672 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Impersonation Account
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (certificate-based) option at the
Select Authentication Method step.

If you want to restore your data to a public folder mailbox, you can optionally specify a user account to
impersonate with this public folder mailbox.

673 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify CAS Server and Target Folder
This step is only available if you have selected the Basic Authentication option at the Select Authentication
Method step.

At this step of the wizard, specify a CAS server and provide a folder to which you want to restore data. You can
restore your data to the original folder or specify a custom folder.

To provide a CAS server and target folder, do the following:

1. Specify a CAS server name or IP address.

This field is populated automatically with the CAS server address from your domain. You can also enter a
CAS server manually.

2. Select a folder to which you want to restore data. You can restore your data to the original folder or
specify a custom folder.

When you select to restore to a custom folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange checks if the
specified folder exists, if not, it creates a folder automatically. For example, if you specify a path like
Folder1/Folder2/Folder3, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange will restore your data to the Folder3.
You can use both the slash ("/") and the backslash ("\") characters when specifying a path.

674 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 7. Specify Target Folder
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) or the Modern
authentication (certificate-based) option at the Select Authentication Method step.

At this step of the wizard, select a target folder to which you want to restore the specified mailbox. You can
restore your data to the original folder or specify a custom folder.

When you select to restore to a custom folder, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange checks if the specified
folder exists, if not, it creates a folder automatically. For example, if you specify a path like
Folder1/Folder2/Folder3, Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 will restore your data to the Folder3. You can use
both the slash ("/") and the backslash ("\") characters when specifying a path.

675 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 8. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that have been changed. When you select this option,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange overwrites existing items in your target location.

• Missing Items

Select this check box if you want to restore items that are missing in your target location. For example,
some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

• Ma rk restored items as unread

Select this check box if you want to mark each restored item as unread.

If you restore a mailbox, to prevent certain folders from being restored, click the E x clude folders link and select
folders to exclude.

NOTE

The E x clude folders link is not available when restoring folders and items.

676 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange to export Microsoft Exchange data.

Before exporting data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

677 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Using 1-Click Export
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to quickly export mailbox store data as PST files.

NOTE

Export operations require Microsoft Outlook to be installed on the computer running Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft Exchange.

Depending on the type of object you want to export, the following actions are available:

• To export a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder, and on the Fold er tab, click E x port Folder > E x port to
< d efault_location>\<original_folder_name>.pst.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder and select E x port to

< d efault_location>\<original_folder_name>.pst.

• To export an item, do one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select an item and on the Items tab, click E x port Items > E xport to
< d efault_location>\<original_folder_name>.pst.

678 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o In the preview pane, right-click an item and select E x port to
< d efault_location>\<original_folder_name>.pst.

• To export a mailbox, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a mailbox, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click E x port Mailbox > E xport to
< d efault_location>\<original_mailbox_name>.pst.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox and select E x port to

< d efault_location>\<original_folder_name>.pst.

• To export a mailbox store or all stores added to the scope, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a store or the All Stores node, and on the Home tab, click E x port Stores
> E x port to <default_location>\<original_store_name>.pst.

679 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o In the navigation pane, right-click a store or the All Stores node and select E x port to
< d efault_location>\<original_store_name>.pst .

680 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting to Custom Location
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to export mailbox store data to a custom location as PST
files.

NOTE

Export operations require Microsoft Outlook to be installed on the computer running Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft Exchange.

To export objects to a custom location, do the following:

1. Depending on the type of object you want to export, the following actions are available:

o To export a mailbox store or all stores added to the scope, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select a store or the All Stores node, and on the Home tab, click E x port
Stores > E x port to .pst file.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click a store or the All Stores node and select E x port to .pst file.

o To export a mailbox, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select a mailbox, and on the Ma ilbox tab, click E x port Mailbox > E xport
to .p st file.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click a mailbox and select E x port to .pst file.

o To export a folder, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select a folder, and on the Fold er tab, click E x port Folder > E x port to
.p st file.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click a folder and select E x port to .pst file.

o To export an item, do one of the following:

▪ In the preview pane, select an item and on the Items tab, click E x port Items > E x port to .pst file.

681 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 ▪ In the preview pane, right-click an item and select E x port to .pst file.

2. In the E x port Folder or E x port Mail Items window, do the following:

a. In the E x port location field, specify the name and location for the new PST file.

b. Select the Ap p ly filter check box and enter keywords to export only those items that match specified
criteria. To provide multiple keywords, use the OR logical operator as the delimiter.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange will check for the specified keywords in all fields such as
From, To, Subject and Bod y.

The Ap p ly filter option is only available when exporting folders and mailboxes, not items.

c. Select the Limit PST size to check box and specify the size of which to export PST files. The specified
value must be between 1 GB and 49 GB.

With this option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange will create multiple PST files as of the
specified size.

682 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Receiving Export Reports
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange can deliver reports that show summary information about export
operations.

Consider the following:

• If you want export reports to be delivered, make sure to configure mail settings in Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft Exchange or Veeam Backup & Replication notification settings.

For more information, see the Mail Settings section of this guide and the Configuring Global Email
Notification Settings section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

• A server with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange and Veeam Backup & Replication must be in a
domain.

• Export reports are delivered automatically upon each export session.

You can use Exporting to Custom Location or Using 1-Click Export.

• Keep in mind the following when specifying recipients of the report:

o The recipient is always the current user account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange
is running when using only Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange notification settings.

o The recipient is always the user account provided in Veeam Backup & Replication notification settings
when using only Veeam Backup & Replication settings.

o If you have configured both Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange and Veeam Backup & Replication
notification settings, the report will be sent to both recipients.

NOTE

If you export Microsoft Exchange data using PowerShell cmdlets and you have a restore session
started for Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365, the report will only be sent to the user account
provided in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange notification settings.

The following table lists fields that are shown in the report.

Rep ort field Description

P erformed by Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange

Version Shows the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange build number.

P ercent completed Shows the number of items included in the PST file.

Sta rted by Shows the user account generated the report.

Sta rt time, E nd time Shows the creation time of a report.

Root folder Shows the object path.

683 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Rep ort field Description

P a th Shows the path to the database file.

E x port type Shows the export type.

Stores Shows a datastore name from which items have been exported.

Ma ilboxes to search Shows a mailbox name from which items have been exported.

Sea rch completed successfully Shows results for mailboxes to search.

for, Search completed with
errors for

Size Shows the total size of exported items.

Items Shows the number of exported items.

E rrors Shows errors that occurred during export.

684 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Compare
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange to compare data in a backup file with that of the production
state.

NOTE

The Veeam Backup account you want to use for data compare, must have a valid Exchange Online license
and an active mailbox within the Microsoft 365 organization. For more information about the required
permissions, see Permissions.

To compare backed-up data with production environment, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an object and click Compare with Production on the ribbon.

2. Proceed to either Compare to Microsoft 365 Organizations or Compare to On-Premises Microsoft Servers.

3. After the authorization process is complete, click Show Changed Items Only on the ribbon to view only
those items that have been changed.

To view the details on what exactly has changed since the last backup, right-click an item and select Compare
item properties. The discrepancies will be shown in the Compare Message P roperties window. If both objects are
equal, nothing will be displayed.

To show unchanged objects, select Show unchanged p roperties in the top-right corner. To show system
properties, select Show system properties.

Double-click Bod y to see the body message.

To compare a single item, right-click an item and select Compare item properties.

685 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Compare to Microsoft 365 Organizations
NOTE

This scenario is only available for backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

To compare data with your production Microsoft 365 organizations, do the following:

1. Select an authentication method.

2. Log in to Microsoft 365.

3. Specify a user account to impersonate with a public folder mailbox .

686 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
Modern authentication allows Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data compare.
Such an application is used for Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and
enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section
of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Starting from Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange build 7.1.0.2031, you can also use modern authentication
with Azure AD application certificate, in addition to the existing modern authentication with one -time
authentication code.

Using Modern Authentication with One-Time Authentication Code

To use modern authentication with an one-time authentication code, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (one-time
password) .

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data compare.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

687 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Using Modern Authentication with Azure AD Application Certificate

NOTE

If Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup & Replication
installation, modern authentication with Azure AD application certificate is not available by default. To
enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 on the machine.

To use modern authentication with the Azure AD application certificate, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication (certificate-based) .

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data compare.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

3. Click Select to specify an SSL certificate that you want to use for data exchange between Veeam Explorer
for Microsoft Exchange and the specified Azure AD application.

4. In the Select Certificate wizard, select a certificate. For more information, see Installing SSL Certificates.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Sp ecify authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

688 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Enter credentials to connect to the Exchange organization and click Connect.

Make that the account that you use has both the Exchange Administrator and the Global Administrator
roles.

689 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (one-time password) option at the
previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has both the ApplicationImpersonation and the Exchange
Administrator roles. For more information, see this Microsoft article.

4. Return to the Connection Wizard window and click Connect.

690 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Impersonation Account
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication (certificate-based) option at the
Select Authentication Method step.

At this step of the wizard, specify a user account to impersonate with.

691 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Compare to On-Premises Microsoft Servers
To compare data with your production on-premises Microsoft Exchange, do the following:

1. Specify a domain and credentials.

2. Specify a target mailbox server.

692 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Specify Domain and Credentials
At this step of the wizard, enter a domain name where your CAS server resides and provide credentials.

693 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Mailbox Server
At this step of the wizard, specify a target server to which you want to restore mailboxes and click Connect.

694 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Saving Microsoft Exchange Items
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to save any item as Microsoft Exchange Mail Document
(.msg ) files.

1-Click Save
To save your Exchange data, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a folder containing required items.

2. In the preview pane, select items that you want to save and do one of the following:

o On the Items tab, click Sa ve Items > Sa ve to <folder_name>.

o Right-click the selection and select Sa ve to <folder_name>.

Use the search field to find particular items.

A < folder_name> name depends on the latest location that was used when saving items.

Saving to Custom Location

To save items to a custom location, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a folder.

2. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select an item, and on the Items tab, click Sa ve Items > Save to .msg file .

695 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o Right-click an item and select Sa ve to .msg file.

696 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Sending Microsoft Exchange Items
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange allows you to send Exchange items by email.

TIP

Before sending documents, make sure to configure mail settings. The amount of data you can send at a
time depends on your SMTP server configuration. For more information about configuring mail settings,
see Mail Settings.

1-Click Send
To send items to the original mailbox, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a folder containing the required items.

2. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select an item, and on the Items tab, click Send Items > Send to <mailbox_name>.

o Right-click an item and select Send to <mailbox_name>.

NOTE

Consider the following:

• When sending an item from a Veeam Backup & Replication backup, the item will be sent to the
address specified in the From field in the Mail Settings.
• When sending an item from a Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 backup, the item will be sent to the
selected mailbox.

697 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Sending to Custom Recipient
To send items to a specific recipient, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select a folder containing the required items.

2. In the preview pane, select items that you want to send and do one of the following:

o On the Items tab, click Send Items > Send to.

o Right-click the selection and select Send to.

Use the search field to find particular items.

3. In the Send Items window, provide a recipient address.

The From field is filled automatically based on the address you have provided when configuring mail
settings. For more information, see Mail Settings.

You can also edit the message subject and body. To edit the message body, click More details.

698 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange, you can visit Veeam R&D
Forums or submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Advanced Settings.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

699 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore and export Microsoft SharePoint data from
backups, snapshot replicas, CDP replicas, VeeamZIP backups or storage snapshots created by
Veeam Backup & Replication. You can also restore and export Microsoft SharePoint data from backups created
by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

NOTE
Data recovery from CDP replicas is available starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1.

700 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
You can configure your environment before you start using Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

701 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

System Requirements
This section lists system requirements for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

The set of supported Microsoft SharePoint versions depends on the product Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint is installed with: Veeam Backup & Replication or Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

P roduct Requirement

Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint supports restore of the following
versions of Microsoft SharePoint Server (virtualized either on VMware or
Hyper-V platform):
• Microsoft SharePoint Server Subscription Edition
• Microsoft SharePoint 2019
• Microsoft SharePoint 2016
• Microsoft SharePoint 2013

All editions are supported (Subscription, Foundation, Standard, Enterprise).

Restore of Microsoft SharePoint data may require an available staging

Microsoft SQL Server. To learn how to configure this server, see Staging
SQL Server.

Veeam Backup for Microsoft Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint supports restore of the following
365 Microsoft SharePoint versions:
• Microsoft 365 SharePoint Online

Microsoft 365 and Office 365 service families, standalone services

and plans for Business, Education, and Government* hosted by
Microsoft are supported. For more information about system
requirements and limitations for Microsoft 365, see this Microsoft
article.

• Microsoft SharePoint Server 2019

For more information about hardware and software requirements, see

this Microsoft article.

• Microsoft SharePoint Server 2016

For more information about hardware and software requirements, see

this Microsoft article.
• Microsoft SharePoint Server Subscription Edition

For more information about hardware and software requirements, see

this Microsoft article and this Microsoft article.

*Government support is experimental. For more information on Veeam experimental support, see this Veeam KB article.

702 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

Consider the following:

• To restore SharePoint content database items from a server running Microsoft Windows ReFS, the
backup server or Veeam Backup & Replication console must be installed on the Microsoft Windows
Server 2012 or later.
• To restore from a server running Microsoft Windows ReFS 3.x, Veeam backup server or a
management console must be installed on the Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

703 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
The following tables list network ports that must be opened to manage inbound and outbound traffic.

General

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Veeam Explorer for SharePoint As As For more information on

Microsoft SharePoint web recommended recommended recommended port numbers
application by Microsoft by Microsoft and protocols for SharePoint
web application, see this
Microsoft article.

To discover ports currently

used by your SharePoint web
application, follow the steps
described in this Microsoft
article.

Backup server, Staging TCP, UDP 135, 445 Ports used to deploy the
Veeam Backup & Replication server runtime coordination process
console, mount server on the target machine.
associated with the backup
repository
TCP 49152 to Dynamic RPC range used by
65535 the runtime coordination
(for Microsoft process that is deployed on
Windows the target machine. 1
2008 or
later) For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

TCP 6160 Port used to communicate

with the installer service.

Backup server, Staging TCP 1433, 1434 Ports used to communicate

Veeam Backup & Replication server and other with Microsoft SQL servers
console hosting content databases.

Exact port numbers depend

on the configuration of the
Microsoft SQL server.

For more information, see this

Microsoft article.

704 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 From To P rotocol P ort Notes

UDP 1434 Port used by the Microsoft

SQL Server Browser service.

For more information, see this

Microsoft article.

1
If you use default Microsoft Windows firewall settings, you do not need to configure dynamic RPC ports: during setup,
Veeam Backup & Replication automatically creates a firewall rule for the runtime process. If you use firewall settings other
than default ones or application-aware processing fails with the RPC function call failed error, you need to configure
dynamic RPC ports. For more information on how to configure RPC dynamic port allocation to work with firewalls, see this
Microsoft KB article.

NOTE

To restore database items or lists to a server that is running in a DMZ, the SharePoint web application ports
will be used.

iSCSI Traffic

From To P rotocol P ort Notes

Staging Mount server TCP 3260 to 3270 Ports used by iSCSI initiator to connect to
server associated the iSCSI target.
with the
backup
repository

705 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint and restore Microsoft SharePoint data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Sha rePoint must
Sha rePoint launch meet the following requirements:
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam
Restore Operator role on the backup server.

Restore to on-premises To restore data to on-premises Microsoft SharePoint organizations, you

Microsoft SharePoint must grant the following roles and permissions to user accounts:
• The account must be granted Full Control to connect to the target
SharePoint server.
• The account must be assigned either the Site Administrator or
System Account role to restore user permissions.
• If permissions of items being restored are inherited from the parent
one, the account must be granted Full Control.
• If permissions of items being restored are not inherited from the
parent one and items being restored replace the existing ones, the
account must be granted Contribute and Full Control.

706 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Restore to Microsoft Office To restore data to SharePoint Online organizations, you must g rant the
365 following roles and permissions to user accounts:

Restore Using Basic Authentication Method

• The account used to log in to Microsoft Office 365 must have the
Global Administrator or SharePoint Administrator role assigned.
• For restore of personal SharePoint sites, make sure to select the
Allow users to run custom script on personal sites option in the
SharePoint admin center. For more information, see this Microsoft
article.
• During restore, Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 automatically
assigns the Site Collection Administrator role to the user account.

Restore Using Modern Authentication Method

• The account used to log in to Microsoft Office 365 must have the
Global Administrator or SharePoint Administrator role assigned.
• For restore of personal SharePoint sites, make sure to select the
Allow users to run custom script on personal sites option in the
SharePoint admin center. For more information, see this Microsoft
article.
• During restore, Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 automatically
assigns the Site Collection Administrator role to the user account.
• Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD
application used for restore. For more information, see the
Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam
Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.
• If you restore data with Azure AD applications using a certificate,
make sure that your Azure AD application is granted the required
permissions. For more information, see the Permissions for Modern
App-Only Authentication section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

Consider the following:

• The current account can only be used to access a local staging server. To connect to a remote server, use
appropriate authentication credentials to access that server.

• The account requires the sysadmin fixed server role on a staging Microsoft SQL server.

• For ADFS as an authentication provider:

o When using Windows Authentication, you can use both your current account or provide another
account.

o When using Forms Authentication, the current account cannot be used.

707 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Required Job Settings
This requirement applies to backup jobs, replication jobs, and CDP policies created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

When you create a job or CDP policy, make sure to enable application-aware processing in the
Veeam Backup & Replication console:

• When you configure a backup job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Backup Job wizard.

• When you configure a replication job, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the
New Replication Job wizard.

• When you configure a CDP policy, you can do this at the Specify Guest Processing Settings step of the New
CDP Policy wizard.

Note that when you create storage snapshots, application-aware processing is automatically enabled. For more
information, see the Application Item Restore from Storage Snapshots section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

708 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Staging SQL Server
To perform Microsoft SharePoint items restore, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint requires a Microsoft
SQL server to be used as a staging system.

NOTE

Configuring the staging SQL server settings is only required to restore SharePoint data from the following
sources:

• Backups created by Veeam Backup & Replication.

• Microsoft SharePoint databases manually added to the application scope. For more information, see
Adding Microsoft SharePoint Databases.

The server you plan to use as a staging system must meet the following requirements:

• A staging system must have the same or later version of Microsoft SQL Server than the machine that hosts
restored Microsoft SharePoint databases.

• As a staging server, you can use any edition of Microsoft SQL Server, including the Express Edition. You
can download the necessary edition from the Microsoft Download Center.

Note that databases that exceed 10 GB cannot be attached to the Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition
due to Express Edition limitations. For more information, see the Editions and supported features of SQL
Server 2022 Microsoft article.

• A Microsoft SQL Server that is included in a Microsoft SQL Server Failover Cluster cannot be used as a
staging system.

• Nodes participating in AlwaysOn Availability Groups are supported. However, you should not use
Availability Group Listeners as staging servers.

Note that the available authentication options for the staging server depend on the domain configuration.
Consider the following:

• If the SQL server belongs to an untrusted domain, connection will not be possible.

• If the SQL server belongs to a trusted domain, only the SQL Server authentication method is available.

• If both the SQL server and the machine running Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint belong to the
same domain, then both Windows authentication and SQL Server authentication methods are possible.

If you want to use Windows authentication, complete the following steps to configure delegation settings:

a. In Active Directory Users and Computers, select the necessary staging SQL server.

b. Open the server properties and select the Delegation tab. Select Trust this computer for delegation to
sp ecified services only and Use any authentication protocol options for the cifs service on a computer
with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

c. Restart the staging SQL Server.

d. Select a domain user account that you want to use when connecting to the staging server and make
sure the Account is sensitive and cannot be delegated check box is not selected.

709 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Remote BLOB Stores Support
A BLOB store must be either included in the SharePoint backup created by Veeam Backup & Replication or
Veeam Agent for Microsoft Windows (for automated discovery) or stored on a local machine running Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint (for manual discovery).

IMP ORTANT

RBS FILESTREAM is the only provider that is supported in the current version.

Make sure the staging Microsoft SQL Server configuration meets the following requirements:

1. FILESTREAM is enabled on a database server. For more information, see the following articles:

o For SQL Server 2022 for Windows, see this Microsoft article.

o For SQL Server 2019 for Windows, see this Microsoft article.

o For SQL Server 2017 for Windows, see this Microsoft article.

o For SQL Server 2016, see this Microsoft article.

o For SQL Server 2014, see this Microsoft article.

o For SQL Server 2012, see this Microsoft article.

o For SQL Server 2008 R2, see this Microsoft article.

2. RBS Client Library is installed on the database server.

For Microsoft SQL Server 2014 and later, the Remote Blob Store setup is included in the installation
media. For other versions, you can use the Microsoft SQL Server Remote Blob Store installation package.
For more information on how to install the package, see this Microsoft article.

710 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and limitations of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

General
Consider the following:

• When Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint is installed on a server on which both
Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings
will be inherited from the Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

• Restore using PowerShell Direct, VIX API or vSphere Automation API is not supported.

• Restore of backed-up Microsoft SharePoint data to another Microsoft organization cannot be performed to
a target Microsoft SharePoint organization whose version is earlier than the version of the restored
backups.

• To use an internet proxy server to restore backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365, make sure
to provide appropriate proxy server address and the port number. To do this, go to the Control Panel >
Internet Options Connections tab, click LAN Settings, select the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box
and specify a proxy server you want to use. Credentials for such a proxy (if needed) will be taken from the
Control Panel > Credential Manager > W indows Credentials console.

You can only use an internet proxy server in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint that comes as part
of Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

• Starting from Veeam Backup & Replication 12.1, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint supports data
recovery from CDP replicas. Consider the following limitations:

o Before you recover custom Microsoft SharePoint lists, you must import their schemas manually. For
more information, see Custom List Settings.

o When you recover your data from CDP replicas, you can only use long -term (both application-
consistent and crash-consistent) restore points. Short-term restore points are not supported.

o You can recover your data from a CDP replica if its CDP policy is currently running. During recovery,
the CDP policy does not create new long-term restore points and does not delete existing ones.
Short-term restore points are still created.

o You cannot restore application items from a CDP replica in parallel with guest OS file restore,
SureReplica, and failover.

• For VMs that run Microsoft SQL Server backed up by Veeam Agent for Microsoft Windows and Microsoft
SharePoint backed up by Veeam Backup & Replication, to perform SharePoint item restore, you must start
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint from the Veeam Backup Browser. To do this, start File Level
Recovery for the backup of the required SQL Server VM, and then launch Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint from the toolbar in the Veeam Backup Browser.

If you start item-level recovery directly for the backup of the SharePoint VM, mapping of a SharePoint site
to a content database in the Restore wizard will fail, and Veeam Backup & Replication will display the
following error: Unable to find SQL Server VM hosting the content database for the selected SharePoint
site.
Backup of the same VM by both Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam Agent for Microsoft Windows
may be required, for example, if Microsoft SQL Server running on the VM operates as part of a failover
cluster.

711 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Restore Limitations
If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
installation, you cannot restore from Veeam Backup & Replication backups by default. To enable this
functionality, install Veeam Backup & Replication Enterprise edition or higher on the machine.

Status Restore Limitations

Consider the following when planning documents or list items restore:

• If a document or an item was in Check Out state when the backup was created, the last version of the item
will not be restored to the target SharePoint and will be available for viewing only. Previous versions (if
any) will be restored.

• If the Declare this item as a record action was originally applied to list item, the relevant status will not be
preserved. Instead, the restored item status will be set in accordance with the target list or target library
content approval workflow.

• Original status On Hold will not be restored.

Restore of Documents, Libraries and Lists

Consider the following:

• Versioning settings of SharePoint lists are not preserved during restore.

• Restoring Generic List and Pages Library may fail with the No content type 'XXX' found in web YYY error.

• The Created By field of restored documents is updated with the account performing restore.

• Some Rating Settings of Discussion lists values are not restored.

• Make sure to view information about unsupported Microsoft SharePoint lists before restoring them. In
particular, hidden lists are not displayed in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint after a site backup.
Thus, such lists cannot be exported. For more information, see Unsupported SharePoint Lists.

• [For restore from Veeam Backup & Replication backups] Restore of values in custom columns is not
supported for folders and document sets.

Restore of List Items

Consider that when restoring a list item, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint works in the following way:

• Deletes an existing item.

• Creates the latest version of the item anew using data from the backup.

• Checks whether it is declared as a record.

• If the check is a success, the process finishes.

• If not, the created version is deleted and item versions are restored sequentially.

This logic leads to the following peculiarities of list item restore:

• If a list or list items column is used as a lookup column in the dependent list, consider that restoring an
item from the source list causes the relevant items deletion in the dependent list.

712 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • If a lookup column in the dependent list has the enforced relationship behavior set to Ca scade Delete,
then restoring an item from the source list may cause item deletion in the dependent list due to Microsoft
implementation. For more information, see this Microsoft article.

To prevent this issue, you should turn off enforced relationship behavior. As a work -around, you can roll-back
the SharePoint database using Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server (see this section) or roll-back the whole
SharePoint server VM to the desired state using any Veeam Backup & Replication recovery option.

The following limitations should also be considered:

• If a lookup column in the dependent list has the enforced relationship behavior set to Restrict Delete, then
item restore with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will fail.

• If an .ASPX page references an item using ItemID, this reference may fail to restore (as the item will be
created anew with a different ItemID).

• If a list item cannot be deleted (for example, the Welcome page of the site), consider that restore process
will restore all versions of the item sequentially without deletions, adding them to Version History .

• Restored Issue list items are assigned new IssueID.

• Restore of Time Card list is not supported.

Restore of List Items with Links (Attachments)

Consider the following when planning for the restore of list items with links (attachments):

• If the retention policy for target list or target document library was configured to Declare record
automatically, only the last version of the item will be restored to target list or target document library.
Target retention policy settings will be applied to restored item (Declare record). However, links
(attachments) will not be restored.

• Alternatively (with different retention policy settings), all versions of the original item will be restored to
target list or target document library; item links (attachments) will be restored only if such item does not
exist on target SharePoint.

• If Declare this item as a record action was originally applied to list item, such item will not be restored.

Restore of Items with Custom Content Type

For item restore, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint uses content types that exist in the target library or
list. If you restore an item with a custom content type, and the target location does not contain this content
type, the restore process will fail with the following error: Cannot find corresponding Content-Type for:
15_.000. Original ContentTypeID: ‘XXX’.

Restore of Surveys
Consider the following limitations when planning for the restore of surveys, survey questions and responses:

• Survey items can be restored to a new survey, created automatically by Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint in the specified destination instead of the previously deleted survey. However, if a new survey
is created by user from scratch (not replacing a deleted one) – items cannot be restored to such a survey.

• A survey can be restored to an existing target survey only if that target survey includes at least one item
(question) same as survey questions stored in the content database.

• If a survey question was not answered completely in the source survey, after restore the response status
in the target survey will be set to Completed , anyway.

713 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • When restoring a single response to a survey, target response item with the same number will be deleted
and restored item will be placed in the target survey after the last numbered response.

For example, if the target survey has responses #1-15 and you try to restore a response that used to be #6
on source – then target response #6 will be deleted and restored response will be assigned #16.

Restore of Sites
Consider the following:

• When restoring site collections, make sure that such collections exist in the target location; Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

• If you plan to restore SharePoint site pages, consider that Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint does
not support restore of items which are not stored in the SharePoint content database (in particular, pages,
page references and items based on default templates). Such items cannot be restored (neither by Restore
nor by Sa ve menu option), except for data from Wiki Content (text and images) which is stored in the
database. Thus, site pages containing only text and images can be restored and displayed prop erly.

NOTE

Consider the following:

• In case you attempt to restore such items, the following error message will be logged: Item
<item> is skipped: restoration of items based on SharePoint default template is not
supported .
• In case you attempt to save such items, the following error message will be logged: Unable to
save document <item>. Document content is not available .

Export and Import

Consider the following:

• In on-premises Microsoft SharePoint organizations, importing exported Picture Library may result in IDs
changed for some items.

• Importing an exported Project Tasks list does not preserve column order.

• Importing an exported SharePoint list does not preserve Validation Settings.

• Export is unavailable for backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365. The operation is available
only for backups created by Veeam Backup & Replication.

• Make sure to view information about unsupported Microsoft SharePoint lists before exporting them. In
particular, hidden lists are not displayed in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint after a site backup.
Thus, such lists cannot be exported. For more information, see Unsupported SharePoint Lists.

• Export of empty SharePoint folders is not supported.

Data Type Limitations

Consider the column (field) data type when planning for the restore of your SharePoint libraries or lists:

• If source column (field) data type was set to Lookup , but the referenced list or library was deleted, such
columns (fields) will not be restored even if you restore that referenced list. The reason is that if
referenced list is deleted, the reference (link) to that list is no longer valid.

714 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • If source column (field) data type was set to Managed Metadata , such columns (fields) will not be
restored.

Workflow-Related Considerations
You may need to restore the items originally belonging to a list with no content approval required, to another
list. If you try to restore such items to a list that requires content approval, item version and status will be
modified in the following way:

• If a target list is configured to include major versions only, then all versions of restored item will become
major (despite the original versioning); item status will be set to Pending .

• If a target list is configured to include both major and minor versions, then all versions of restored item
will become minor (despite the original versioning); item status will be set in the following way:

o If the last version (original) was major — status will be set to Pending .

o If the last version was minor — status will be set to Draft.

Also, consider the following when planning for the restore of list items (with or without content approval
originally required):

• If the retention policy for target list or target document library is configured to Declare record
automatically, only the last version of the item will be restored to target list or target document library.
Target retention policy settings will be applied to restored item ( Declare record). Besides, if Require
content approval for submitted items was enabled for the original list, then after restore item status will
be set to Pending .

• Alternatively (with different retention policy settings), all versions of the original item will be restored to
target list or target document library. Besides, if Require content approval for submitted items was
enabled for the original list, then after restore item status in the content approval workflow will be also
restored, except for the states listed. For more information, see Status Restore Limitations.

Unsupported SharePoint Lists

The following table contains all unsupported Microsoft SharePoint lists. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint does not restore data from these lists.

Because Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint that is distributed as a part of Veeam Backup & Replication
does not process hidden lists, such lists are also included in the table.

List Template ID1 List Name Microsoft SharePoint Server Version

101 SearchConfigListTemplate 2013/2016/2019/SE

110 datasrcs 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

111 webtemp 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

112 users 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

113 wplib 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

715 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 List Template ID1 List Name Microsoft SharePoint Server Version

114 listtemp 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

116 mplib 2010

117 nocodewf 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

118 workflowProcess 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

121 solutions 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

122 nocodepublicwf 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

123 themes 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

124 designs 2013/2016/2019/SE

125 appdata 2013/2016/2019/SE

126 appfiles 2019/SE

160 accessrequests 2013/2016/2019/SE

175 MaintenanceLogs 2013/2016/2019/SE

200 meetings 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

212 wkspglib 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

331 ComponentManifests 2019/SE

334 ClientSideAssets 2019/SE

335 SiteCollectionAppCatalogs 2019/SE

336 WebApiPermissionRequests 2019/SE

401 fcgroups 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

716 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 List Template ID1 List Name Microsoft SharePoint Server Version

401 MonitoredAppsList 2013/2016/2019/SE

420 timecard 2013/2016/2019/SE

425 whatsnew 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

530 ContentFollowingList 2013/2016/2019/SE

544 MicroBlogList 2013/2016/2019/SE

550 SocialDataStoreList 2013/2016/2019/SE

563 AnnouncementTilesList 2016/2019/SE

600 extlist 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

880 members 2013/2016/2019/SE

925 abusereports 2013/2016/2019/SE

1221 healthreports 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

1305 EDiscoverySources 2016/2019/SE

1306 EDiscoverySourceInstances 2013/2016/2019/SE

1309 DlpEDiscoveryQueries 2016/2019/SE

1310 PreservationListTemplate 2013/2016/2019/SE

2000 PNSubscribers 2013/2016/2019/SE

2001 ExternalSubscriptions 2013/2016/2019/SE

3100 AccSrvAddApp 2013/2016/2019/SE

3300 SharingLinks 2016/2019/SE

717 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 List Template ID1 List Name Microsoft SharePoint Server Version

3400 HashtagStore 2019/SE

3401 BlockedHashtags 2019/SE

3412 HubSites 2019/SE

3415 WebTemplateExtensions 2019/SE

3500 IRCollection 2019/SE

3501 IRReference 2019/SE

3502 IRReferenceCollection 2019/SE

4501 wfsvc 2013/2016/2019/SE

10000 Academic Library N/A

10001 eduentity" 2013/2016/2019/SE

10007 EduWorkItem 2013/2016/2019/SE

10008 EduQuiz 2013/2016/2019/SE

10051 eduentity 2013/2016/2019/SE

10060 eduusersetting 2013/2016/2019/SE

10061 eduexternalsyncsetting 2013/2016/2019/SE

10099 AcquisitionHistoryList 2013/2016/2019/SE

10101 edudocument 2013/2016/2019/SE

10102 IWConvertedForms 2010/2013/2016/2019/SE

10401 eduannouncement 2013/2016/2019/SE

718 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 List Template ID1 List Name Microsoft SharePoint Server Version

10631 educalendar 2013/2016/2019/SE

For more information, see this Microsoft article.

1

719 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint and load SharePoint data, you can use either of the following
methods:

• Use the Restore application item option to load SharePoint data from a restore point created by
Veeam Backup & Replication.

For more information, see the Application Item Restore section of the Veeam Backup & Replication User
Guide.

• Go to Sta rt, click Veea m Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint and manually open Microsoft SharePoint
databases. For more information, see Standalone Databases.

If you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

o The domain name or IP address of a server to which you want to connect

o The port number

o User account credentials

Consider the following:

▪ To perform restore operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint must be run with
elevated permissions. The user account must be a member of the local Administrators group on
the machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint is installed.

▪ The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint is running, select Use
W ind ows session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

720 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
The user interface of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint is designed to let you quickly find commands that
you need to restore and export Microsoft SharePoint data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 and Veeam Backup & Replication.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings. For more information, s ee General
Application Settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint wizard or window. You will
then be redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains operation commands organized into logical groups represented as tabs.
The ribbon menu is displayed at the top of the main application window.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of folde rs with backed-up data.
Also, it allows you to search for sites using keywords.

721 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which provides search capabilities and allows you to view details about items that are
contained in a folder you have selected in the navigation pane.

722 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint to view the contents of a backup file, view object
properties, open files, search for sites and for items in a backup file as well as customize criteria of your search.

Searching for Sites

You can use keywords to search for sites in the database structure containing your SharePoint objects. To do
this, enter a search query in the search field at the top of the navigation pane.

To remove a keyword, click the cross mark.

Browsing Backup Content

To view the contents of a backup file, you use the navigation pane which shows you the database structure
containing your site items such as libraries and subsites.

723 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After you select an object in the navigation pane, you can see its content in the preview pane.

Viewing Objects Properties and Opening Files

To view object properties, right-click an object in the preview pane and select View properties.

To open a document using an associated application, right-click a document in the preview pane and select
Op en.

Searching for Objects in Backup File

The search mechanism allows you to find items matching specified search criteria.

724 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To search for required items, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an object in which you want to find data.

2. Enter a search query in the search field at the top of the preview pane.

Consider the following:

• You can use double quotes to find the exact phrase. For example, "media player" .

• You can narrow search results by specifying various search criteria using the criteria:value format. For
more information about search parameters, see this section of REST API Reference. For example,
status:pending approval .

• You can use logical upper-cased operators such as AND, OR and NOT along with wildcard characters such
as * and ?.

For example:

o meeting AND from:[email protected] — returns objects that include both specified

keywords.

o meeting OR from:[email protected] — returns objects that include one of the specified

keywords.

o NOT from:[email protected] — excludes objects specified by a keyword.

o hasattachments:compar* — returns all objects that contain an attachment and the attachment name is
started with compar.

o ?all — returns all objects that contain the specified keyword with any alphabet in the first position.

Using Advanced Find

The Ad vanced Find mechanism allows you to define your search criteria more precisely.

For example, to find an object that starts with the word Video, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select a node and click Ad vanced Find on the ribbon.

725 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Define search criteria section, select Ca tegory > Document fields.

3. From the Field list, select File Name.

4. From the Condition list, select sta rts with.

5. In the Va lue field, specify a file name.

6. Click Ad d to List and then click Sta rt.

To remove a filter, click the cross mark next to it. To remove all configured filters, click Reset.

726 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
You can configure general settings for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

727 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Staging SQL Server Settings
To perform Microsoft SharePoint items restore, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint requires a Microsoft
SQL server to be used as a staging system.

Before you add a staging server, see the prerequisites in Staging SQL Server.

To configure a staging server, do the following:

1. In the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Sta ging Server tab and do the following:

a. From the SQL Server name drop-down list, select an instance that you want to use as your staging
server.

You can click Browse to locate an instance using the built-in browser, as described in Browsing for
Servers.

b. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to Windows server section, select one of the following options:

▪ Use current account. To connect to the specified server using the current user account under
which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint running.

▪ Use the following account. To connect to the specified server under a custom user account.

When using a custom account, in the Username field, specify a user name and in the P a ssword
field, provide the password.

c. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SQL Server instance section, select one of the following
options:

▪ Use the W indows server account specified above. To connect to the specified instance under the
user account that you have specified in the Sp ecify user account to connect to Windows server
section.

▪ Use the following account. To connect to the specified instance under a custom user account.

When using a custom account, in the Username field, specify a user name and in the P a ssword
field, provide the password.

728 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 To use SQL Server authentication, select the Use SQL Server authentication check box.

Browsing for Servers

To browse for an instance, perform one of the following actions:

• On the Local Servers tab, select a local Microsoft SQL Server instance that is located on the machine
where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint is opened.

• On the Network Servers tab, select a SQL Server instance over the network.

729 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Custom List Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint supports obtaining custom list templates from backups created by
Veeam Backup & Replication. The actual information about templates is stored directly in a backup file and
obtained automatically so that you can view the custom list data without having to perform any additional
operations.

NOTE

Configuring custom lists is not required when working with backups created by Veeam Backup for
Microsoft 365.

To see templates with their names and features, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Custom Lists tab.

3. Click the link under the Sta tus column which also comprises the total number of available templates.

4. If you want to automatically update existing templates, select the Automatically update custom list
templates from backups check box.

5. If you want to be notified whether the database contains new templates other than those you already
have, select the W a rn me if attached database has new custom list templates check box.

730 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

See the next figure showing you what custom list templates are available.

To remove templates, click Clear.

Importing Templates Manually

To import existing templates from a Microsoft SharePoint server manually, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. On the Custom Lists tab, click Up date.

3. Specify a path to Microsoft SharePoint templates, select a language and click OK. The language set in the
drop-down list depends on the installed language packages on the SharePoint server.

Importing Templates Using Ribbon Menu

NOTE

Available only for Microsoft SQL Server databases and requires a staging SQL server. For more information
on configuring a staging server, see Staging SQL Server Settings.

To import existing templates from the Microsoft SharePoint server, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a SQL database, and click Custom List Templates on the ribbon.

731 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • In the navigation pane, right-click a SQL database and select Custom list templates settings.

1. Select how you want your templates to be applied:

o Select Use global custom list settings to apply global list templates to the select database.

o Select Use the following custom list settings to apply the templates to the selected database only.

When using the latter option, specify the path to the Microsoft SharePoint templates, select the
language and click OK. The language set in the drop-down list depends on the installed language
packages on a SharePoint server.

732 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Mail Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to send Microsoft SharePoint items as attachments in email
messages.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint sends email messages on behalf of your Google or Microsoft 365
account using OAuth 2.0 Authorization Framework, or you can specify connection settings of an SMTP server
that uses basic authentication.

For more information, see the following sections:

• SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

• Google Account

• Microsoft 365 Account

SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

To configure sending Microsoft SharePoint items as attachments using an SMTP server with basic
authentication, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select SMTP server (basic authentication) .

5. Click Ad vanced to configure advanced settings. You can do the following:

o Specify a port number of an SMTP server that you want to use.

The default port number is 25. If you want to use SSL data encryption, specify port 587.

o Select the Connect using SSL check box to establish a secure connection.

o If an SMTP server requires an authentication for outgoing mail, select the The SMTP server requires
a uthentication check box and provide authentication credentials.

6. In the SMTP server field, specify the address of a server that you want to use as an SMTP server.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint establishes a connection to the smtp.office365.com
server.

7. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

733 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint sends a test email message.

9. Click Send to send a test email message.

10. Click OK.

Google Account
You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint to send Microsoft SharePoint items as attachments
on behalf of your Google account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint
communicates with the Gmail API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint uses an access
token issued by Google Authorization Server. To acquire an access token, you can either use an application
preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication or specify OAuth 2.0 client credentials of the custom application
registered in the Google Cloud console. For more information on obtaining client credentials, see Registering
Application in Google Cloud Console.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Google account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Google Gmail (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Sig n in with Google and enter
credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Sig n in with
Goog le and enter credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

734 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Google account,
specify a new email address in the From field and click Sig n in with Google.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Goog le Gmail Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify the following:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify specify the obtained client ID.

2. In the Client secret field, specify the client secret.

Registering Application in Google Cloud Console

To register an application in the Google Cloud console, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Google Cloud console under a Google account that you want to use for sending emails.

735 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Create a new project and enable Gmail API for the project.

You can do this with the Google setup tool.

3. Configure OAuth consent screen for your project.

4. Create the OAuth 2.0 client ID credentials — a client ID and client secret for the custom application.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Client ID

o Client secret

Microsoft 365 Account

You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint to send Microsoft SharePoint items as attachments
on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint
communicates with the Microsoft Graph API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint uses
an access token issued by the Microsoft identity platform. To acquire an access token, you can either use an
application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication or specify details of the custom Azure AD application
registered in the Azure portal. For more information on obtaining client credentials, see Registering Application
in Azure Portal.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Microsoft 365 (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Authorize now and enter
credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Authorize
now and enter credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

736 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Microsoft 365
account, specify a new email address in the From field and click Re-a uthorize.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Microsoft 365 Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify an identification number of your Azure AD application.

You can find this number in an application settings in your Azure Active Directory. For more information,
see this Microsoft article.

2. In the Tena nt ID field, specify Azure Active Directory tenant ID.

Registering Application in Azure Portal

To register an application in the Azure portal, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Azure portal using an account that you want to use for sending emails. The account must
have an active subscription.

2. Register an application. For more information on registering applications, see this Microsoft article.

737 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Select AP I permissions and grant the application the Mail.Send permission of the Application type for the
Microsoft Graph API.

4. Select Authentication > P latform configurations > Ad d a platform > Configure p latforms > Mobile and
d esktop applications and specify http://localhost as a redirect URI. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Directory (tenant) ID

o Application (client) ID

738 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Advanced Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to configure advanced settings such as extended logging
mode and pop-up notifications.

To configure advanced settings, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ad vanced tab.

3. If you want to enable extended logging mode to collect logs that contain additional information on
specific operations, select the E na ble extended logging check box. After enabling extended logging mode,
you can go back to the application and perform actions for which you want to collect additional
information. Then you can collect logs. For more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

4. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint displays notifica tions when loading backups created
by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 from object storage. If you want to disable these notifications, clear
the Show p op-up notifications on startup check box.

5. Click OK.

739 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Standalone Databases
You can add standalone databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint scope and connect to a
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server and service provider server to view backups located on these servers.

740 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Microsoft SharePoint Databases
You can add Microsoft SharePoint databases to the application scope manually. For example, you may want to
do this to restore items from a Microsoft SharePoint database exported earlier using Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SQL Server. For more information, see Exporting as MDF.

When you add a standalone Microsoft SharePoint database to the application scope, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint attaches the database to the staging SQL server, creating a temporary Microsoft
SharePoint content database from which you can restore your items.

To manually add a Microsoft SharePoint database to the application scope, take the following steps:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Database > Microsoft SharePoint database on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Da tabases node and select Ad d database.

2. Specify the location of the Microsoft SharePoint primary content database file ( .mdf). The secondary
database and the transaction log file (.ldf) will be added automatically. Keep in mind that shared fold ers
and mapped network drives are not supported as a location for Microsoft SharePoint content database
files.

To add remote BLOB stores, click Ad d next to the Remote BLOB Stores section.

3. Click OK.

741 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
Databases
To manually add databases that store Microsoft 365 organization data, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Database > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 database on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Da tabases node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 database.

2. Specify the database file location and log directory.

3. Click Op en.

NOTE

Make sure you have disabled the Veeam Backup Proxy for Microsoft 365 Service when adding local
databases. You can stop this service by using the services.msc console. If you try to add a database
having this service still in progress, you will receive an error message and will not be able to access the
database due to database lock.

742 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server
You can use the built-in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint abilities to connect to another Veeam Backup
for Microsoft 365 server and add its databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint scope.

To connect to another Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server remotely, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Database > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Da tabases node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server.

2. Specify a server name or IP address and enter credentials to access the specified server.

Select the Use W indows session authentication check box to connect with the user account under which
you are currently logged in.

3. Click Connect.

743 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service
Provider
In Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint, you can connect to a service provider server to add its backups to
the application scope and perform a restore directly from such backups.

NOTE

Make sure that both Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint and Veeam Backup & Replication are
installed on the same server and at least one service provider is ad ded to Veeam Backup & Replication. For
more information, see the Connecting to Service Providers section of the Veeam Cloud Connect Guide.

To add Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service providers, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Database > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider on the
ribbon.

o Right-click the Da tabases node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider.

2. From the Select service provider and authentication method drop-down list, select a service provider that
you want to add and select an authentication method that can be either Modern authentication or Basic
authentication.

3. [For Modern authentication] Select a region to which a Microsoft 365 organization of the selected service
provider belongs.

4. [For Modern authentication] Copy the device code and use it to sign in to Azure Active Directory.

For Basic authentication, you must enter a user name and password to connect to the service provider
server.

NOTE

You cannot use Basic authentication to load backups if a Microsoft 365 organization has been added
to the service provider infrastructure using Modern authentication.

5. Select a point-in-time state as of which you want to load Microsoft 365 backups.

To select a point in time, use the calendar control.

6. Select the Show items that have been deleted by user check box to see all the items that were removed.

7. Select the Show a ll versions of items that have b een modified by user check box if you want to load
modified versions.

744 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. Click Connect.

745 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Removing Databases
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to remove Microsoft SharePoint databases from the
application scope when you no longer need it.

To remove a database from the application scope, right-click a database in the navigation pane and select
Remove database.

746 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore from Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 Backups
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to the
original location or other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-premises Microsoft organizations.

Consider the following:

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint comes as part of Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365, the
backup content is loaded automatically when you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint comes as part of Veeam Backup & Replication, add a
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server or a Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 backup fil e. For more
information, see Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server and Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 Databases.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

747 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Sites
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore Microsoft SharePoint sites to the original
location or other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-premises Microsoft organizations.

Restoring Sites to Original Location

To restore Microsoft SharePoint sites to the original location, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify a target site alias.

5. Specify restore options.

748 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a site that you want to restore, and on the Site tab, click Restore Site >
Restore site to <site_name>.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a site and select Restore site > Restore site.

NOTE

When restoring sites to site collections, make sure that such collections exist in the target location; Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

749 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication, or authenticate on an on-premises
Microsoft SharePoint server, and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

750 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

On-Premises Organizations
To authenticate on an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint server, use an account that you are currently logged in
to or provide a user name and password.

Restoring from Microsoft SQL Server Database

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore Microsoft SharePoint sites from a Microsoft SQL
server database. You can get the database files directly from the original Microsoft SharePoint machine, or you
can use Veeam Backup & Replication to restore guest OS files of the machine.

When restoring from a Microsoft SQL server database, provide the following:

• The site URL to which you want to restore your site.

• Authentication credentials.

751 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

When restoring Microsoft SharePoint sites from a Microsoft SQL server database, you will proceed directly
to the Specify Restore Options step of the wizard.

For more information on how to restore Microsoft SharePoint sites from a Microsoft SQL server database, see
Restoring Sites.

752 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available for data restore from backups created b y Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 and if you
have selected the Modern Authentication option at the previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

753 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target Site Alias
This step is only available if you restore subsites or site collections from backups created by Veeam Backup for
Microsoft 365 with the Group#0 or SITEPAGEPUBLISHING#0 template. These are subsites, team sites with
modern authentication or communication sites with modern authentication. For sites with different template,
such as personal sites or other sites, this step is unavailable. You proceed to the Specify Restore Options step.

At this step of the wizard, specify a target site alias that you want to use for data restore.

NOTE

When restoring site collections other than site collections with the Group#0 or SITEPAGEPUBLISHING#0
template, make sure that such collections exist in the target location; Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint does not create site collections.

754 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items. If this check box is
selected, you can select one of the following options:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore permissions. Allows you to restore permissions. If not selected, the permissions for the restored
document library or list will be set in the following way:

o If the library (or list) does not exist on target, it will be created inheriting permissions from the parent
object.

o If the library (or list) already exists on target, permissions will be preserved.

• Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file. Select this check box if you want to
notify users about items restore. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will notify users with whom
items have been shared. You can select this check box only if the Restore permissions check box is
selected.

NOTE

The Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file check box is only available
when restoring data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 for Microsoft 365
organizations.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

755 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • Restore subsites. Allows you to restore your subsites.

Restoring Sites to Another Location

You can restore Microsoft SharePoint sites to other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-premises Microsoft
organizations.

Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations

You can restore backed-up data to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA)
and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations
section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

To restore Microsoft SharePoint sites to another Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select a target site location.

3. Select an authentication method.

4. Log in to Microsoft 365.

5. Specify a target site web address.

6. Specify restore options.

756 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard

To launch the Restore wizard, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a site that you want to restore, and on the Site tab, click Restore Site >
Restore site to.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a site and select Restore site > Restore site to.

NOTE

When restoring sites to site collections, make sure that such collections exist in the target location; Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

757 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Target Site Location

At this step of the wizard, select Microsoft 365 to restore the SharePoint site to a SharePoint Online
organization with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For
more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
User Guide.

758 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Select Authentication Method

At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your target SharePoint Online organization
belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your target SharePoint Online organization.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your target SharePoint Online organization
belongs.

759 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

760 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Log In to Microsoft 365

This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

761 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Target Site Web Address

At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site.

NOTE

When restoring site collections, make sure that such collections exist in the target location; Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

762 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Restore Options

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

• Restore subsites. Allows you to restore your subsites.

Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers

You can restore backed-up data to on-premises Microsoft SharePoint servers. For more information, see the
Adding On-Premises Microsoft Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

To restore Microsoft SharePoint sites to an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint server, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select a target site location.

3. Specify a target site web address and credentials.

4. Specify restore options.

763 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard

To launch the Restore wizard, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a site that you want to restore, and on the Site tab, click Restore Site >
Restore site to.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a site and select Restore site > Restore site to.

NOTE

When restoring sites to site collections, make sure that such collections exist in the target location; Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

764 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Target Site Location

At this step of the wizard, select On-p remises Microsoft SharePoint Server to restore the SharePoint site to an
on-premises Microsoft SharePoint organization. For more information, see the Adding On-Premises Microsoft
Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

765 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Site Web Address and Credentials

At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and provide credentials to connect to
the Microsoft SharePoint server.

NOTE

Make sure that you restore to site collection that exists in the target location; Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

To specify web address of a target site and credentials to connect to SharePoint server, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SharePoint Server section, use an account that you are currently
logged in or provide a user name and password to connect to the on-premises Microsoft SharePoint
server.

766 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Restore Options

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore op tions that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

• Restore subsites. Allows you to restore your subsites.

767 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Document Libraries and Lists
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists
to the original location or other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-premises Microsoft organizations.

Restoring Document Libraries and Lists to Original Location

To restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists to the original location, do the following:

1. Launch the restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify a target list.

5. Specify restore options.

768 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard for a document library, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a document library that you want to restore, and on the Lib rary tab, click
Restore Library > Restore library to <library_name>.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a document library and select Restore library > Restore library.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a list that you want to restore, and on the List tab, click Restore List >
Restore list to <list_name>.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a list and select Restore list > Restore list.

769 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication, or authenticate on an on-premises
Microsoft SharePoint server, and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

770 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

On-Premises Organizations
To authenticate on an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint server, use an account that you are currently logged in
to or provide a user name and password.

Restoring from Microsoft SQL Server Database

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists
from a Microsoft SQL server database. You can get the database files directly from the original Microsoft
SharePoint machine, or you can use Veeam Backup & Replication to restore guest OS files of the machine.

When restoring from a Microsoft SQL server database, provide the following:

• The site URL to which you want to restore your site.

• Authentication credentials.

771 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

When restoring Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists from a Microsoft SQL server database,
you will proceed directly to the Specify Restore Options step of the wizard.

For more information about on how to restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists from a
Microsoft SQL server database, see Restoring Document Libraries and Lists.

772 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available for data restore from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 and if you
have selected the Modern Authentication option at the previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For mor e
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

773 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target List
At this step of the wizard, select whether you want to restore backed -up data to the original list or specify a
custom list.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore items to the original list. To restore the document library or list back to the original list.

• Restore items to the following list. To restore the document library or list to the specified list.

If the specified list does not exist, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will create it automatically.

774 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items. If this check box is
selected, you can select one of the following options:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore permissions. Allows you to restore permissions. If not selected, the permissions for the restored
document library or list will be set in the following way:

o If the library (or list) does not exist on target, it will be created inheriting permissions from the parent
object.

o If the library (or list) already exists on target, permissions will be preserved.

• Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the f ile. Select this check box if you want to
notify users about items restore. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will notify users with whom
items have been shared. You can select this check box only if the Restore permissions check box is
selected.

NOTE

The Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file check box is only available
when restoring data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 for Microsoft 365
organizations.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

775 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Document Libraries and Lists to Another Location
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists to other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-
premises Microsoft organizations.

Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations

You can restore backed-up data to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA)
and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations
section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

To restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists to another Microsoft 365 organization, do the
following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select a target site location.

3. Select an authentication method.

4. Log in to Microsoft 365.

5. Specify a target site web address and a target list.

6. Specify restore options.

776 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard

To launch the Restore wizard for a document library, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a document library that you want to restore, and on the Lib rary tab, click
Restore Library > Restore library to.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a document library and select Restore library > Restore library to.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a list that you want to restore, and on the List tab, click Restore List >
Restore list to.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a list and select Restore list > Restore list to.

777 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Target Site Location

At this step of the wizard, select Microsoft 365 to restore the document library or list to a SharePoint Online
organization with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For
more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
User Guide.

778 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Select Authentication Method

At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your target SharePoint Online organization
belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your target SharePoint Online organization.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your target SharePoint Online organization
belongs.

779 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

780 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Log In to Microsoft 365

This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

781 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Target Site and List

At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and select whether you want to
restore backed-up data to the original list or specify a custom list.

To specify web address of a target site and a list to restore backed -up data, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Ta rget list section, select one of the following options:

o Restore items to the original list. To restore the document library or list back to the original list.

o Restore items to the following list. To restore the document library or list to the specified list.

If the specified list does not exist, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will create it
automatically.

782 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Restore Options

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers

You can restore backed-up data to on-premises Microsoft SharePoint servers. For more information, see the
Adding On-Premises Microsoft Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

To restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists to an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint server, do
the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select a target site location.

3. Specify a target site web address and credentials.

4. Specify a target list.

5. Specify restore options.

783 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard

To launch the Restore wizard for a document library, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a document library that you want to restore, and on the Lib rary tab, click
Restore Library > Restore library to.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a document library and select Restore library > Restore library to.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a list that you want to restore, and on the List tab, click Restore List >
Restore list to.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a list and select Restore list > Restore list to.

784 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Target Site Location

At this step of the wizard, select On-p remises Microsoft SharePoint Server to restore the document library or list
to an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint organization. For more information, see the Adding On-Premises
Microsoft Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

785 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Site Web Address and Credentials

At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and provide credentials to connect to
the Microsoft SharePoint server.

NOTE

Make sure that you restore to site collection that exists in the target location; Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

To specify web address of a target site and credentials to connect to SharePoint server, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SharePoint Server section, use an account that you are currently
logged in to or provide a user name and password to connect to the on-premises Microsoft SharePoint
server.

786 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target List

At this step of the wizard, select whether you want to restore backed -up data to the original list or specify a
custom list.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore items to the original list. To restore the document library or list back to the original list.

• Restore items to the following list. To restore the document library or list to the specified list.
If the specified list does not exist, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will create it automatically.

787 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

788 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Documents and List Items
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items to
the original location or other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-premises Microsoft organizations.

Restoring Documents and List Items to Original Location

To restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items to the original location, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify a target list.

5. Specify restore options.

789 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard for a document, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a document that you want to restore, and on the Document tab, click Restore
Document > Restore document to <library_name>.

• In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Restore document > Restore document.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list item, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a list item that you want to restore, on the Item tab, click Restore Item >
Restore item to < list_name>.

• In the preview pane, right-click a list item and select Restore item > Restore item.

790 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication, or authenticate on an on-premises
Microsoft SharePoint server, and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

791 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

On-Premises Organizations
To authenticate on an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint server, use an account that you are currently logged in
to or provide a user name and password.

Restoring from Microsoft SQL Server Database

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items
from a Microsoft SQL server database. You can get the database files directly from the original Microsoft
SharePoint machine, or you can use Veeam Backup & Replication to restore guest OS files of the machine.

When restoring from a Microsoft SQL server database, provide the following:

• The site URL to which you want to restore your site.

• Authentication credentials.

792 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

When restoring Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items from a Microsoft SQL server database, you
will proceed directly to the Specify Restore Options step of the wizard.

For more information on how to restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items from a Microsoft SQL
server database, see Restoring Documents and List Items.

793 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available for data restore from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 and if you
have selected the Modern Authentication option at the previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

794 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target List
At this step of the wizard, select whether you want to restore backed -up data to the original list or specify a
custom list.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore items to the original list. To restore the document or list item back to the original list.

• Restore items to the following list. To restore the document or list item to the specified list.

Make sure to specify a list that exists in the original SharePoint site.

795 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items. If this check box is
selected, you can select one of the following options:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore permissions. Allows you to restore permissions. If not selected, the permissions for the restored
document library or list will be set in the following way:

o If the library (or list) does not exist on target, it will be created inheriting permissions from the parent
object.

o If the library (or list) already exists on target, permissions will be preserved.

• Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file. Select this check box if you want to
notify users about items restore. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will notify users with whom
items have been shared. You can select this check box only if the Restore permissions check box is
selected.

NOTE

The Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file check box is only available
when restoring data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 for Microsoft 365
organizations.

796 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Documents and List Items to Another Location
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items to other Microsoft 365 organizations and on-
premises Microsoft organizations.

Restore to Microsoft 365 Organizations

You can restore backed-up data to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA)
and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations
section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

To restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items to another Microsoft 365 organization, do the
following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select a target site location.

3. Select an authentication method.

4. Log in to Microsoft 365.

5. Specify a target site web address and a target list.

6. Specify restore options.

797 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard

To launch the Restore wizard for a document, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a document that you want to restore, and on the Document tab, click Restore
Document > Restore document to.

• In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Restore document > Restore document to.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list item, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a list item that you want to restore, and on the Item tab, click Restore Item >
Restore item to.

• In the preview pane, right-click a list item and select Restore item > Restore item to.

798 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Target Site Location

At this step of the wizard, select Microsoft 365 to restore the document or list item to a SharePoint Online
organization with enabled multi-factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For
more information, see the Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
User Guide.

799 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Select Authentication Method

At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your target SharePoint Online organization
belongs.

3. In the Org anization name field, enter a name of your target SharePoint Online organization.

4. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint populates this field with the identification number of
the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure
to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

2. From the Reg ion drop-down list, select a region to which your target SharePoint Online organization
belongs.

800 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

801 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Log In to Microsoft 365

This step is only available if you have selected the Modern Authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

802 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Target Site and List

At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and select whether you want to
restore backed-up data to the original list or specify a custom list.

To specify web address of a target site and a list to restore backed -up data, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Ta rget list section, select one of the following options:

o Restore items to the original list. To restore the document or list item back to the original list.

o Restore items to the following list. To restore the document or list item to the specified list.

Keep in mind that if you restore documents and the specified list does not exist, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint will create it automatically. If you restore list items, make sure to specify a list
that exists in the original SharePoint site.

803 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Restore Options

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

Restore to On-Premises Microsoft Servers

You can restore backed-up data to on-premises Microsoft SharePoint servers. For more information, see the
Adding On-Premises Microsoft Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

To restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items to an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint server, do the
following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select a target site location.

3. Specify a target site web address and credentials.

4. Specify a target list.

5. Specify restore options.

804 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard

To launch the Restore wizard for a document, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a document that you want to restore, and on the Document tab, click Restore
Document > Restore document to.

• In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Restore document > Restore document to.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list item, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a list item that you want to restore, and on the Item tab, click Restore Item >
Restore item to.

• In the preview pane, right-click a list item and select Restore item > Restore item to.

805 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Target Site Location

At this step of the wizard, select On-p remises Microsoft SharePoint Server to restore the document or list item
to an on-premises Microsoft SharePoint organization. For more information, see the Adding On-Premises
Microsoft Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

806 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target Site Web Address and Credentials

At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and provide credentials to connect to
the Microsoft SharePoint server.

NOTE

Make sure that you restore to site collection that exists in the target location; Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

To specify web address of a target site and credentials to connect to SharePoint server, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SharePoint Server section, use an account that you are currently
logged in to or provide a user name and password to connect to the on-premises Microsoft SharePoint
server.

807 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target List

At this step of the wizard, select whether you want to restore backed -up data to the original list or specify a
custom list.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore items to the original list. To restore the document or list item back to the original list.

• Restore items to the following list. To restore the document or list item to the specified list.
Keep in mind that if you restore documents and the specified list does not exist, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint will create it automatically. If you restore list items, make sure to specify a list that
exists in the original SharePoint site.

808 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

809 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restore from Veeam Backup & Replication
Backups
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint data from backups created by Veeam Backup & Replication to the original
or another location.

Consider the following:

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint comes as part of Veeam Backup & Replication, the backup
content is loaded automatically when you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint.

• If your Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint comes as part of a standalone Veeam Backup for
Microsoft 365 installation, you cannot restore from Veeam Backup & Replication backups by default. To
enable this functionality, install Veeam Backup & Replication on the machine and add a Microsoft SQL
Server database that contains your Microsoft SharePoint data. For more information, see Adding Microsoft
SharePoint Databases.

To get the database files, use any of the following methods:

o Get the database files directly from the original Microsoft SharePoint machine.

o Use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SQL Server to export database files from restore points created by
Veeam Backup & Replication. For more information, see Exporting as MDF.

o Use Veeam Backup & Replication to restore guest OS files of the machine. For more information, see
the Restore from Microsoft Windows File Systems (FAT, NTFS or ReFS) section of the
Veeam Backup & Replication User Guide.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

810 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Sites
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint sites to the same or a different location.

To restore a Microsoft SharePoint site, take the following steps:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target SharePoint site.

3. Specify restore options.

811 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a site that you want to restore, and on the Site tab, click Restore Site.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a site and select Restore site.

812 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Site
At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and provide credentials to connect to
the Microsoft SharePoint server.

NOTE

Make sure that you restore to site collection that exists in the target location; Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

To specify web address of a target site and credentials to connect to SharePoint server, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SharePoint Server section, use an account that you are currently
logged in or provide or specify another account to connect to the Microsoft SharePoint server.

813 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

• Restore subsites. Allows you to restore your subsites.

814 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Document Libraries and Lists
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint document libraries and lists to the same or a different site.

To restore a Microsoft SharePoint library or list, take the following steps:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target SharePoint site.

3. Specify restore options.

815 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard for a document library, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a document library that you want to restore, and on the Lib rary tab, click
Restore Library.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a document library and select Restore library.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select a list that you want to restore, and on the List tab, click Restore List.

• In the navigation pane, right-click a list and select Restore list.

816 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Site
At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and provide credentials to connect to
the Microsoft SharePoint server.

NOTE

Make sure that you restore to site collection that exists in the target location; Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

To specify web address of a target site and credentials to connect to SharePoint server, do the following:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SharePoint Server section, use an account that you are currently
logged in or provide or specify another account to connect to the Microsoft Sha rePoint server.

817 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

• Restore subsites. Allows you to restore your subsites.

818 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Documents and List Items
You can restore Microsoft SharePoint documents and list items to the same or a different site.

To restore a Microsoft SharePoint document or list item, take the following steps:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Specify a target SharePoint site.

3. Specify a target list.

4. Specify restore options.

819 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard for a document, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a document that you want to restore, and on the Document tab, click Restore
Document.

• In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Restore document.

To launch the Restore wizard for a list item, do one of the following:

• In the preview pane, select a list item that you want to restore, and on the Item tab, click Restore Item.

• In the preview pane, right-click a list item and select Restore item.

820 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Specify Target Site
At this step of the wizard, specify web address of a target SharePoint site and provide credentials to connect to
the Microsoft SharePoint server.

NOTE

Make sure that you restore to site collection that exists in the target location; Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint does not create site collections.

To specify web address of a target site and credentials to connect to SharePoint server, do the fol lowing:

1. In the Restore to the following site URL field, specify web address of a target site.

2. In the Sp ecify user account to connect to SharePoint Server section, use an account that you are currently
logged in or provide or specify another account to connect to the Microsoft SharePoint server.

821 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Specify Target List
At this step of the wizard, select whether you want to restore backed -up data to the original list or specify a
custom list.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore items to the original list. To restore the document or list item back to the original list.

• Restore items to the following list. To restore the document or list item to the specified list.

Keep in mind that if you restore documents and the specified list does not exist, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft SharePoint will create it automatically. If you restore list items, make sure to specify a list that
exists in the original SharePoint site.

822 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore list views. Allows you to restore your list views.

• Restore subsites. Allows you to restore your subsites.

823 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint to export and import Microsoft SharePoint data.

Before exporting data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

824 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Microsoft SharePoint Data
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to export SharePoint document libraries and lists from
backups created by Veeam Backup & Replication.

The exported content will be saved as a set of XML files and can be imported to another SharePoint database
using PowerShell cmdlets. For more information, see Importing Microsoft SharePoint Data.

To export a document library, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select a document library that you want to export, and on the Lib rary tab, click E x port Library.

o Right-click a document library and select E x port library.

2. Specify the output directory and click OK.

To export a list, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select a list that you want to export, and on the List tab, click E x port List.

o Right-click a list and select E x port list.

2. Specify the output directory and click OK.

NOTE

You cannot export an empty folder, an empty list and an individual list item.

825 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Importing Microsoft SharePoint Data
To import document library or list, use one of the following PowerShell cmdlets:

• For PowerShell snap-in, use the following command:

Add-PsSnapin Microsoft.SharePoint.PowerShell
Import-SPWeb -Identity "http://<web_server_name>/sites/<destination_site>"
-Path "C:\<export_folder>" -NoFileCompression –IncludeUserSecurity

• For SharePoint Management Shell, use the following command:

Import-SPWeb -Identity "http://<web_server_name>/sites/<destination_site>"

-Path "C:\<export_folder>" -NoFileCompression –IncludeUserSecurity

where:

• <web_server_name> — destination web server.

• <destination_site> — destination website.

• <export_folder> — source folder containing exported library or list content.

To get extended help on the Import–SPWeb command, use the following command:

Get-Help Import-SPWeb -full

826 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Saving Microsoft SharePoint Documents
and Libraries
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to save your document libraries and library documents to a
specified location.

To save a document library, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select a document library that you want to save, and on the Lib rary tab, click Sa ve Library > Save as
files or Sa ve Library > Save as ZIP.

o Right-click a document library and select Sa ve library > Sa ve as files or Sa ve library > Sa ve as ZIP.

2. In the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder or Sa ve.

Keep in mind that if you select the Sa ve as ZIP option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will save a
library to an archive with the archive.zip name.

To save a library document, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select a document that you want to save, and on the Document tab, click Sa ve Document > Sa ve as
files or Sa ve Document > Sa ve as ZIP.

o Right-click a document and select Sa ve document > Sa ve as files or Sa ve document > Sa ve as ZIP.

2. In the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder or Sa ve.

Keep in mind that if you select the Sa ve as ZIP option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint will save a
library to an archive with the archive.zip name.

827 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Sending Microsoft SharePoint Documents
and Libraries
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint allows you to send libraries or library documents to the specified
recipients by email.

TIP

Before sending documents, make sure to configure mail settings. The amount of data you can send at a
time depends on your SMTP server configuration. For more information about configuring mail settings,
see Mail Settings.

To send SharePoint libraries or library documents by email, do the following:

1. Depending on the type of object you want to send, the following actions are available:

o To send a document library, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select a document library that you want to send, and on the Lib rary tab,
click Send Library.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click a document library and select Send library.

o To send a library document, in the navigation pane, select a document library that contains the
document that you want to send, and then do one of the following:

▪ In the preview pane, select a library document, and on the Document tab, click Send Document.

▪ In the preview pane, right-click a library document and select Send document.

2. In the Send Items window, provide a recipient address.

The From field is filled automatically based on the address you have provided when configuring mail
settings.

828 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 You can also edit the message subject and body. To edit the message body, click More details.

829 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint, you can visit Veeam R&D
Forums or submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Advanced Settings.

2. Use the E x port Logs wizard as described in the Exporting Logs section of the Veeam Backup & Replication
User Guide. Make sure to export all logs for the relevant backup infrastructure components.

830 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive
for Business
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to restore Microsoft OneDrive data from
backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

831 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business comes as part of the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint installation package and has the same system requirements.

Consider that when Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint is installed on a server on which both
Veeam Backup & Replication and Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 are installed, the notification settings will be
inherited from the Veeam Backup & Replication Global Notification settings.

832 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and limitations of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business.

• Restore of OneNote notebooks from backups of Microsoft OneDrive for Business data for organizations
with modern app-only authentication is not supported.

• If the size of a OneNote notebook is greater 2 GB, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business
saves this OneNote notebook as a folder with OneNote items.

833 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business and load backups, go to Sta rt, click Veea m
E x plorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business and manually open Microsoft OneDrive databases. For more
information, see Standalone Databases.

If you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

• The domain name or IP address of a server to which you want to connect

• The port number

• User account credentials

Consider the following:

o To perform restore operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business must be run with
elevated permissions. The user account must be a member of the local Administrators group on the
machine where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business is installed.

o The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business is running, select Use
W ind ows session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

834 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
The user interface of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business is designed to let you quickly find
commands that you need to restore Microsoft OneDrive data from backups created by Veeam Backup for
Microsoft 365.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings. For more information, see General
Application Settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business wizard or
window. You will then be redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains operation commands organized into logical groups represented as tabs.
The ribbon is displayed at the top of the main application window.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of folders with backed -up data.
Also, it allows you to search for OneDrives using keywords.

835 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which provides search capabilities and allows you to view details about items that are
contained in a folder you have selected in the navigation pane.

836 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business to view the contents of a backup file, view
object properties, open files, search for OneDrives and for items in a backup file as well as customize criteria of
your search.

Searching for OneDrives

You can use keywords to search for OneDrives in the database structure containing your OneDrive objects. To do
this, enter a search query in the search field at the top of the navigation pane.

To remove a keyword, click the cross mark.

Browsing Backup Content

To view the contents of a backup file, you use the navigation pane which shows you the database structure
containing your OneDrive objects.

837 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After you select an object in the navigation pane, you can see its content in the preview p ane.

Viewing Objects Properties and Opening Files

To view object properties, right-click an object in the preview pane and select View properties.

To open a document using an associated application, right-click a document in the preview pane and select
Op en.

Searching for Objects in Backup File

The search mechanism allows you to find items matching specified search criteria.

838 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To search for required items, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, select an object in which you want to find your data.

2. Enter a search query in the search field at the top of the preview pane.

Consider the following:

• You can use double quotes to find the exact phrase. For example, "Attachments" .

• You can narrow search results by specifying various search criteria using the criteria:value format. For
more information about search parameters, see this section of REST API Reference. For example,
from:[email protected].

• You can use logical upper-cased operators such as AND, OR and NOT along with wildcard characters such
as * and ?.

For example:

o meeting AND from:[email protected] — returns objects that include both specified

keywords.

o meeting OR from:[email protected] — returns objects that include one of the specified

keywords.

o NOT from:[email protected] — excludes objects specified by a keyword.

o hasattachments:compar* — returns all objects that contain an attachment and the attachment name is
started with compar.

o ?all — returns all objects that contain the specified keyword with any alphabet in the first position.

Using Advanced Find

The Ad vanced Find mechanism allows you to define your search criteria more precisely.

For example, to find an object that starts with the word veeam, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select a node and click Ad vanced Find on the ribbon.

839 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Define search criteria section, select Ca tegory > Document fields.

3. From the Field list, select File Name.

4. From the Condition list, select sta rts with.

5. In the Va lue field, specify a file name.

6. Click Ad d to List and then click Sta rt.

To remove a filter, click the cross mark next to it. To remove all configured filters, click Reset.

840 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
You can configure general settings for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business.

841 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Mail Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to send Microsoft OneDrive items as
attachments in email messages.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business sends email messages on behalf of your Google or
Microsoft 365 account using OAuth 2.0 Authorization Framework, or you can specify connection settings of an
SMTP server that uses basic authentication.

For more information, see the following sections:

• SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

• Google Account

• Microsoft 365 Account

SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

To configure sending Microsoft OneDrive items as attachments using an SMTP server with basic authentication,
do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select SMTP server (basic authentication) .

5. Click Ad vanced to configure advanced settings. You can do the following:

o Specify a port number of an SMTP server that you want to use.

The default port number is 25. If you want to use SSL data encryption, specify port 587.

o Select the Connect using SSL check box to establish a secure connection.

o If an SMTP server requires an authentication for outgoing mail, select the The SMTP server requires
a uthentication check box and provide authentication credentials.

6. In the SMTP server field, specify the address of a server that you want to use as an SMTP server.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business establishes a connection to the
smtp.office365.com server.

7. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

842 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
OneDrive for Business sends a test email message.

9. Click Send to send a test email message.

10. Click OK.

Google Account
You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business to send Microsoft OneDrive items as
attachments on behalf of your Google account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive
for Business communicates with the Gmail API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for
Business uses an access token issued by Google Authorization Server. To acquire an access token, you can either
use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication or specify OAuth 2.0 client credentials of the
custom application registered in the Google Cloud console. For more information on obtaining client
credentials, see Registering Application in Google Cloud Console.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Google account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Google Gmail (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Sig n in with Google and enter
credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Sig n in with
Goog le and enter credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

843 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
OneDrive for Business sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Google account,
specify a new email address in the From field and click Sig n in with Google.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Goog le Gmail Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify the following:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify specify the obtained client ID.

2. In the Client secret field, specify the client secret.

Registering Application in Google Cloud Console

To register an application in the Google Cloud console, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Google Cloud console under a Google account that you want to use for sending emails.

844 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Create a new project and enable Gmail API for the project.

You can do this with the Google setup tool.

3. Configure OAuth consent screen for your project.

4. Create the OAuth 2.0 client ID credentials — a client ID and client secret for the custom application.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Client ID

o Client secret

Microsoft 365 Account

You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business to send Microsoft OneDrive items as
attachments on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
OneDrive for Business communicates with the Microsoft Graph API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft OneDrive for Business uses an access token issued by the Microsoft identity platform. To acquire an
access token, you can either use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication or specify details of
the custom Azure AD application registered in the Azure portal. For more information on obtaining client
credentials, see Registering Application in Azure Portal.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Microsoft 365 (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Authorize now and enter
credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Authorize
now and enter credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
OneDrive for Business sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

845 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Microsoft 365
account, specify a new email address in the From field and click Re-a uthorize.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Microsoft 365 Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify an identification number of your Azure AD application.

You can find this number in an application settings in your Azure Active Directory. For more information,
see this Microsoft article.

2. In the Tena nt ID field, specify Azure Active Directory tenant ID.

Registering Application in Azure Portal

To register an application in the Azure portal, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Azure portal using an account that you want to use for sending emails. The account must
have an active subscription.

2. Register an application. For more information on registering applications, see this Microsoft article.

846 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Select AP I permissions and grant the application the Mail.Send permission of the Application type for the
Microsoft Graph API.

4. Select Authentication > P latform configurations > Ad d a platform > Configure p latforms > Mobile and
d esktop applications and specify http://localhost as a redirect URI. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Directory (tenant) ID

o Application (client) ID

847 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Advanced Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to configure advanced settings such as extended
logging mode and pop-up notifications.

To configure advanced settings, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ad vanced tab.

3. If you want to enable extended logging mode to collect logs that contain additional information on
specific operations, select the E na ble extended logging check box. After enabling extended logging mode,
you can go back to the application and perform actions for which you want to collect additional
information. Then you can collect logs. For more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

4. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business displays notifications when loading
backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 from object storage. If you want to disable these
notifications, clear the Show p op-up notifications on startup check box.

5. Click OK.

848 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Standalone Databases
You can add standalone databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business scope and
connect to a Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server and service provider server to view backups located on
these servers.

849 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
Databases
To manually add databases that store Microsoft 365 organization data, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Org > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 database on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Org anizations node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 database.

2. Specify the database file location and log directory.

3. Click Op en.

NOTE

Make sure you have disabled the Veeam Backup Proxy for Microsoft 365 Service when adding local
databases. You can stop this service by using the services.msc console. If you try to add a database
having this service still in progress, you will receive an error message and will not be able to access the
database due to database lock.

850 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server
You can use the built-in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business abilities to connect to another
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server and add its databases to the Veeam Explorer for Micros oft OneDrive for
Business scope.

To connect to another Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server remotely, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Org > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Org anizations node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server.

2. Specify a server name or IP address and enter credentials to access the specified server.

Select the Use W indows session authentication check box to connect with the user account under which
you are currently logged in.

3. Click Connect.

851 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service
Provider
In Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business, you can connect to a service provider server to add its
backups to the application scope and perform a restore directly from such backups.

NOTE

Make sure that both Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business and Veeam Backup & Replication
are installed on the same server and at least one service provider is added to Veeam Backup & Replication.
For more information, see the Connecting to Service Providers section of the Veeam Cloud Connect Guide.

To add Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service providers, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Org > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Org anizations node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider.

2. From the Select service provider and authentication method drop-down list, select a service provider that
you want to add and select an authentication method that can be either Modern authentication or Basic
authentication.

3. [For Modern authentication] Select a region to which a Microsoft 365 organization of the selected service
provider belongs.

4. [For Modern authentication] Copy the device code and use it to sign in to Azure Active Directory.

For Basic authentication, you must enter a user name and password to connect to the service provider
server.

NOTE

You cannot use Basic authentication to load backups if a Microsoft 365 organization has been added
to the service provider infrastructure using Modern authentication.

5. Select a point-in-time state as of which you want to load Microsoft 365 backups.

To select a point in time, use the calendar control.

6. Select the Show items that have been deleted by user check box to see all the items that were removed.

7. Select the Show a ll versions of items that have b een modified by user check box if you want to load
modified versions.

852 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. Click Connect.

853 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Removing Organizations
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to remove an organization from the application
scope when you no longer need it.

To remove an organization from the application scope, right-click an organization in the navigation pane and
select Remove organization.

854 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business to restore data to Microsoft 365 organizations.

NOTE

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business restores only the latest version of
OneDrive items to their original location. If you want to restore all versions of OneDrive items and specify
another location, you can copy your OneDrive data. For more information, see Data Copy.

855 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Single OneDrive
To restore data of a single OneDrive, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

856 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to restore, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• To restore OneDrive, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select OneDrive that you want to restore, and on the OneDrive tab, click
Restore OneDrive and select one of the following options:

▪ Overwrite — to completely overwrite existing OneDrive data.

▪ Keep — to preserve existing data and restore items with the RESTORED prefix (RESTORED-
<file_name>.ext).

o In the navigation pane, right-click OneDrive and select Restore OneDrive > Overwrite or Restore
OneDrive > Keep.

• To restore a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to restore, and on the Folder tab, click Restore
Fold er and select one of the following options:

▪ Overwrite — to completely overwrite existing OneDrive data.

▪ Keep — to preserve existing data and restore items with the RESTORED prefix (RESTORED-
<file_name>.ext).

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder and select Restore folder > Overwrite or Restore folder >
Keep.

• To restore a document, in the navigation pane, select a folder that contains the document, and then do
one of the following:

o In the preview pane, select a document that you want to restore, and on the Document tab, click
Restore Document and select one of the following options:

▪ Overwrite — to completely overwrite existing OneDrive data.

▪ Keep — to preserve existing data and restore items with the RESTORED prefix (RESTORED-
<file_name>.ext).

857 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Restore document > Overwrite or Restore
d ocument > Keep.

858 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business populates this field with the identification
number of the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application,
make sure to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD
Application Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

859 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

860 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft OneDrive for Business, required permissions are the same as for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint. For more information, see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Restore.

861 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Multiple OneDrives
To restore multiple OneDrives, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Select OneDrives.

862 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select an organization with OneDrives, and on the Home tab, click Restore
OneDrives and select one of the following options:

o Overwrite — to completely overwrite existing OneDrives.

o Keep — to preserve existing data and restore items with the RESTORED prefix (RESTORED-
<file_name>.ext).

• In the navigation pane, right-click an organization with OneDrives and select Restore OneDrives >
Overwrite or Restore OneDrives > Keep.

863 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD applica tion that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business populates this field with the identification
number of the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application,
make sure to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD
Application Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

864 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

865 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft OneDrive for Business, required permissions are the same as for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
SharePoint. For more information, see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

866 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Select OneDrives
At this step of the wizard, select OneDrives that you want to restore and click Restore.

If you want to check whether user accounts whose OneDrives you want to restore exist, click Resolve selected
a ccounts.

867 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Copy
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business to copy OneDrive data to a different location.

To copy OneDrive data to the same or different user, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify a target user.

5. Specify a target folder.

6. Specify restore options.

868 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
Depending on the type of object you want to copy, to launch the Restore wizard, the following actions are
available:

• To copy OneDrive, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select OneDrive that you want to copy, and on the OneDrive tab, click Cop y
OneDrive.

o In the navigation pane, right-click OneDrive and select Cop y OneDrive.

• To copy a folder, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to copy, and on the Fold er tab, click Cop y Folder.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a folder and select Cop y folder.

• To copy a document, in the navigation pane, select a folder that contains the document, and then do one
of the following:

o In the preview pane, select a document that you want to copy, and on the Document tab, click Cop y
Document.

o In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Cop y document.

869 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified object back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business populates this field with the identification
number of the application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application,
make sure to grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD
Application Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

870 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the SharePoint organization.

871 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has the SharePoint Administrator role.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

872 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Target User
At this step of the wizard, specify a target user where you want to copy data.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore to original user. To copy OneDrive data back to the original user.

• Restore to the following user. To copy OneDrive data to the specified user.

To select a target user, do the following:

1. Click Browse.

2. In the Browse OneDrive Accounts window, select the necessary account and click Select.

873 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Target Folder
At this step of the wizard, specify the target folder to which you want to copy data.

874 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the restore options that you want to apply and click
Restore.

You can select the following options:

• Cha nged items. Allows you to restore data that has been modified in your production environment.

• Missing items. Allows you to restore missing items.

• Restore only latest version. Allows you to restore only the latest version of items. If this check box is
selected, you can select one of the following options:

o Overwrite. To overwrite data in the production environment.

o Merge. To merge an existing and a backup version of items.

If the Restore only latest version check box is not selected, all versions of items in the production
environment will be replaced with the relevant data from the backup file.

• Restore shared access. Allows you to restore shared access.

• Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file. Select this check box if you want to
notify users about items restore. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business will notify users w ith
whom items have been shared. You can select this check box only if the Restore shared access check box is
selected.

NOTE

The Send a notification by email to the users with permissions to the file check box is only available
when restoring data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 for Microsoft 365
organizations.

875 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Saving Microsoft OneDrives
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to save OneDrive content to the specified
location.

Saving Multiple OneDrives

To save data of multiple OneDrives, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select an organization with OneDrives, and on the Home tab, click Sa ve OneDrives and select how you
want to save data:

▪ Sa ve as files. Select this option if you want to save each file separately to a specified location.

▪ Sa ve as ZIP. Select this option if you want to add saved files to a ZIP archive and save the
resulting archive to a specified location. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business will
save files to an archive with the OneDrives_<timestamp>.zip name.

o Right-click an organization with OneDrives and select Sa ve OneDrives > Save as files or Sa ve
OneDrives > Sa ve as ZIP.

2. In the Sa ve OneDrives Wizard wizard, select OneDrive accounts to save.

876 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Specify a folder where to save OneDrive data and click Sa ve.

Saving Individual OneDrives

To save data of a specific OneDrive, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, select OneDrive, and on the OneDrive tab, click Sa ve OneDrive and select how you
want to save data:

o Sa ve as files. Select this option if you want to save each file separately to a specified location. To
specify a location, in the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder.

o Sa ve as ZIP. Select this option if you want to add saved files to a ZIP archive and save the resulting
archive to a specified location. To specify a location, in the displayed window, browse to the necessary
folder and click Sa ve. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business will save files to an archive
with the <user_name>.zip name in this folder.

877 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • In the navigation pane, right-click OneDrive and select Sa ve OneDrive > Sa ve as files or Sa ve OneDrive >
Sa ve as ZIP.

878 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Saving Microsoft OneDrive Documents and
Folders
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to save documents and folders located in
Microsoft OneDrive to a specified location.

To save a folder, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select a folder that you want to save, and on the Fold er tab, click Sa ve Folder > Sa ve folder as files or
Sa ve Folder > Sa ve folder as ZIP.

o Right-click a folder and select Sa ve folder > Sa ve folder as files or Sa ve folder > Sa ve folder as ZIP.

2. In the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder or Sa ve.

Keep in mind that if you select the Sa ve as ZIP option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business
will save a folder to an archive with the archive.zip name.

To save a document, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select a document that you want to save, and on the Document tab, click Sa ve Document > Sa ve as
files or Sa ve Document > Sa ve as ZIP.

o Right-click a document and select Sa ve document > Sa ve as files or Sa ve document > Sa ve as ZIP.

2. In the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder or Sa ve.

Keep in mind that if you select the Sa ve as ZIP option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business
will save a document to an archive with the archive.zip name.

879 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Sending Microsoft OneDrive Data
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business allows you to send OneDrive data to specified recipients by
email.

TIP

Before sending documents, make sure to configure mail settings. The amount of data you can send at a
time depends on your SMTP server configuration. For more information about configuring mail settings,
see Mail Settings.

To send OneDrive data by email, do the following:

1. Depending on the type of object you want to send, the following actions are available:

o To send OneDrive, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select OneDrive that you want to send, and on the OneDrive tab, click
Send OneDrive.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click OneDrive and select Send OneDrive.

o To send a folder, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select a folder that you want to send, and on the Fold er tab, click Send
Fold er.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click a folder and select Send folder.

o To send a document, in the navigation pane, select a folder that contains the document that you want
to send, and then do one of the following:

▪ In the preview pane, select a document, and on the Document tab, click Send Document.

▪ In the preview pane, right-click a document and select Send document.

880 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Send Items window, provide a recipient address.

The From field is filled automatically based on the address you have provided when configuring mail
settings.

You can also edit the message subject and body. To edit the message body, click More details.

881 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft OneDrive for Business, you can visit
Veeam R&D Forums or submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Advanced Settings.

2. Use the Sup port Information wizard as described in the Collecting Log Files section of the Veeam Backup
for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

882 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams allows you to restore and export Microsoft Teams data from backups
created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

883 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Planning and Preparation
You can configure your environment before you start using Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams.

884 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Ports
For restore of Microsoft Teams data, you must open the same ports that are required for restore of Microsoft
Exchange and Microsoft SharePoint data. For more information, see Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Exchange:
Ports and Veeam Explorer for Microsoft SharePoint: Ports.

885 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Permissions
The following table lists the user account permissions necessary to launch Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams
and restore Microsoft Teams data.

Op eration Required Roles and Permissions

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft The account used to run Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams must meet
Tea ms launch the following requirements:
• The account must be a member of the local Administrators group.
• The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam
Restore Operator role on the backup server.

Restore to Microsoft 365 To restore Microsoft Teams data, you must grant the following roles and
permissions to user accounts:

Restore Using Basic Authentication Method

• The user account must have a Microsoft 365 license that permits
access to Microsoft Teams API. The minimum sufficient license is
Microsoft Teams Exploratory experience. For more information
about the Microsoft Teams Exploratory experience, see this
Microsoft article.
• To restore Microsoft Teams data, the user account must have the
Teams Administrator role.

Restore Using Modern Authentication Method

• The user account must have a Microsoft 365 license that permits
access to Microsoft Teams API. The minimum sufficient license is
Microsoft Teams Exploratory experience.
• To restore Microsoft Teams data, the user account must have the
Teams Administrator role.
• Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD
application used for restore. For more information, see the
Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam
Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.
• If you restore data with Azure AD applications using a certificate,
make sure that your Azure AD application is granted the required
permissions. For more information, see the Permissions for Modern
App-Only Authentication section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

886 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Considerations and Limitations
This section lists considerations and limitations of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams.

Data Restore
Consider the following when planning to restore Microsoft Teams data:

• Use of modern authentication with legacy protocols allowed is not supported for data restore with Veeam
Explorer for Microsoft Teams.

• You can restore Microsoft Teams data to the original organization only.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams does not change roles for team owners during restore. For example,
you create a backup of your organization, and then change role for a team member from Member to
Owner. In this case, if you restore this team member from the backup, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Teams will not set their role to Member.

• Restore of OneNote notebooks from backups of Microsoft Teams data for organizations with modern app-
only authentication is not supported.

• When restoring a channel tab, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams does not preserve relation between
the link to a file published on the tab and the file itself. You will need to link the tab to the fil e manually
after restore. This limitation does not apply to the scenario where you restore an entire team.

• Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams does not restore posts to their original location in the team channel.
Instead, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams exports posts to a file of the HTML format, creates a
separate tab in the original channel and attaches the HTML file to this tab.

• If a user never opened the Files tab of a team channel in Microsoft Teams before data backup, files from
this tab are not displayed in Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams.

• Before restoring posts, make sure that Website App is unblocked both for your organization and the user
account that you use to restore Microsoft Teams data.

• When restoring a channel, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams cannot rename this channel.

• Before restoring team data for a tenant organization with modern app -only authentication, make sure that
a user account used for authorization has access to the root SharePoint site of this tenant organiza tion.

887 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Launching Application and Exploring
Backups
To open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams and load backups, go to Sta rt, click Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Tea ms and manually open Microsoft Teams databases. For more information, see Standalone Databases.

If you open Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams from the Sta rt menu on a machine that runs the
Veeam Backup & Replication console and Veeam Explorers only, specify the following:

• The domain name or IP address of a server to which you want to connect

• The port number

• User account credentials

Consider the following:

o To perform restore operations, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams must be run with elevated
permissions. The user account must be a member of the local Administrators group on the machine
where Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams is installed.

o The account must have the Veeam Backup Administrator or Veeam Restore Operator role on the
backup server.

To use the account under which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams is running, select Use Windows
session authentication.

To save the connection shortcut to the desktop, click Sa ve shortcut in the bottom-left corner.

888 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting to Know User Interface
The user interface of Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams is designed to let you quickly find commands that you
need to restore and export Microsoft Teams data from backups created by Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365.

Main Menu
The main menu comprises the following options:

• General Options. Allows you to configure general application settings. For more information, see General
Application Settings.

• Help.

o Online help. Opens the online help page.

o Ab out. Shows the additional information including build number.

• E x it. Closes the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams window.

TIP

To open online help, press [F1] in any Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams wizard or window. You will then
be redirected to the relevant section of the user guide.

Main Application Window

The main application window contains the following UI elements:

• The ribbon menu, which contains operation commands organized into logical groups represented as tabs.
The ribbon menu is displayed at the top of the main application window.

• The navigation pane, which allows you to browse through the hierarchy of folders with backed -up data.
Also, it allows you to search for teams using keywords.

889 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 • The preview pane, which provides search capabilities and allows you to view details about items that are
contained in a folder you have selected in the navigation pane.

890 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Browsing, Searching and Viewing Items
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to view the contents of a backup file, view team properties,
open posts and files, search for teams and for items in a backup file as well as customize criteria of your search.

Searching for Teams

You can use keywords to search for teams in the database structure containing your Microsoft Teams objects. To
do this, enter a search query in the search field at the top of the navigation pane.

To remove a keyword, click the cross mark.

Browsing Backup Content

To view the contents of a backup file, you use the navigation pane which displays the database structure
containing your Microsoft Teams objects: teams, channels and channel tabs. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Teams groups channel tabs in the following nodes of the navigation pane:

• P osts. Contains the Posts tab of the channel.

• Files. Contains the Files tab of the channel.

• Other tabs. Contains other tabs of the channel that link to sites, documents, applications, and and other
objects.

891 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

After you select an object in the navigation pane, you can see its content in the preview pane.

Viewing Team Properties

You can view properties of a backed-up team. This may be useful, for example, in case you want to decide
whether to restore team properties during restore of a team.

To view team properties, in the navigation pane, right-click a necessary team and select View properties.

Opening Posts and Files

You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to open backed -up posts and files.

892 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To open a post or file, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, browse to the channel whose post or file you want to open and click the necessa ry
node: P osts or Files.

2. In the preview pane, right-click a post or file and select Op en.

Searching for Objects in Backup File

The search mechanism allows you to find items (posts, files and tabs) matching specified search criteria.

To search for required items, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select a node that contains an item you want to find: P osts, Files or Other tabs.

o Select a team or channel whose items you want to find. Then, from the drop -down list next to the
search field, select what type of items you want to find: Files, Posts or Other tabs .

2. Enter a search query in the search field.

Consider the following:

• You can use double quotes to find the exact phrase. For example, "Document" .

• You can narrow search results by specifying various search criteria using the criteria:value format. For
more information about search parameters, see this section of REST API Reference. For example,
author:"Administrator" .

• You can use logical upper-cased operators such as AND, OR and NOT along with wildcard characters such
as * and ?.

For example:

o meeting AND author:"Administrator" — returns objects that include both specified keywords.

o meeting OR author:"Administrator" — returns objects that include one of the specified keywords.

o NOT author:"Administrator" — excludes objects specified by a keyword.

893 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o hasattachment:compar* — returns all objects that contain an attachment and the attachment name is
started with compar.

o ?all — returns all objects that contain the specified keyword with any alphabet in the first position.

Using Advanced Find

The Ad vanced Find mechanism allows you to define your search criteria more precisely.

NOTE

The Ad vanced Find mechanism is supported for posts and files only. The mechanism is not supported for
tabs.

For example, to find a file whose name starts with comparison, do the following:

1. In the preview pane, select a node and click Ad vanced Find on the ribbon.

2. In the Define search criteria section, select Ca tegory > File fields.

3. From the Field list, select Na me.

4. From the Condition list, select sta rts with.

5. In the Va lue field, specify a file name.

6. Click Ad d to List and then click Sta rt.

894 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

To remove a filter, click the cross mark next to it. To remove all configured filters, click Reset.

895 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

General Application Settings
You can configure general settings for Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams.

896 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Mail Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams allows you to send Microsoft Teams posts and files as attachments in email
messages.

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams sends email messages on behalf of your Google or Microsoft 3 65 account
using OAuth 2.0 Authorization Framework, or you can specify connection settings of an SMTP server that uses
basic authentication.

For more information, see the following sections:

• SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

• Google Account

• Microsoft 365 Account

SMTP Server with Basic Authentication

To configure sending Microsoft Teams posts and files as attachments using an SMTP server with basic
authentication, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select SMTP server (basic authentication) .

5. Click Ad vanced to configure advanced settings. You can do the following:

o Specify a port number of an SMTP server that you want to use.

The default port number is 25. If you want to use SSL data encryption, specify port 587.

o Select the Connect using SSL check box to establish a secure connection.

o If an SMTP server requires an authentication for outgoing mail, select the The SMTP server requires
a uthentication check box and provide authentication credentials.

6. In the SMTP server field, specify the address of a server that you want to use as an SMTP server.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams establishes a connection to the smtp.office365.com
server.

7. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

897 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams
sends a test email message.

9. Click Send to send a test email message.

10. Click OK.

Google Account
You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to send Microsoft Teams posts and files as attachments
on behalf of your Google account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams communicates
with the Gmail API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams uses an access token issued by
Google Authorization Server. To acquire an access token, you can either use an application preinstalled by
Veeam Backup & Replication or specify OAuth 2.0 client credentials of the custom application registered in the
Google Cloud console. For more information on obtaining client credentials, see Registering Application in
Google Cloud Console.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Google account, d o the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Google Gmail (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Sig n in with Google and enter
credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Sig n in with
Goog le and enter credentials of your Google account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

898 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams
sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Google account,
specify a new email address in the From field and click Sig n in with Google.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Goog le Gmail Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify the following:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify specify the obtained client ID.

2. In the Client secret field, specify the client secret.

Registering Application in Google Cloud Console

To register an application in the Google Cloud console, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Google Cloud console under a Google account that you want to use for sending emails.

899 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. Create a new project and enable Gmail API for the project.

You can do this with the Google setup tool.

3. Configure OAuth consent screen for your project.

4. Create the OAuth 2.0 client ID credentials — a client ID and client secret for the custom application.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Client ID

o Client secret

Microsoft 365 Account

You can authorize Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to send Microsoft Teams posts and files as attachments
on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account. To send email messages, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams
communicates with the Microsoft Graph API. For authentication, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams uses an
access token issued by the Microsoft identity platform. To acquire an access token, you can either use an
application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication or specify details of the custom Azure AD application
registered in the Azure portal. For more information on obtaining client credentials, see Registering Application
in Azure Portal.

To configure sending email messages on behalf of your Microsoft 365 account, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ma il Settings tab.

3. Select the E na ble sending emails check box.

4. From the Ma il server drop-down list, select Microsoft 365 (modern authentication) .

5. Do one of the following:

o To use an application preinstalled by Veeam Backup & Replication, click Authorize now and enter
credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

o To use the custom application, click Ad vanced to specify the advanced settings, then click Authorize
now and enter credentials of your Microsoft 365 account to complete authentication.

6. In the From field, specify the email address to be shown as a sender.

7. In the Send a test email to field, specify the email address to which Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams
sends a test email message.

8. Click Send to send a test email message.

9. Click OK.

900 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 NOTE

You can change the sender email address. To send email notifications on behalf of another Microsoft 365
account, specify a new email address in the From field and click Re-a uthorize.

Configuring Advanced Settings

In the Microsoft 365 Application Settings window, select the Use custom application registration settings check
box and specify:

1. In the Ap p lication client ID field, specify an identification number of your Azure AD application.

You can find this number in an application settings in your Azure Active Directory. For more information,
see this Microsoft article.

2. In the Tena nt ID field, specify Azure Active Directory tenant ID.

Registering Application in Azure Portal

To register an application in the Azure portal, do the following:

1. Sign in to the Azure portal using an account that you want to use for sending emails. The account must
have an active subscription.

2. Register an application. For more information on registering applications, see this Microsoft article.

901 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 3. Select AP I permissions and grant the application the Mail.Send permission of the Application type for the
Microsoft Graph API.

4. Select Authentication > P latform configurations > Ad d a platform > Configure p latforms > Mobile and
d esktop applications and specify http://localhost as a redirect URI. For more information, see this
Microsoft article.

5. Record the following data required for acquiring an access token:

o Directory (tenant) ID

o Application (client) ID

902 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Advanced Settings
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams allows you to configure advanced settings such as extended logging mode
and pop-up notifications.

To configure advanced settings, do the following:

1. In the main menu, click General Options.

2. Open the Ad vanced tab.

3. If you want to enable extended logging mode to collect logs that contain additional information on
specific operations, select the E na ble extended logging check box. After enabling extended logging mode,
you can go back to the application and perform actions for which you want to collect additional
information. Then you can collect logs. For more information on log collection, see Getting Support.

4. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams displays notifications when loa ding backups created by
Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 from object storage. If you want to disable these notifications, clear the
Show p op-up notifications on startup check box.

5. Click OK.

903 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Standalone Databases
You can add standalone databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams scope and connect to a Veeam
Backup for Microsoft 365 server and service provider server to view backups located on these servers.

904 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365
Databases
To manually add databases that store Microsoft 365 organization data, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Org > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 database on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Org anizations node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 database.

2. Specify the database file location and log directory.

3. Click Op en.

NOTE

Make sure you have disabled the Veeam Backup Proxy for Microsoft 365 Service when adding local
databases. You can stop this service by using the services.msc console. If you try to add a database
having this service still in progress, you will receive an error message and will not be able to access the
database due to database lock.

905 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Server
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to connect to another Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server
and add its databases to the Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams scope.

To connect to another Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server remotely, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Org > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Org anizations node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 server.

2. Specify a server name or IP address and enter credentials to access the specified server.

Select the Use W indows session authentication check box to connect with the user account under which
you are currently logged in.

3. Click Connect.

906 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Adding Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 Service
Provider
In Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams, you can connect to a service provider server to add its backups to the
application scope and perform a restore directly from such backups.

NOTE

Make sure that both Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams and Veeam Backup & Replication are installed
on the same server and at least one service provider is added to Veeam Backup & Replication. For more
information, see the Connecting to Service Providers section of the Veeam Cloud Connect Guide.

To add Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service providers, do the following:

1. Do one of the following:

o On the Home tab, click Ad d Org > Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider on the ribbon.

o Right-click the Org anizations node and select Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 service provider.

2. From the Select service provider and authentication method drop-down list, select a service provider that
you want to add and select an authentication method that can be either Modern authentication or Basic
authentication.

3. [For Modern authentication] Select a region to which a Microsoft 365 organization of the selected service
provider belongs.

4. [For Modern authentication] Copy the device code and use it to sign in to Azure Active Directory.

For Basic authentication, you must enter a user name and password to connect to the service provider
server.

NOTE

You cannot use Basic authentication to load backups if a Microsoft 365 organization has been added
to the service provider infrastructure using Modern authentication.

5. Select a point-in-time state as of which you want to load Microsoft 365 backups.

To select a point in time, use the calendar control.

6. Select the Show items that have been deleted by user check box to see all the items that were removed.

7. Select the Show a ll versions of items that have b een modified by user check box if you want to load
modified versions.

907 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 8. Click Connect.

908 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Removing Organizations
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams allows you to remove an organization from the application scope when you
no longer need it.

To remove an organization from the application scope, right-click an organization in the navigation pane and
select Remove organization.

909 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Restore
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to restore Microsoft Teams data to Microsoft 365
organizations.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

910 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Teams
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to restore all teams of a Microsoft 365 organization or a
specific team of an organization.

Before restoring data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

To restore teams, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Select teams to restore.

5. Specify restore options.

6. Select team members to restore.

911 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

• If you want to restore multiple teams of a Microsoft 365 organization, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select an organization whose teams you want to restore, and on the Home tab,
click Restore Teams.

o In the navigation pane, right-click an organization whose teams you want to restore and select
Restore teams.

• If you want to restore a specific team, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a team that you want to restore, and on the Tea m tab, click Restore
Tea m.

912 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o In the navigation pane, right-click a team that you want to restore and select Restore team.

913 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data r estore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified team back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams populates this field with the identification number of the
application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure to
grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

914 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the Microsoft 365 organization.

915 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

916 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Select Teams
This step is only available if you launched the Restore wizard to restore multiple teams.

At this step of the wizard, select check boxes next to the teams that you want to restore.

917 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 5. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, specify data restore options:

1. Select the Cha nged items check box if you want to restore items that have changed since the time when
the backup was created. When you select this option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams overwrites
existing items in the original team.

2. Select the Missing items check box if you want to restore items that are missing in the original team. For
example, some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

3. Select the Restore team settings check box if you want to replace the current team settings with team
settings from the backup. For information on how to view team settings in the backup, see Viewing Team
Properties.

Keep in mind that you cannot select this check box if both the Cha nged items and Missing items check
boxes are cleared.

4. If you want to restore information about team members and their roles from the backup, make sure that
the Restore membership and their permissions check box is selected.

o If you launched the Restore wizard to restore a specific team, you will be able to review team
members at the next step of the wizard. Click Nex t.

o If you launched the Restore wizard to restore multiple teams, you cannot review team members. Click
Restore to start the restore operation.

You cannot proceed to the next step or start the restore operation, if you clear both the Cha nged items
and Missing items check boxes.

TIP

If you clear the Restore membership and their permissions check box, you can start the restore
operation immediately. To do this, click Restore.

918 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 6. Review Team Members
This step is only available if you launched the Restore wizard to restore a specific team and selected the Restore
membership and their permissions check box at the previous step of the wizard.

At this step of the wizard, review the list of users whose membership and roles in the team will be restored and
click Restore.

To quickly find the necessary team members, use the search field at the top of the wizard window.

NOTE

Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams does not change roles for team owners during restore. For example,
you create a backup of your organization, and then change role for a team member from Member to
Owner. In this case, if you choose to restore this team member from the backup, Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft Teams will not set their role to Member.

In the opposite case, if a team member role was changed from Owner to Member after the backup was
created, and you choose to restore team membership from the backup , Veeam Explorer for Microsoft
Teams will elevate the role to Owner during restore.

919 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Channels and Tabs
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to restore individual channels of a team. You can restore an
entire channel or specific tabs of a channel.

To restore channels and tabs, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify restore options.

920 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

• If you want to restore a channel, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, select a channel that you want to restore, and on the Cha nnel tab, click
Restore Channel.

o In the navigation pane, right-click a channel that you want to restore and select Restore channel.

• If you want to restore all tabs of a channel, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose tabs you want to restore, select Other tabs, and on
the Ta b s tab, click Restore Tabs.

921 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 o In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose tabs you want to restore, right-click Other tabs and
select Restore tabs.

• If you want to restore individual tabs of a channel, do the following:

a. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose tabs you want to restore and select Other tabs.

b. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

▪ Select a necessary tab, and on the Ta b s tab, click Restore Tabs.

▪ Right-click a tab and select Restore tabs.

TIP

To select more than one tab in the preview pane, press and hold the [CTRL] key and select the
necessary tabs.

922 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified team back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams populates this field with the identification number of the
application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure to
grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

923 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the Microsoft 365 organization.

924 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

925 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, specify data restore options and start the restore operation:

1. Select the Cha nged items check box if you want to restore items that have changed since the time when
the backup was created. When you select this option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams overwrites
existing items in your target location.

2. Select the Missing items check box if you want to restore items that are missing in the target location. For
example, some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

3. Click Restore.

NOTE

During restore of a tab, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams restores the name of the tab and a link to an
object published on the tab. The object itself, for example, a SharePoint site or document, is not restored
from the backup in this scenario. To restore such objects along with tabs, consider restoring an entire team.
For more information, see Restoring Teams.

926 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Posts
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to restore posts of a team channel. When you rest ore posts,
you can choose to restore all posts of a channel or restore posts published within a specified time period.

NOTE

Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 does not restore posts to their original location in the team channel.
Instead, Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 creates a new tab in the original channel and restores posts to
this tab. If you want to restore posts to another channel, use the export operation. For more information,
see Data Export.

To restore posts, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify restore options.

927 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do one of the following:

• In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose posts you want to restore, select P osts, and on the P osts
tab, click Restore Posts.

• In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose posts you want to restore, right-click P osts and select
Restore posts.

928 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified team back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams populates this field with the identification number of the
application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure to
grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

929 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the Microsoft 365 organization.

930 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

931 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, select restore options and click Restore.

You can select one of the following options:

• Restore all posts

Select this option if you want to restore all posts published in the channel.

• Restore posts for the specified time period

Select this option if you want to restore posts published in the channel during the specified time period.

If you select this option, in the From and To fields, specify the dates that define the start and end of the
desired time period. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will restore posts whose last modification date
belongs to the specified period.

When you restore posts, Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 will create a separate tab in the original team channel
and restore posts to this tab.

932 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Restoring Files
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to restore files of a team channel.

To restore files, do the following:

1. Launch the Restore wizard.

2. Select an authentication method.

3. Log in to Microsoft 365.

4. Specify restore options.

933 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 1. Launch Restore Wizard
To launch the Restore wizard, do the following:

• If you want to restore all files of a channel, do one of the following:

o In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose files you want to restore, select Files, and on the
Files tab, click Restore File.

o In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose files you want to restore, right-click Files and select
Restore files.

• If you want to restore individual files, do the following:

a. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose files you want to restore and select Files.

b. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

▪ Select a necessary file, and on the Files tab, click Restore File.

▪ Right-click a file and select Restore file.

934 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 TIP

To select more than one file in the preview pane, press and hold the [CTRL] key and select the
necessary files.

935 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 2. Select Authentication Method
At this step of the wizard, select either modern or basic authentication and specify authentication settings.

Modern Authentication
To use modern authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Modern authentication.

This will allow Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 to use an Azure AD application for data restore. Such an
application is used to restore the specified team back to Microsoft 365 organizations with enabled multi-
factor authentication (MFA) and enabled or disabled security defaults. For more information, see the
Adding Microsoft 365 Organizations section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

2. In the Ap p lication ID field, enter an identification number of the Azure AD application that you want to use
for data restore.

By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams populates this field with the identification number of the
application that was used during a backup session. If you want to use another application, make sure to
grant this application required permissions. For more information, see the Azure AD Application
Permissions section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

Basic Authentication
To use basic authentication, do the following:

1. From the Authentication method drop-down list, select Basic authentication.

936 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 2. In the Username and P a ssword fields, enter credentials to connect to the Microsoft 365 organization.

937 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 3. Log In to Microsoft 365
This step is only available if you have selected the Modern authentication option at the previous step of the
wizard.

At this step of the wizard, log in to your Microsoft 365 organization.

To log in to the Microsoft 365 organization, do the following:

1. Click Cop y code to copy an authentication code.

Keep in mind that a code is valid for 15 minutes. You can click Refresh to request a new code from
Microsoft.

2. Click the Microsoft authentication portal link.

A web browser window opens.

3. On the Sig n in to your account webpage, paste the code that you have copied and sign in to Microsoft
Azure.

Make sure to log in with the user account that has required permissions assigned. For more information,
see Permissions.

Make sure that the required settings are specified for the Azure AD application used for restore. For more
information, see the Configuring Azure AD Application Settings section of the Veeam Backup for Microsoft
365 User Guide.

4. Return to the Restore Wizard window and click Nex t.

938 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Step 4. Specify Restore Options
At this step of the wizard, specify data restore options and start the restore operation:

1. Select the Cha nged items check box if you want to restore items that have changed since the time when
the backup was created.

2. Select the Missing items check box if you want to restore items that are missing in the target location. For
example, some of the items were removed and you want to restore them from the backup.

3. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams restores all versions of backed -up files from the backup.
If you want to restore only the latest version of a file, select the Restore only the latest version check box.
If you select this option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will merge original files in the production
environment with the latest version of the files in the backup.

4. Click Restore.

939 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Data Export
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to export posts published in a team channel to a file of the
HTML format. You can export all posts of a channel, export posts created during a specified time period or
export individual posts.

The export operation can be useful, for example, if you want to restore posts of a team channel to another
channel. To do this, you can export posts to an HTML file, publish this file in Microsoft SharePoint and publish a
link to this file in a custom tab of the necessary channel.

Before exporting data, read the Considerations and Limitations section.

940 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Multiple Posts
To export posts of a channel, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose posts you want to export.

2. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select P osts, and on the P osts tab, click E x p ort P osts and select how you want to export posts:

▪ E x port to Desktop. Select this option if you want to perform the 1-Click Export operation.
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will immediately export all posts of the channel to the
Desktop folder.

▪ E x port to. Select this option if you want to specify what posts to export and where to export
posts.

o Right-click P osts and select E x port posts > E xport to Desktop or E x port posts > E xport to.

3. If you selected the E x port to option at the step 2, in the E x port wizard, do the following:

a. Specify what posts you want to export. You can select from the following options:

▪ E x port all posts. If you select this option, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will export all
posts published in the channel to an HTML file.

▪ E x port posts for the specified time period. If you select this option, you can define a time period
when posts that you want to export were created. To do this, specify the start date and end date
of the period in the From and To fields. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will export posts
whose last modification date belongs to the specified period.

b. In the Sa ve as field, click Browse and browse to a folder where you want to save an HTML file with
exported posts. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams exports posts to a file with the
following name: <Channel_name>_<date_and_time>.html . For example: Team
News_2023_02_10_18_51_38.html.

c. Select the Op en file after export check box if you want to open the resulting HTML file right after the
export operation is completed.

941 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 d. Click E x port.

942 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Exporting Individual Posts
To export a specific post of a channel, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose post you want to export and select P osts.

2. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select a necessary post, and on the P osts tab, click E x port Posts and select how you want to export
the post:

▪ E x port to Desktop. Select this option if you want to perform the 1-Click Export operation.
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will immediately export the post to the Desktop folder.

▪ E x port to. Select this option if you want to export the post to a custom location.

o Right-click a necessary post and select E x port to Desktop or E x port to.

TIP

To select more than one post in the preview pane, press and hold the [CTRL] key and select the
necessary posts.

3. If you selected the E x port to option at the step 2, in the E x port wizard, do the following:

a. In the Sa ve as field, click Browse and browse to a folder where you want to save an HTML file with
exported posts. By default, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams exports posts to a file with the
following name: <Channel_name>_<date_and_time>.html . For example: Team
News_2023_02_10_18_57_05.html .

b. Select the Op en file after export check box if you want to open the resulting HTML file right after the
export operation is completed.

943 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 c. Click E x port.

944 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Saving Posts
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to save posts published in a team channel as Microsoft
Exchange Mail Document ( .msg ) files. You can save all posts of a channel or specific posts. Veeam Explorer for
Microsoft Teams saves each post to a separate .msg file in the specified location.

Saving All Posts of Channel

To save posts published in a team channel, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose posts you want to save.

2. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select P osts, and on the P osts tab, click Sa ve P osts and select where you want to save posts:

▪ Sa ve to <folder_name>. Select this option if you want to perform the 1-Click Save operation.
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will save posts to the latest location that was used when
saving posts. If you have not saved posts yet, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams save posts to
the Desktop folder.

▪ Sa ve to .msg file. Select this option if you want to save posts to a custom location. To specify a
location, in the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder.

o Right-click P osts and select Sa ve p osts > Sa ve to <folder_name> or Sa ve posts > Sa ve to .msg file.

Saving Individual Posts

To save a specific post published in a team channel, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose post you want to save and select P osts.

2. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select a necessary post, and on the P osts tab, click Sa ve Posts and select where you want to save
posts:

945 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 ▪ Sa ve to <folder_name>. Select this option if you want to perform the 1-Click Save operation.
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will save posts to the latest location that was used when
saving posts. If you have not saved posts yet, Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams save posts to
the Desktop folder.

▪ Sa ve to .msg file. Select this option if you want to save posts to a custom location. To specify a
location, in the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select Folder.

o Right-click a necessary post and select Sa ve to <folder_name> or Sa ve to .msg file .

TIP

To select more than one post in the preview pane, press and hold the [CTRL] key and select the
necessary posts.

946 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Saving Files
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to save files published in a team channel to a specified
location. You can save all files of a channel or specific posts.

Saving All Files of Channel

To save files published in a team channel, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose files you want to save.

2. In the navigation pane, do one of the following:

o Select Files, and on the Files tab, click Sa ve File and select how you want to save files:

▪ Sa ve as files. Select this option if you want to save each file separately to a specified location. To
specify a location, in the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select
Fold er.

▪ Sa ve as ZIP. Select this option if you want to add saved files to a ZIP archive and save the
resulting archive to a specified location. To specify a location, in the displayed window, browse
to the necessary folder and click Sa ve. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will save files to an
archive with the <channel_name>.zip name.

o Right-click Files and select Sa ve files > Save as files or Sa ve files > Sa ve as ZIP.

Saving Individual Files

To save a specific file published in a team channel, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose files you want to save and select Files.

2. In the preview pane, do one of the following:

o Select a necessary file, and on the Files tab, click Sa ve File and select how you want to save files:

947 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 ▪ Sa ve as files. Select this option if you want to save each file separately to a specified location. To
specify a location, in the displayed window, browse to the necessary folder and click Select
Fold er.

▪ Sa ve as ZIP. Select this option if you want to add saved files to a ZIP archive and save the
resulting archive to a specified location. To specify a location, in the displayed window, browse
to the necessary folder and click Sa ve. Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will save files to an
archive with the archive.zip name.

o Right-click a necessary file and select Sa ve file > Sa ve as files or Sa ve file > Sa ve as ZIP.

TIP

To select more than one file in the preview pane, press and hold the [CTRL] key and select the
necessary files.

948 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Sending Posts and Files
You can use Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams to send posts and files published in a team channel to
specified recipients by email. You can send all posts or files of a channel or send individual posts or files.

TIP

Before sending documents, make sure to configure mail settings. The amount of data you can send at a
time depends on your SMTP server configuration. For more information about configuring mail settings,
see Mail Settings.

Sending All Posts or Files of Channel

To send all posts or files of a team channel by email, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose posts or files you want to send.

2. Depending on the type of object you want to send, the following actions are available:

o To send posts, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select P osts, and on the P osts tab, click Send Posts.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click P osts and select Send to.

o To send files, do one of the following:

▪ In the navigation pane, select Files, and on the Files tab, click Send File.

▪ In the navigation pane, right-click Files and select Send to.

3. In case the size of the message with files exceeds the size allowed by your SMTP server configuration,
Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams will prompt whether you want to send files. In the notification
window, click Y es .

949 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 4. In the Send Items window, provide a recipient address.

The From field is filled automatically based on the address you have provided when conf iguring mail
settings.

You can also edit the message subject and body. To edit the message body, click More details.

Sending Individual Posts or Files

To send a specific post or file of a team channel by email, do the following:

1. In the navigation pane, expand a channel whose post or file you want to send and select P osts or Files.

2. Depending on the type of object you want to send, the following actions are available:

o To send a post, do one of the following:

▪ In the preview pane, select a necessary post, and on the P osts tab, click Send Posts.

▪ In the preview pane, right-click a necessary post and select Send to.

o To send a file, do one of the following:

▪ In the preview pane, select a necessary file, and on the Files tab, click Send File.

950 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

 ▪ In the preview pane, right-click a necessary file and select Send to.

3. In the Send Items window, provide a recipient address.

The From field is filled automatically based on the address you have provided when configuring mail
settings.

You can also edit the message subject and body. To edit the message body, click More details.

951 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide

Getting Support
If you have any questions or issues with Veeam Explorer for Microsoft Teams, you can visit Veeam R&D Forums
or submit a support case on the Veeam Customer Support Portal.

Before you submit a support ticket, make sure that comprehensive information is provided to the Veeam
Support Team. To do this, take the following steps:

1. Perform the problematic operation with the extended logging mode enabled. For more information, see
Advanced Settings.

2. Use the Sup port Information wizard as described in the Collecting Log Files section of the Veeam Backup
for Microsoft 365 User Guide.

952 | V eeam Explorers | User Guide